SALES AND SERVICE SYSTEM

Transcription

1

2 SALES AND SERVICE SYSTEM Service Network with Sales Representatives Stationed in 62 Countries/Areas FINLAND THE NETHERLANDS LEADER ELECTRONICS EUROPEAN OFFICE Nijverheidsweg 15, 5627BT Eindhoven, The Netherlands PHONE: FAX: UNITED KINGDOM IRELAND BELGIUM FRANCE GERMANY SWITZERLAND SPAIN PORTUGAL CANARY Is. NORWAY SWEDEN ESTONIA LITHUANIA DENMARK CZECH AUSTRIA RUSSIA JAPAN LEADER ELECTRONICS CORP , Tsunashima-Higashi, Kohoku-ku, Yokohama , Japan PHONE: FAX: Regional Office CHINA (Beijing) LEADER ELECTRONICS CORP. BEIJING OFFICE Unit 08, 6th floor of Tower B, BEIJING COFCO PLAZA No.8 Jianguomennei Dajie Dongcheng District, Beijing , P.R. China PHONE: , FAX: ITALY SYRIA BANGLADESH GREECE PAKISTAN THAILAND JORDAN TUNISIA VIETNAM KUWAIT NEPAL EGYPT MOROCCO ISRAEL INDIA KOREA TAIWAN GHANA SAUDI ARABIA Leader Electronic Corp. has focused its attention on international markets from the beginning. LEADER established local corporations in U.S.A. in 1969, in Hong Kong in Many other positive measures have also been taken before other companies. In July 1995, LEADER s own service center was set up at Shanghai for better service/ maintenance in China. In 2003, Regional Offices were established in Beijing and Dongguan to support LEADER products, which are becoming increasing popular in view of the growing Japanese presence in the China. Also in September 2006, Regional office was established in THE NETHERLANDS. The company now has a global network linking its agents in 62 countries/areas. CHINA (Shanghai) LEADER SHANGHAI TECHNICAL SERVICE CENTER No.776 Qinzhou Road(SOUTH), Shanghai,CHINA Zip Code PHONE: , FAX: SOUTH AFRICA OMAN UNITED ARAB EMIRATES SRI LANKA MALAYSIA SINGAPORE INDONESIA Regional Office CHINA (Dongguan ) LEADER INSTRUMENTS (H. K.) LTD. DONGGUAN OFFICE 9G, Tower B, Lianjian Trade Building, Dongguan Station, changping, dongguan, Guangdong Province, China PHONE: , FAX: BRUNEI PHILIPPINES AUSTRALIA LEADER INSTRUMENTS (H.K.) LTD. (HONG KONG) LEADER SHANGHAI TECHNICAL SERVICE CENTER (CHINA) LEADER INSTRUMENTS CORP. BEIJING OFFICE 2

3 U.S.A. (Los Angeles) LEADER INSTRUMENTS CORP. Los Angeles office 6484 Commerce Drive, Cypress, California U.S.A. PHONE: FAX: CANADA LEADER INSTRUMENTS CORP. (LOS ANGELES) HONG KONG LEADER INSTRUMENTS (H. K.) LTD. Room 303 New East Ocean Centre, 9 Science Museum Road, Tsimshatsui East, Kowloon, HONG KONG PHONE: (852) FAX: (852) MEXICO COLOMBIA COSTA RICA TRINIDAD AND TOBAGO VENEZUELA PERU BRAZIL NEW ZEALAND CHILE ARGENTINA LEADER ELECTRONICS CORP. SHANGHAI OFFICE LEADER ELECTRONICS CORP. (Head office) 3

4 T RACEABILITY ACCURATE TRACEABILITY ENSURES HIGHLY RELIABLE MEASUREMENTS Measuring Standards and Traceability As technological innovations are making significant advances possible in the electronics industry, users are demanding higher product quality and reliability. As a result, the measuring instruments used for the research, development, production, inspection, and measurement of products must also provide higher performance and precision. Such instruments must also offer trouble-free operation and must provide high reliability and uniformity. If measuring instruments lack this reliability and uniformity, the results of important research or testing will prove unreliable. Consequently, the precision of each measuring instrument used must be carefully checked. The management of measuring instruments is of vital importance. To maintain high measuring accuracy, periodic calibration must be done. For such calibration, standards and measuring devices must be prepared and calibrated according to higher-level standards, up to and including the national standards, in order to comply with international standards. For this reason, a high level of traceability must be established. Resistance and capacitance standards Voltage standards 4

5 Automatic phase noise measurement system Frequency and Attenuation standards Traceability of Leader Electronics The figure to the next page shows an example of the traceability system used by Leader Electronics. At Leader, a standards room is provided where international standard values are set for the internal measuring devices. The internal standards that are periodically determined by public organizations are well managed to maintain high precision. These standards are used for periodic of the various measuring instruments used by the production, research and development, and maintenance sections. As a result, all internal measuring instruments perform tracing according to international standards to ensure the production of high-precision products. Standards Room When standards are to be maintained or newly established, changing environmental factors may adversely affect the results. To ensure that the same results are always obtained, such environmental conditions as temperature and humidity must remain constant. This is very important for accurate traceability. The standards room of Leader Electronics has a shielded wall structure in which air is blown in from the entire ceiling. Air is blown out linearly from the side walls to maintain a stable distribution of temperature and humidity. The room temperature is 23 C ±2 C at a relative humidity of 55 % ±10 %, with an electromagnetic shielding effect of 40 db or more. Standards The traceability standards used in the standards room are classified into collation, primary, and secondary standards according to actual applications. The collation standards use the national standard values provided by the Japan Electric Meters Inspection Corporation (JEMIC) and Japan Quality Assurance Organization (JQA) for direct calibration. The primary standards are high-precision standards for measuring instruments used to maintain the internal standard values for establishing the secondary standards. The established collation standards are used for calibration. The secondary standards are for measuring instruments used to directly calibrate measuring instruments at work sites. Leader Electronics will continue to develop high-level measurement technologies and establish internal standards for management to improve the quality and reliability of its products for safe operation. ISO9001/ISO9002 Leader Electronics Corp. has already obtained ISO9001 certification. The Calibration and Service Department independently obtained ISO9002 certification and has established a high-quality assurance system. Leader Electronics Corp. was certified by National Institute of Technology and Evaluation (NITE) on March 2002 as complying with "ISO/IEC17025 (JIS Q17025)," i.e., international standards for calibration service business, based on the Japan Calibration Service System (JCSS). 5

6 T RACEABILITY TRACEABILITY CHART National Institute of Advanced Industrial Science and Technology AIST Japan Electric Meters Inspection Corporation JEMIC FLUKE PANASONIC Reference Standard Inductor 1482-L GR Reference Standard Capacitor 1404-A GR Reference Standard Resistor SR104 esi DC Standard 732A/732B FLUKE Thermal Transfer Standard 540B FLUKE Standard Current Shunt Y5020 FLUKE Impedance Video Bridge 2100 esi Capacitance Measuring Assembly 1620-A GR Standard Resistor Resistance Measuring System 242D esi Null Detector 845AR FLUKE N11 EM Calibrator 5700A FLUKE Reference Divider 752A FLUKE AC Calibration System 5200A/5215A FLUKE Trans- Conductance Amplifier 5220A FLUKE AC Measurement Standard 5790A FLUKE Multimeter 3458A HP Calibrator 5700A FLUKE 742A FLUKE Calibrator 5500A FLUKE Digital Multimeter 8508A 8505A FLUKE High Voltage Digital Meter A KIKUSUI Time Interval Analyzer TA520 YOKOGAWA Standard Inductor RS-TYPE ANDO Standard Capacitor SM228C/SM330 SOSHIN Standard Resistor SR1 esi 1433-M/ GR/YEW DC High Voltage Divider TR1321D ADVANTEST High Voltage DC Power Supply NG10P200 GLASSMAN AC Voltage Current Standard 2858 YEW Distortion Meter Calibrator AC12A SHIBASOKU Oscilloscope Calibrator TG501/5820A TEKTRONIX/ FLUKE Multi Frequency LCR Meter 4274A YHP Standard Capacitor TM520C SOSHIN Digital High Megohm Meter TR8611A ADVANTEST AC/RMS Volt Meter 400E/3400A HP Digital Multimeter 3468B 34401A AGILENT TECHNOLOGIES High Voltage Probe TR1116 ADVANTEST Potential Transformer PTS-4-1-SP TOKYOSEIDEN Automatic Distortion Analyzer AD725C/334A SHIBASOKU/HP Oscilloscope 5470A HP SS7840 IWATU CS6400 KENWOOD INDUCTANCE. CAPACITANCE. RESISTANCE AC/DC VOLTAGE. AC/DC CURRENT. WAVE FORM 6

7 National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST (USA) Japan Quality Assurance Organization JQA National Institute of Information and Communications Technology NICT JJY National Standards TEKTRONIX AGILENT TECHNOLOGIES NITSUKI ANRITSU Sensor Module 11722A HP Themistor Mount 8478B HP Power Meter 432B HP Themal Converter A-55 FLUKE VLF/LF Receiver 900A TRACOR Frequency Standard 58503A HP Frequency Counter 53132A HP Transfer/ Primary Standards Video Measurement Set VM 700T TEKTRONIX Standard Attenuator Sets 11581A HP Measuring Receiver 8902A HP Dual Power Reference 435B-K05 HP Power Meter Range Calibrator 8477A HP Frequency Standard TR3110 ADVANTEST Frequency Difference Meter 527E TRACOR Stereo Modulator VP-7633A PANASONIC Calibrator JIG5709A JIG5709 LEADER Stereo Demodulator 5185 NITSUKI C QUAM Synthe Sizer CQS-3 DELTA Test Signal Generator SPG /410P/411 LEADER/TEKTRONIX Synthesized Signal Generator 8663A/3335A E8257A HP Power Sensor 8482A/8483A/ 8484A HP Digital Power Meter 437B/E4418B HP Optical Power Meter ML93A/ML97A ANRITSU Frequency Counter 5345A/5355A HP 5823H ADVANTEST Secondary Standards Function Generator Vector/Wave- Form Monitor LV5150D/LV5160D 5870/5871 LEADER DTV wave Form Monitor Spectrum Analyzer E4440A HP AGILENT Level Meter ML69A ANRITSU Level Generator MG442A ANRITSU Network Analyzer E5071A 33120A HP FWM1125 TEKTRONIX VIDEO SIGNAL LEVEL/PHASE AUDIO RF LEVEL. POWER. ATTENUATOR OPTICAL POWER FREQUENCY. PERIOD 7

8 NEW PRODUCT'S DIGEST MULTI MONITOR MULTI MONITOR LV 5800 Multi Input Display Format The cabinet is sold separately Monitor 8

9 DVB-T SIGNAL GENERATOR Ideal For The Production, Test and Alignment Of DVB-T Compliant Tuners And Receivers/STBs shown with Option 71 MULTIFORMAT VIDEO GENERATOR Applicable to both HD-SDI and SD-SDI systems 1U half-rack size Applicable to both HD-SDI and SD-SDI systems Superimposing ID characters Superimposing logomark Safety-area marker Superimposing embedded audio Genlock mode Stay-in sync function Analog black signal output Pattern scroll (Simple motion picture mode) Word clock output Applicable to SNMP LT 4400 MULTIFORMAT T VIDEO GENERATOR 9

10 INDEX BY MODEL NO. 100 LMV-186A 2-CH AC Millivoltmeter LT 292 HD/SD SDI Line Checker LW 360 TV Tuner Measuring System , NPS Pattern Generator (NTSC/PAL/SECAM). 64 to BB NTSC Sync Generator LT 416 Pattern Generator (NTSC/PAL/SECAM)... 72, 73 LT 428 Component Digital Sync Generator LT 436 Pattern Generator (NTSC)... 70, 71 LT 436NP Pattern Generator (NTSC/PAL)... 68, 69 LT 443D Multiformat Video Generator LT 443D-GLA Genlock Unit LT 443D-HD HD-SDI Unit LT 443D-SD SD-SDI Unit LT 443D-BL Analog Black Unit LT 443D-AA Analog Audio Unit LT 443D-DA Digital Audio Unit LT 443D-CS Analog Composite Unit LT 444 Change Over... 56, 57 LT 448 Multiformat Pattern Generator to LE 713 Thermal Printer LF 941D TV Signal Level Meter... 84, 85 LF 970 PHS Handy Field Analyzer... 86, LT 1606 Video Encoder... 74, 75 LT 1610A Programmable Video Generatorr 76, 78, 81, 82 LT B Remote Controller LT 1611 Programmable Video Generator.. 77, 78, 81, 82 LT 1615 Programmable Video Generator to 82 LBA-1810 BTL Adaptor LE 1870 Digital Processing Jitter Meter , 111 LE 1871 Digital Processing Jitter Meter , 105 LE 1875(S1 version) Digital Processing Jitter Analyzer , 109 LE 1876 Digital Processing Jitter Analyzer , FS 3018 Lighting Monitor FS 3019 SDI Signal Line Monitoring Software Signal Generator 100 khz to 140 MHz... 98, 99 LG 3236(S1 version) Signal Generator 100 khz to 170 MHz... 96, 97 LG 3802(S1 version) ISDB-T Signal Generator... 88, 89 LG 3803(S1 version) 8VSB/QAM Signal Generator... 90, 91 LG OUT OF BAND Generator... 92, 93 LG 3804 DVB-T Signal Generator... 94, LT 4400 Multiformat Video Generator... 54, LV 5100D Component Digital Waveform Monitor... 34, 35 LV 5100DE Component Digital Waveform Monitor LV 5152 Multiformat Waveform Monitor... 32, 33 LV 5152DA HD Digital Waveform Monitor... 30, Vectorscope (NTSC)... 42, Vectorscope (NTSC/PAL)... 42, Waveform Monitor (525 Lines)... 38, Waveform Monitor (525 Lines/625 Lines)... 38, 39 LV 5700A Multi SDI Monitor (HD-SDI/SD-SDI) to 25 LV 5750 Multi SDI Monitor (HD-SDI/SD-SDI)... 20, 21 LV 5800 Multi Monitor... 12, 13 LV 58SER01A SDI INPUT... 14, 15 LV 58SER02 EYE PATTERN UNIT LV 58SER20 DVI-I OUTPUT UNIT LV 58SER40 DIGITAL AUDIO UNIT Stereo Audio Monitor... 48, 49 LV 5836C Surround Audio Monitor... 46, V Vectorscope (NTSC)... 44, V Vectorscope (PAL)... 44, V Waveform Monitor (525 Lines)... 40, V Waveform Monitor (625 Lines)... 40, Vector/Waveform Monitor (NTSC)... 36, A Vector/Waveform Monitor (NTSC)... 36, Vector/Waveform Monitor (PAL)... 36, LV 7700 Multi SDI Rasterizer(HD/SD-SDI)... 18, 19 LV 7720 SD SDI Rasterizer(SD-SDI)... 18, LS 8022 Oscilloscope 20 MHz 2-CH , 117 LS 8050 Oscilloscope 50 MHz 2-CH , LT 9213A LCD Flicker Checker LT 9610 SDI System Margin Checker... 28, 29 10

11 INDEX BY FUNCTIONS V IDEO Signal Generator, Waveform Monitor, Vectorscope Multi Monitor LV , 13 SDI INPUT LV 58SER01A... 14, 15 EYE PATTERN UNIT LV 58SER DVI-I OUTPUT UNIT LV 58SER DIGITAL AUDIO UNIT LV 58SER Multi SDI Rasterizer LV , 19 SD SDI Rasterizer LV , 19 Multi SDI Monitor LV , 21 SDI Monitor (HD-SDI/SD-SDI) LV 5700A to 25 HD/SD SDI Line Checker LT Lighting Monitor FS SDI Signal Line Monitoring Software FS SDI System Margin Checker LT , 29 HD Digital Waveform Monitor LV 5152DA... 30, 31 Multiformat Waveform Monitor LV , 33 Component Digital Waveform Monitor LV 5100D... 34, 35 Component Digital Waveform Monitor LV 5100DE Vector/Waveform Monitor (NTSC) 5870/5872A... 36, 37 Vector/Waveform Monitor (PAL) , 37 Waveform Monitor (525/625 Lines, 525 Lines) 5222, , 39 Waveform Monitor (625 Lines, 525 Lines) 5861V, 5860V... 40, 41 Vectorscope (NTSC/PAL, NTSC) 5212, , 43 Vectorscope (PAL, NTSC) 5851V, 5850V... 44, 45 Multiformat Video Generator LT 443D Genlock Unit LT 443D-GLA HD-SDI Unit LT 443D-HD SD-SDI Unit LT 443D-SD Analog Black Unit LT 443D-BL Analog Audio Unit LT 443D-AA Digital Audio Unit LT 443D-DA Analog Composite Unit LT 443D-CS Multiformat Video Generator LT , 55 Change Over LT , 57 Component Digital Sync Generator LT NTSC Sync Generator 410BB Pattern Generator (NTSC/PAL/SECAM) LT , 73 Pattern Generator (NTSC/PAL/SECAM) 408NPS to 67 Pattern Generator (NTSC/PAL) LT 436NP... 68, 69 Pattern Generator (NTSC) LT , 71 Multiformat Pattern Generator LT to 63 Audio Monitor Stereo Audio Monitor , 49 Surround Audio Monitor LV 5836C... 46, 47 Programmable Video/Pattern Generator Video Generator LT 1610A/1611/ to 82 Remote controller LT B Video Encoder Video Encoder LT , 75 Flicker Checker LCD Flicker Checker LT 9213A L EVEL METER TV (VHF/UHF/CATV) TV Signal Level Meter LF 941D... 84, 85 PHS PHS Handy Field Analyzer LF , 87 S IGNAL GENERATOR Standard Signal Generator 100 khz to 170 MHz LG 3236(S1 version)... 96, khz to 140 MHz , 99 Digital Broadcast Signal Generator ISDB-T Signal Generator LG 3802(S1 version)... 88, 89 8VSB/QAM Signal Generator LG 3803(S1 version)... 90, 91 OUT OF BAND Generator LG , 93 DVB-T Signal Generator LG , 95 S WEEP GENERATOR TV Tuner Measuring System LW , 101 A UDIO Millivoltmeter 2-CH AC Millivoltmeter LMV-186A For Digital Audio Equipment Digital Processing Jitter Analyzer LE , 103 Digital Processing Jitter Meter LE , 105 Digital Processing Jitter Analyzer LE 1875(S1 version) , 109 Digital Processing Jitter Meter LE , 111 O SCILLOSCOPE Oscilloscope 50 MHz 2-CHLS , MHz 2-CHLS , 117 O THERS BTL Adaptor LBA Thermal Printer LE A PPENDIX Accessories to 121 Materials to

12 VIDEO Your Desired combination of units allows a flexible waveform monitor PATENTED: Equivalent cable length measurement LV 5800 MULTI MONITOR Please use exclusive cabinet for Model LV 5800 (photograph shows LR 2427B) The Panel design is subject to change. The cabinet is sold separately. GENERAL The LV 5800 is a new type of multi monitor that allows you freely configure various input and output units according to your application. You can construct a versatile system by combining dedicated input and output units. In particular, simultaneous display and error monitoring of multiple SDI inputs are possible, and four-waveform parade display on the waveform monitor is also supported. FEATURES Four Input Slots Up to four input units can be inserted. Each input unit operates independently. Two Output Slots Up to two output units can be inserted. Each output unit operates independently. Display Function Employs a color TFT LCD monitor with XGA resolution (1,024 x 768). The display function of each unit can be displayed on a full screen or 4 screen multi display. The 4 screen display allows arbitrary combination of signals of different input units to be displayed. USB Connector Screen captures, records of data, and presets can be stored by connecting a USB memory to the USB connector on the front panel. Ethernet Connector Remote control through TELNET or FTP, error monitoring, and file transfer are possible by connecting a PC to the Ethernet connector on the rear panel. Remote Connector The remote connector on the rear panel allows recalling of presets, detection of errors, and switching of inputs. Low Noise Cooling System Equipped with a low noise fan. Fan speed controlled using a temperature sensor. If the fan stops due to a malfunction, an alarm can be displayed on the screen through the revolution sensor. Headphone Socket Sound can be monitored when the LV 58SER40 is installed. LV 58SER20/LV 58SER01A/LV 58SER40/ LV 58SER02 for installation example Unit List LV 58SER01A SDI INPUT LV 58SER02 LV 58SER20 LV 58SER40 EYE PATTERN UNIT DVI-I OUTPUT UNIT DIGITAL AUDIO UNIT 12

13 VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS Slot Number of Slots for Input: 4 Number of Slots for Output: 2 LCD Display LCD Screen Type: 6.3-inch TFT color Display Format: Clock Frequency: XGA Effective area 1024 x 768 dots MHz (The input signal and the display clock signal have not been synchronized.) Frame Frequency: MHz Backlight Brightness: Selects HIGH or LOW Auto Shutoff: Sets the time for the backlight to shutoff automatically. Display Screen: 1-screen display, 2-screen display, 4-screen display Screen Capture Capture: Media: Data Output: Image capture by the still picture of the display screen Records 1 screen in the internal memory. Internal memory (RAM) or a USB memory Save data in B.M.P. format to a PC via a USB memory or Ethernet network. (When the unit equipped with video signal frame capture functions, such as LV 58SER01A is inserted.) Switches the frame capture and the image capture of the display screen. Presets Number of Presets: 60 Media: Internal memory (RAM) or a USB memory Recall Method: Through the front panel, remote connector, and Ethernet network (Switches 8 points and 60 points for recalling through the remote connector.) Copy: LV 5800 MAIN FRAME Copies presets collectively to the USB memory or from the USB memory to the LV External Reference Input Input Signal: Tri-level sync signal or NTSC/PAL black burst Input Connector: BNC connector 1 system 2 connectors Input Impedance: 15 kω Passive Loop-through Input Return Loss: 30 db Maximum Input Voltage: ±5 V (DC + peak AC) External Control Connector USB Connector Specifications: USB2.0 Function: Only a large capacity memory device is supported. Ethernet Connector (Future) Corresponding Standard: IEEE802.3 Input/Output Connector: RJ-45 Function: Remote control from an external computer and monitoring of errors, etc. Type: 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Remote Connector Function: Recalling of presets, monitoring of errors Control Signal: LV-TTL level (LOW active) Control Connector: 25-pin D-sub (female) Headphone Output PHONES connector: Miniature jack (stereo) Function: Like LV 58SER40 (DIGITAL AUDIO Unit), it is effective when the unit that has audio decoding function is inserted. Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature: 0 to 40 C Operating Humidity: 85 % RH(without condensation) Operating Environment: Indoor use Operating Altitude: Up to 2,000 m Overvoltage Category: II Pollution Degree: 2 Power Requirements: 90 to 250 VAC 50 Hz/60 Hz, 150 Wmax. Dimensions: 215(W) x 133(H) x 449(D) mm Accessories: Power cord... 1 Cover/Inlet stopper... 1 Screws for rack mounting (inch specification)... 2 Instruction manual pin D-sub connector pin D-sub connector cover input Waveform parade Display (Ex, LV 58SER01A 2 sets are installed) 4 input Picture Display (Ex, LV 58SER01A 2 sets are installed) Multi Display of 5 bar, Waveform, Status, Picture (Ex, LV 58SER01A 1 set is installed) Eye Pattern Display Multi Display of Eyepattern, Waveform, Status, Picture (Ex, LV 58SER01A/LV 58SER02 1 set each are installed) Audio Display (Ex, LV 58SER40 1 set is installed) 13 Multi Display (Ex, LV 58SER01A 1 set is installed)

14 VIDEO Diversified Units for Various Applications LV 58SER01A SDI INPUT This unit is an SDI input unit that installed in a LV 5800 input slot. The unit allows waveform display, picture display, and error detection of the SDI signal on the LV Combination with other optional units allows various displays such as the eye pattern display of the SDI signal (LV 58SER02) and the Lissajous and level displays of the embedded audio (LV 58SER40). The SDI signal that is inputted to the ACH or the BCH can be outputted respectively from the ACH/BCH Reclockout output connector by interlocking with the input key of the front panel. FEATURES Two-Channel Serial Digital I/O An SDI input unit contains two channels of SDI input connectors. The two connectors can also function as a dual link input of a single channel. SDI output that is reclocked using a serial signal is provided for each input. In addition, the SDI signal that is inputted to the ACH or the BCH can be outputted respectively from the ACH/ BCH Reclockout output connector by interlocking with the input key of the front panel. Video Signal Display Function In addition to displaying the video waveforms, vectors, and pictures of the SDI signal on a full screen, 2- and 4- screen multi display can be shown. The multi display allows arbitrary combination of a single or multiple input signals to be displayed. (Multi display in which link A and link B are separated during dual link operation is not allowed.) Error Detection Function Detects various errors related to the SDI, embedded audio, and ancillary data including CRC errors and EDH errors. Ancillary Data Analysis Supports various types of ancillary data for analysis display. In particular, closed caption data can be displayed overlapped on the picture. (future support) 5 BAR DISPLAY Peak levels of video signals can be displayed in place of the vectors. SDI-EXT REF Phase Display Difference Function The SDI-EXT REF phase difference display function shows the phase difference between the SDI signal and the external sync signal (EXT REF). Simultaneous Monitoring of Component and Composite Gamut Using the Five Bar Displays Japanese Caption Display Function (to be supported in the future) Embedded Audio Demultiplex Function The unit is equipped with a function for demultiplexing the embedded audio signal. Level meter and Lissajous displays can be achieved when used in combination with the digital audio unit (LV 58SER40). The signal can also be output as AES/EBU. Dual link input 14 Video Formats and Corresponding Standards Single Link System Video Signal Corresponding Formats and Corresponding Standards Format Y, CB, CR 4:2:2 Dual Link System Video Signal Corresponding Formats and Corresponding Standards Format GBR 4:4:4 Y, CB, CR 4:2:2 The phase difference between link A and B is automatically corrected up to 100 clocks (approximately 1.4 µs) and displayed. Ancillary data standard: Embedded audio standard: Format Setting: SMPTE 291M HD-SDI: SMPTE 299M SD-SDI: SMPTE 272M Automatic setting (In a dual link mode, only frame / field frequency is set automatically.) Input/Output Connector SDI Input Input Connector: BNC connector 2 connectors For single link A ch / B ch 2 systems For dual link link A / link B 1 system Input Impedance: 75 Ω Input Return Loss: 15 db or more 5 MHz to serial clock frequency Maximum Input Voltage: ±2 V (DC + peak AC ) External Sync Signal Input Input Signal: Tri-level sync signal or NTSC/PAL black burst signal Input Connector: BNC connector 1 system 2 connectors SDI Output Output Connector: BNC connector 2 connectors Reclocks serially and outputs the input signal. For single link A ch / B ch 2 systems For dual link link A / link B 1 system Output Impedance: 75 Ω Output Voltage: 800 mvp-p ±10 % Output Return Loss: 15 db or more 5 MHz to serial clock frequency Waveform Display Function Waveform Operation Display Mode Overlay display: Displays component signals overlaid Parade display: Displays component signals side by side Gain Adjustment: x1 / x5 / variable Blanking Period: Show / hide selectable YCBCR GBR conversion: Converts YCBCR signals into GBR and displays the result. Pseudo-Composite Display: Artificially converts component signals into composite signals and displays the result. Timing Display: Displays by calculating Y-CB and Y-CR Uses bowtie signals (authorised by Tektronix, inc.) Channel Assignment: Selects GBR order or RGB order during GBR conversion display Line Select: Displays the selected line Image Quality Adjustment: Brightness adjustment Vertical axis Sensitivity: V scale 0 V to 0.7 V, -0.3 V to 0.7 V % scale 0 % to 100 %, -50 % to 100 % Gain: x1, x5, and variable Variable Gain: x0.2 to x10 Amplitude Accuracy: ±0.5 % Frequency Response HDTV Y Signal: ±0.5 % 1 MHz to 30 MHz CB, CR Signal: ±0.5 % 0.5 MHz to 15 MHz Low-pass Attenuation: 20 db or more at 20 MHz Frequency Response SDTV Y Signal: ±0.5 % 1 MHz to 5.75 MHz CB, CR Signal: ±0.5 % 0.5 MHz to 2.75 MHz Low-pass Attenuation: 20 db or more at 3.8 MHz Horizontal Axis Line Display Display Format: Overlay: 1H, 2H Parade: 1H, 2H, 3H Timing: Y-CB,Y-CR 4Y Parade*:4H Magnification: Quantization 10bit Quantization 10bit 12bit 10bit 12bit Scanning 1080i 1080p 1080PsF 720p Scanning 1080p 1080PsF 1080i 1080p 1080PsF 1080i 1080p 1080p 1080PsF 1080i Frame(Field) Frequency 60/59.94/50 30/29.97/25/24/ /29.97/25/24/ /59.94/50/ 30/29.97/25/24/ Frame(Field) Frequency 30/29.97/25/24/ /29.97/25/24/ /59.94/50 30/29.97/25/24/ /29.97/25/24/ /59.94/50 60/59.94/50 30/29.97/25/24/ /29.97/25/24/ /59.94/50 Standard Supported SMPTE 274M SMPTE 292M SMPTE RP211 SMPTE 292M SMPTE 296M SMPTE 292M SMPTE 259M Standard Supported SMPTE 372M (1920x1080) Selects x1, x10, x20, ACTIVE, or BLANK

15 Diversified Units for Various Applications VIDEO * As for 4Y parade mode, two LV 58SER01A (SDI INPUT unit) should be inserted, and four inputs need to synchronize in the same format each other together. Field Display Display Format: Time Base Accuracy: ±0.5 % Cursor Measurement Configuration: Amplitude Measurement: Time Measurement: Frequency Display: Overlay: 1V, 2V (2V display not allowed for progressive) Parade: 1V, 2V, 3V Magnification: x1, x20, x40 Horizontal cursors: 2 cursors (REF and DELTA) Vertical cursors: 2 cursors (REF and DELTA) Measured in [%] and [V] Displayed in [usec] or [msec] Displays the frequency in which the time between cursors is considered a cycle. Vectorscope Display Scale: Selects 75 % or 100 % (Using a color bar) Gain: Selects x1, x5, IQ-MAG or variable Variable gain: x0.2 to x10 Amplitude Accuracy: ±0.5 % IQ Axis: Selects show or hide Pseudo-Composite Display: Artificially converts component signals into composite signals which added BURST and displays the result. (the color matrix for HDTV signal is converted into SDTV) Image Quality Adjustment: Phase Difference Display Display: Brightness adjustment Displays the phase difference between the SDI signal and external sync signal numerically and graphically Holds and displays eight phase difference values being measured Display Range: V direction ±1 Field (for interlace) ±1/2 Frame (for progressive) H direction ±1/2 Line *The phase difference display in the H direction may fluctuate in the range of ±1 clock when the signal is switched. Sync Signal: HD tri-level sync signal or black burst signal Phase Difference Measurement of Dual Link(future support): Displays phase difference between Link A and B with the number of the parallel reclock. (including ±1 clock error) Picture Display HDTV Display: Displayed by sampling the pixels (R, G, and B are both same 8 bits) SDTV Display: Displayed by interpolating pixels (R, G, and B are both same 8 bits) Marker Display: Center marker 4:3 or 16:9 marker display Safe action marker display Safe title marker display Gamut Error Display: Marks sections containing gamut errors within the picture Line Select: Displays the selected line as a marker Image Quality Adjustment: GBR gain adjustment, Contrast adjustment, Brightness adjustment Status Display Status Display of SDI Signal Signal Detection: Detects the presence or absence of SDI signals. Format: Detection from correspondence video signal format Equivalent Cable Length Measurement: Converts the SDI signal attenuation into a coaxial cable length and displays the result. Embedded Audio Channel: Displays the embedded audio channel number. Error Detection of SDI signals CRC Error: Detects transmission error of HD-SDI signals. EDH Error: Detects transmission error of SD-SDI signals. TRS Error: Detects errors in the TRS position and protection bit. Line Number Error: Line number errors in the HD-SDI signals are being detected. Illegal Code Error: Detects data in the range of 000h to 003h and 3FC to 3FF outside the TRS or ADF header. Embedded Prohibition Error: Detects the presence or absence of embedded audio at the embedded prohibition line. Cable Length Meter Error: Detects the signal attenuation and displays the result. Error Detection of Embedded Audio BCH Error: Detects transmission errors of embedded audio packets in the HD-SDI signal. DBN Error: Detects sequential errors in audio packets. Parity Error: Detects parity errors in audio packet embedded in HD-SDI signals. Error Detection of Ancillary Data Checksum Error: Detects transmission errors in the ancillary data. Parity Error: Detects parity errors in the ancillary data header. Image Evaluation Gamut Error: Composite Gamut Error: Detects the Gamut Errors by specifying time. Upper limit: 90.8 % to % (0.1 % steps) Lower limit: -7.2 % to +6.1 % (0.1 % steps) Monitors the level error when the component signal is converted into composite signal Upper limit: 90.0 % to % (0.1 % steps) Lower limit: % to 20.0 % (0.1 % steps) 15 Level Error: Freeze Detection: Black Detection: Event Log Number of Logs: 5 Bar Display Bar Display: Analysis Function Data Dump Display Display Format: Detects Y CB CR level errors Y upper limit: -51 mv to 766 mv (1-mV resolution) Y lower limit: -51 mv to 766 mv (1-mV resolution) CB CR upper limit: -400 mv to 399 mv (1-mV resolution) CB CR lower limit: -400 mv to 399 mv (1-mV resolution) Detects video freeze Detects blackouts ni the video Error items, time stamps, etc. Displays the Y GBR component Gamut or composite Gamut Displayed by serial data sequence or channel separation. Line Select: Displays the selected line Sample Select: Displays the selected sample Jump Function: Move to EAV or SAV by one-key operation Data Output: Save data in text format to a PC via or Ethernet network (future support) a USB memory Audio Control Packets Display Content: Analyzes and displays the audio control packets Group Selection: One group is selected from four groups. EDH Display Standard Supported: SMPTE RP-165 Display Content: Analyzes and displays the EDH packets. Displays the received CRC errors. Format ID Display Standard Supported: SMPTE 352M ARIB STD-B39 Display Content: Analyzes and displays the Format ID. Closed Caption Data Display Standard Supported: ARIB STD-B37,EIA/CEA-608,EIA-708 Display Content: Analyzes and displays the closed caption data. Inter-Stationary Control Data (NET-Q) Display Standard Supported: ARIB STD-B39 Display Content: Analyzes and displays the Inter-Stationary Control Data. V-ANC User Data Display Standard Supported: ARIB TR-B23 Arbitrary ANC Packet Display Method of Specifying ANC: Selects DID or SDID Time Code Display Corresponding Time Code: Selects LTC or VITC SMPTE RP-188 Display Method: Switches the display of internal clock, and the time code. Embedded Audio Processing Clock Generation System: SD-SDI: Generated from the video clock HD-SDI: Generated from the video clock Dual link (future support): Generated from the video clock Closed Caption Processing (future support) The closed caption data that is multiplexed in the SDI signal can be overlaid on the picture display. SMPTE System: CEA/EIA-608-B embedded in the CDP packets as defined in CEA/EIA-708-B. CEA/EIA-608-B VBI(CEA/EIA-608-B Line21) Cable Length Measurement Detection method: Converts the SDI signal attenuation into a coaxial cable length and displays the result. Supported Cables: Display Range: HD-SDI: Selects L-7CHD, LS-5CFB, or 1694A SD-SDI: Selects LS-5C2V, 8281, or 1505A HD-SDI: From under 5 m to 130 m or more (For L-7CHD: From under 10 m to 200 m or more) SD-SD: From under 50 m to 300 m or more Accuracy: ±20 m Resolution: 5 m (For L-7CHD: 10 m) Frame Capture Function Media: Internal Memory Capacity: Video data 1 Frame 2 Systems For Dual Link mode: 1Frame 1system Data Output: Save capture data to a PC via Ethernet network (future support) or a USB memory Recalling Capture Data: Recalls and displays the Picture/ Waveform/ Vector of 1 frame capture data. The capture data saved in the USB memory can be read back. (Reading back operation is possible only if an SDI input of the same format as the captured data is available) Power Consumption: Supplied from LV Wmax. (If one unit is installed to the LV 5800) 18 Wmax. (additional power consumption for each additional unit installed to the LV 5800) Weight: 0.28 kg Accessory: Instruction manual... 1 Precautions Concerning Dual Link Operation Aliasing occurs in the V sweep display of 1080p/60, 59.94, and 50, because the unit decimates the sampling data. The picture display is processed using 8 bits even if the quantization is set to 12 bits. In addition, waveform display in external synchronization mode is not allowed if 1080p/60 (59.94) or 1080p/50 signal is applied.

16 VIDEO Diversified Units for Various Applications LV 58SER02 EYE PATTERN UNIT FEATURES This unit displays eye patterns. It is installed in a LV 5800 input slot. By combining with the LV 5800 input unit, eye pattern waveforms of SDI signals can be monitored. Automatic measurement of parameters such as amplitude, rise time, and fall time is also possible. HD-SDI, SD-SDI Format Support Six Systems of Eye Pattern Displays and Jitter Measurement Displays the SDI signal eye pattern or measures the jitter of one system among up to six systems by combining three SDI input units and selecting A or B among the three modules. (Two EYE units cannot be installed simultaneously.) Eye Pattern Display Displays the eye pattern of the timing jitter or alignment jitter by switching the filter. Jitter Measurement The jitter measurement by the phase detection method allows accurate jitter measurement even if the eye is barely open. In addition, timing jitter and alignment jitter can be measured. Automatic Measurement The eye pattern display allows automatic measurement of the eye pattern amplitude, rise time, and fall time. The jitter display allows automatic measurement of the timing jitter and alignment jitter values. Jitter Display Using Video Sweep Allows V sweep and H sweep displays. Simultaneous Display on the Multi Display The multi display allows the eye pattern waveform and jitter waveform to be displayed simultaneously. In addition, the eye pattern display screen automatically measures the eye pattern amplitude, rise time, and fall time, while the jitter display screen automatically measures the timing jitter and alignment jitter. Alarm Monitoring The alarm monitor mode allows the eye pattern amplitude, rise time, and fall time to be monitored with respect to the threshold level specified in advance. It also monitors the timing jitter and alignment jitter using the phase detection method. An alarm is displayed when the threshold level is exceeded. The alarm can also be logged. SPECIFICATIONS Supported Formats Data Rate HD-SDI: SMPTE292M Gbps, or 1.485/ Gbps SD-SDI: SMPTE259M 270 Mbps Eye Pattern Method: Equivalent time sampling method Amplitude Accuracy: 800 mv ±5 % for 800 mv input Time Axis: 2 / 4 / 16 Eye pattern Display Time Axis Accuracy: ±3 % Jitter Filter: 10 Hz HPF 100 Hz HPF 1 khz HPF 100 khz HPF Jitter Detection Method: Phase detection method Time Axis: H rate or V rate Time Axis Accuracy: ±3 % Jitter Filter: 10 Hz HPF 100 Hz HPF 1 khz HPF 100 khz HPF (* Don't support JITTA measurement of a DVB-ASI standard.) Power Consumption: Supplied from LV Wmax. Weight: 0.4 kg Accessories: Coaxial cable... 1 Instruction Manual... 1 LV 58SER20 DVI-I OUTPUT UNIT This unit is a DVI-I OUTPUT unit that outputs the contents displayed on the front LCD panel from the DVI-I connector to an external monitor. The unit is installed in a LV 5800 output slot. 16 FEATURES DVI-I Connector The connector allows the screen displayed on the LV 5800 to be shown on an external monitor. The DVI output provides both digital and analog output allowing the signal to be used on a wide variety of XGAcompatible monitors. SPECIFICATIONS DVI-I Connector Signal Format: Single Link T.M.D.S Analog RGB Display Format: XGA (Effective area 1,024x768 dots) DDC Function: Not supported HOT PLUG Detection Function: Not supported Output Connector: DVI-I 1 system Power Consumption: Supplied from LV Wmax. Weight: 0.2 kg Accessory: Instruction manual... 1

17 Diversified Units for Various Applications LV 58SER40 DIGITAL AUDIO UNIT VIDEO FEATURES The unit operates as a digital audio I/O unit when installed in a LV 5800 input slot or a digital audio output unit (*1) when installed in an output slot. For the 16-channel (*2) data of AES/EBU 8 system, Lissajous, sound image, level meter, signal status displays can be shown (*3). If the LV 58SER01A (SDI input unit) is installed in the LV 5800, this unit can process the AES/ EBU signal that is separated from the SDI signal. *1 The operation when LV 58SER40 is installed in the output unit slot is to be supported in the future. *2 The standard external I/O connector is 8 channels of 4 AES/EBU systems. By installing an optional external I/O connector board. the connector can be expanded to 16 channels of 8 AES/EBU systems. *3 All of the AES/EBU input signals must be synchronized. In addition, the 48 khz is the only supported sampling frequency. 8-system 16-Channel AES/EBU I/O By installing optional external I/O connector board, the connector can be expanded to 16 channels of 8 AES/ EBU systems. The unit operates as a digital audio I/O unit when installed in LV 5800 input slot or digital audio output unit when installed in an output slot. Various Display Functions Displays the following items on the input AES/EBU signal. Single Lissajous display between two arbitrary channels, multi Lissajous display that shows 4 or 8 single Lissajous displays between two arbitrary channels, sound image display, and level meter display. Displays the following AES/EBU status bits. Channel status, user, validity, and parity bits. The various display and detection functions of this unit cannot be assigned simultaneously to the LV 5800 multi screen. 8-System 16-Channel (factory option) Dolby-E (factory option) SPECIFICATIONS Rear BNC Connector Input/Output Connector: BNC connector (4 systems 8 channels) Input/Output Impedance: 75 Ω Selection of Input/Output Function: Selects from menu. Input/Output Signal Supported Format: IEC Sampling Frequency: 48 khz Maximum Input Voltage: ±5 V (DC + peak AC) Output Voltage: 1.0 Vp-p ±10 % (into 75 Ω) Input Signal Selection: Waveform Display Function Lissajous Display: Selects the signal that inputs from a rear BNC connector, or the embedded signal in the SDI signal by the menu. Selects either the single-lissajous display between arbitrary channels, or the multi-lissajous display that displays with 8 channels or 16 channels. Sound Image Display: Arbitrary channels are assigned to L/R/C/ LFE/Ls(S)/Rs/LL/RR, and selects from 3-1 system, 3-2 system, or system. Level Meter Display Level Meter Display: Displays the level of 8 channels or 16 channels by the bar graph. (Only when the single-lissajous is displayed, the selected level of two channels is displayed by the bar graph.) Response Mode Selection: Selects True Peak/ Peak Program Meter (PPM)/ VU. Reference Level Setting: to 0.0 dbfs Warning Level Setting: to 0.0 dbfs Over Level Setting: to 0.0 dbfs0 Dynamic Range Selection: Selects 60 dbfs/ 90 dbfs. Peak Hold: Peak Hold Time: Correlation Meter: When the response mode of the level meter is VU, True Peak or Peak Program Meter (PPM) can be selected. 0.5 sec to 5 sec (0.5 sec steps)/hold The correlation of two channels is displayed by the numerical value from -1 to 1. Status Display Channel Status Bit Display: Displays the dump or text of a channel status bit. User Data Bit Display: Displays the dump of user data bit. Audio Signal Analysis Function Mute Detection: Detects on each channel. Displays the occurrence frequency of the mute signal. Detection Setting: 1 to 5,000 msec Clip Detection: Detects on each channel. Displays the occurrence frequency of the 0 dbfs signal. Detection Setting: 1 to 100 samples Level Over Detection: Detects on each channel. Displays the occurrence frequency of the signal that exceeds the setting value. Detection Setting: 0 to -40 dbfs Power Consumption: Supplied from LV Wmax. Weight: 0.27 kg Accessory: Instruction manual

18 VIDEO Compact, Low-Cost Multi SDI Rasterizer LV 7700 (HD/SD-SDI) MULTI SDI RASTERIZER LV 7720 (SD-SDI) SD SDI RASTERIZER GENERAL The LV 7700 is capable of displaying the monitor waveform, image, and other data of HD-SDI and SD- SDI signals on an external display (SD-SDI signals only on the LV 7720). Display items include waveform monitor, vectorscope, audio monitor, simple picture display, as well as multi display on which these items can be arranged on a single screen. Its 1U half rack size reduces space consumption in broadcasting installations, etc. In addition, complete digital processing of SDI signals enables highly accurate measurements. It is also suitable as a monitoring device that monitors signals and detect errors via the network through the support of SNMP. FEATURES Two Serial Digital Inputs The SDI input connectors on the LV 7700 can receive HD-SDI and SD-SDI signals. You can select auto or manual setting for the input signal format. SDI Output Equipped with an active output that reclocks the input signal. Display Equipped with a DVI-I connector of XGA resolution (1,024 x 768). Waveform, vectorscope, picture, audio, and status can be shown on an external LCD, etc. Multi display that displays these items on a single screen is also possible. Waveform Display Function Vectorscope Function Picture Display Function Line Selector Function Embedded Audio Signal Display Function Screen Capture Function Extensive Analysis Functions Various Error Detection Functions Event Log Function of SDI Signals Digital Data Dump Function Analysis Display Function SDI-EXT REF Phase Difference Display Function The SDI-EXT REF phase difference display function shows the phase difference between the SDI signal and the external sync signal (EXT REF). 5 BAR DISPLAY Peak levels of video signals can be displayed in place of the vectors. Preset Function Up to 30 sets of panel control settings can be stored. Stored data can be recalled easily from the panel, Ethernet connector, or remote connector. SNMP Support In addition to controlling the LV 7700 from the panel, remote control is possible through Ethernet connection with a PC, etc. External Synchronization Allows tri-level sync signals or black burst signals of NTSC and PAL to be input. All Panel LED Lighting All panel LEDs can be turned on which makes it convenient for operations in extremely dark places. Power Supply DC operation is possible by connecting a 12 V external DC power supply with a current capacity of at least 3 A to the DC input connector. AC power operation (100 to 240 VAC) is also possible through the supplied AC adapter. LV 7720 is upgradable to LV 7700 at our factory Dedicated Rack Mount Adapter (Sold Separately) By using the dedicated rack mount adapter that is sold separately, the LV 7700 can be rack mounted. 2 units of LV 7700 fit in LR units (LV 7700 and LT 428) or one unit of LV 7700 fit in LR-2480 LR-2480 Rackmount Adapter 18 External Display

19 VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS LV 7700/LV 7720 Video Formats and Corresponding Standards Video Signal Standards Format Name Standard Supported i/ i/ i/ p/30 SMPTE 274M, 292M (LV 7700 only) p/ p/ p/ p/ PsF/ PsF/ PsF/25 SMPTE RP211, 292M (LV 7700 only) PsF/ PsF/ p/ p/ p/ p/30 * SMPTE 296M, 292M (LV 7700 only) p/29.97 * p/25 * p/24 * p/23.98 * i/ i/50 SMPTE 259M *Formats whose evaluation verification has not been completed as of January Other Standards Ancillary Data Standard: Embedded Audio Standard: Format Setting Format Setting: Sampling Frequency: External Synchronization: Input/Output Connector SDI Input Input Connector: External Synchronization Input Input Signal: Input Connector: SDI Output Output Connector: Compact Flash Memory Card Function: Remote Connector Function: Control Connector: Ethernet Connector Function: Type: DVI-I Connector Signal Format: Display Format: Output Connector: Display Format Display Format: Display 1 Screen Display: 2 Screen Display: 4 Screen Display: Waveform Display Waveform Operation Display Mode: EAV-SAV Period: G, B, R Conversion: Pseudo-Composite Display: Channel Assignment: Line Select: Vertical Axis Gain: Gain Variable: SMPTE 291M SMPTE 299M (LV 7700 only)/ SD-SDI SMPTE 272M Auto setting or manual setting from the supported formats MHz (HDTV LV 7700 only), 74.25/1.001 MHz (HDTV LV 7700 only), 13.5 MHz (SDTV) Auto setting from supported formats BNC connector 2 systems (A/B switching type) Tri-level sync signal or NTSC/PAL black burst signal BNC connector 1 system 2 connectors BNC connector 1 connector Saves screen captures, error logs, preset data, and data dumps Recalls presets and outputs errors D-sub 25 pin 1 connector (female) TTL level (low active) Remote control from an external computer and data output 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX auto switching Single Link T.M.D.S, Analog R, G, B XGA DVI-I 1 system XGA Effective area 1024 x 768 dots Waveform display, vectorscope display, picture display, audio display, or status display Waveform display and vectorscope display Waveform display and picture display Waveform display and audio level display Select audio display or status display in addition to waveform display, vectorscope display, and picture display Overlay display: Displays component signals overlaid Parade display: Displays component signals side by side Timing Display: Displays by calculating Y-CB and Y-CR Uses bowtie signals (authorized by Tektronix, Inc.) Select show or hide Converts Y, CB, CR signals into G, B, R and displays the result Artificially converts component signals into composite signals and displays the result Select G, B, R order or R, G, B order during G, B, R conversion display Displays the selected line Select x 1, x 5, or variable x 0.2 to x 10.0 Horizontal Axis Line Display: Field Display: Time Base Accuracy: Cursor Measurement Configuration: Vectorscope Display Gain: Gain Variable: Amplitude Accuracy: IQ Axis: Simple Picture Display HDTV Display: SDTV Display: Frame Rate: Embedded Audio Display Quantization: Lissajous Display Display Channel: Display Mode: Sound Image Display Display Channel: Level Meter Display Display Channel: Meter: Status Display SDI Signal Status Display Signal Detection: CRC Error: EDH Error: BCH Error: Checksum Error: Parity Error: Gamut Error: Detection Range: Composite Gamut Error: Detection Range: 0.1 % steps Audio Information Detection: Detects the presence or absence of audio on each channel Equivalent Cable Length Measurement: Error Count: Data Dump Display Display Format: Event Log Number of Logs: Audio Status Voice Control Packets: Display Format Overlay: 1H, 2H Parade: 1H, 2H, 3H Timing: 2H Magnification: Select x 1 or x 10 Display Format Overlay: 1 V, 2 V (2V display not allowed for progressive) Parade: 1 V, 2 V, 3 V Magnification: Select x 1, x 20 or x 40 ± 0.5 % Horizontal Cursors: 2 cursors (REF and DELTA) Vertical Cursors: 2 cursors (REF and DELTA) Select x 1, x 5, IQ-MAG, or variable x 0.2 to x 10.0 ± 0.5 % Select show/hide Displayed by sampling the pixels (LV 7700 only) Displayed by interpolating pixels Converts the frame rate using the internal synchronization signal and displays the result HDTV 24 bits (LV 7700 only)/sdtv 20 bits Select 2-ch or 8-ch display Select X-Y or L-R Select 3-1 ch, 3-2 ch, or ch. Simultaneous 8 ch display Select 60 db peak level, 90 db peak level, or average response meter Detects the presence or absence of SDI signals Detects transmission errors of HD-SDI signals (LV 7700 only) Detects transmission errors of SD-SDI signals Detects transmission errors of embedded audio signals in the HD-SDI signal (LV 7700 only) Detects transmission errors of ancillary data Detects parity errors in the ancillary data header Detects gamut errors Upper limit: 90.0 % to %, lower limit -7.2 % to % 0.1 % steps Monitors the level error when the component signal is converted into composite signal Upper limit: 90.0 % to %, lower limit -40 % to -20 % Displays the signal attenuation of the SDI signal by converting to cable length Supported Cables HD-SDI Select LS-5CFB, 1694A, or L-7CHD (LV 7700 only) SD-SDI Select L-5C2V, 8281, or 1505A Up to 100,000 errors Counts only the specified errors (1 count even if multiple errors occur within 1 second) Displayed separately by serial data sequence or channel Up to 1,000 events Analyzes and displays the voice control packets of the SDI signal EDH Display(only for SD-SDI input) EDH: Displays the status of the EDH packets Screen Capture Capture: Captures the display screen Media: Internal memory (RAM) or compact flash card Presets Number of Presets: 30 Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature: 0 to 40 C Operating Humidity: 85 % RH (without condensation) Operating Environment: Indoor use Operating Altitude: Up to 2,000 m Pollution Degree: 2 Power Requirements: 12 VDC (10 to 18 V), 35 W max. Dimensions and Weight: 215(W) x 44(H) x 400(D) mm, 2.3 kg Accessories: Instruction manual... 1 AC adapter

20 VIDEO High performance packed into this compact model LV 5750 MULTI SDI MONITOR GENERAL The LV 5750 is a waveform monitor for HD-SDI and SD-SDI signals with a color TFT LCD monitor. It is a compact, portable model that contains a waveform monitor, vectorscope, audio level display, simple picture display, and status display. Complete digital processing of SDI signals enables highly accurate measurements. In addition, extensive error detection functions and analysis functions are provided which enables the LV 5750 to be used as a SDI signal monitor. LV 5750 REAR PANEL FEATURES Receives either HD-SDI or SD-SDI signals Employs a color TFT LCD monitor with XGA resolution Multi screen display, waveform display, vectorscope display, picture display, and embedded audio display Error detection for SDI signal monitoring Delivers embedded audio in SDI signals through stereo headphone output Provides screw holes for attaching a camera tripod Battery operation and DC power operation SDI-EXT REF Phase Difference Display Function 5 BAR DISPLAY Shows V-Mount Model available Antonbauer Model OPTIONS Option Board LH 2139 Viewing Hood *If you install this unit, you will not be able to use the compact memory card unit that comes standards. AC Adapter Front Cover Front cover to protect the display Monitor Trunk Convenient for transporting the LV 5750 LV LV Ethernet Unit Remote Control Unit 20 LP-1960 Rack Mount Adapter Rack mount adapter for the EIA (inch) standard rack.

21 VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS LV 5750 Video Formats and Corresponding Standards Video Signal Standards Format Name Standard Supported i/ i/ i/ p/30 SMPTE 274M, 292M p/ p/ p/ p/ PsF/ PsF/ PsF/25 SMPTE RP211, 292M PsF/ PsF/ p/ p/ p/50 SMPTE 296M, 292M p/24* p/23.98* i/59.94 SMPTE 259M i/50 *Formats whose evaluation verification has not been completed as of January Other Standards Ancillary data standard: SMPTE 291M Embedded audio standard: HD-SDI SMPTE 299M SD-SDI SMPTE 272M Format Setting SDI Signal: Auto setting or manual setting from the supported formats Sampling Frequency: MHz(HDTV),74.25/1.001 MHz(HDTV) 13.5 MHz(SDTV) 4:2:2 YCBCR signal External Synchronization: Auto setting from supported formats Input/Output Connector SDI Input Input Connector: BNC connector 2 systems (A/B switching type) External Synchronization Input Input Signal: Tri-level sync signal or NTSC/PAL black burst Input Connector: BNC connector 1 system 2 connectors SDI Output Output Connector: BNC connector 1 connector Headphone Output Output Signal: IF Slot Installable Units: Compact Flash Memory Card Unit Function: Separates and outputs the embedded audio signal in the SDI signal One of the following can be installed: compact flash memory card unit, remote control unit (sold separately), and Ethernet unit (sold separately) Saves screen captures, error logs, preset data, and data dumps Remote Control Unit (Sold Separately) Function: Recalls presets and outputs alarms Control connector: D-sub 25 pin 1 connector (female) *If you install this unit, you will not be able to use the compact memory card unit that comes standard or the Ethernet unit that is sold separately. Ethernet Unit (Sold Separately) Function: Type: Remote control from an external computer 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Auto switching, one connector *If you install this unit, you will not be able to use the compact memory card unit that comes standard or the remote control unit that is sold separately. Display Format Display Format: XGA Effective area dots Display 1 Screen Display: Waveform display, vectorscope display, picture display, audio display, or status display 2 Screen Display: Waveform and vectorscope display, waveform display and picture display, or waveform display and audio level display 4 Screen Display: Select audio display or status display in addition to waveform display, vectorscope display, and picture display Waveform Display Waveform Operation Display Mode: Timing Display: Overlay display:displays component signals overlaid Parade display:displays component signals side by side Displays by calculating Y-CB and Y-CR Uses bowtie signals (authorized by Tektronix, Inc.) EAV-SAV Period: Select show or hide G, B, R Conversion: Converts Y, CB, CR signals into G, B, R and displays the result 21 Pseudo-Composite Display: Artificially converts component signals into composite signals and displays the result Channel Assignment: Select G, B, R order or R, G, B order during G, B, R conversion display Line Select: Displays the selected line Vertical Axis Gain: Select 1, 5, or variable (up to 10) Amplitude Accuracy: < ±0.5 % Horizontal Axis Line Display: Display format Overlay: 1H, 2H Parade: 1H, 2H, 3H Timing: 2H Magnification Select 1 or 10 Field Display: Display format Overlay: 1V, 2V (2V display not allowed for progressive) Parade: 1V, 2V, 3V Magnification Select 1, 20 or 40 Time Base Accuracy: < ±0.5 % Cursor Measurement Configuration: Horizontal cursors: 2 cursors (REF and DELTA) Vertical cursors: 2 cursors (REF and DELTA) Vectorscope Display Gain: Select 1, 5, IQ-MAG, or variable Amplitude Accuracy: < ±0.5 % IQ Axis: Select show/hide Simple Picture Display HDTV Display: SDTV Display: Display Frame Rate: Audio Level Display Audio Signal: Displayed by sampling the pixels Displayed by interpolating pixels Converts the frame rate using the internal synchronization signal and displays the result Select two arbitrary groups from embedded audio signals in the SDI signal Level Meter Display Channel: Simultaneous 8 ch display Meter: 60 db peak level or 90 db peak level Reference Level: Select -20 db, -18 db, or -12 db Scale: Select absolute db display or reference level 0 db display Status Display SDI Signal Status Display Signal Detection: Detects the presence or absence of SDI signals CRC Error: Transmission error of HD-SDI signals EDH Error: Transmission error of SD-SDI signals BCH Error: Transmission error of embedded audio signals in the HD-SDI signal Checksum Error: Transmission error of ancillary data Gamut Error: Detects gamut errors Detection Range: Upper limit: 90.0 % to % Lower limit: -7.2 % to +6.0 % 0.1 % steps Composite Gamut Error: Monitors the level error when the component signal is converted into composite signal Detection Range: Upper limit: 90.0 % to % Lower limit: -40 % to -20 % 0.1 % steps Audio Information Detection: Detects the presence or absence of audio on each channel Error Count: Up to 100,000 errors Counts only the specified errors Data Dump Display Display Format: Displayed separately by serial data sequence or channel Event Log Number of Logs: Up to 1,000 events Audio Status Voice Control Packets: Analyzes and displays the voice control packets of the SDI signal EDH Display EDH: Screen Capture Capture: Media: Presets Number of Presets: 30 Displays the status of the EDH packets Captures the display screen Internal memory (RAM) or compact flash card Environmental conditions Operating Environment: Indoor/outdoor use (no rain water) Operating Altitude: Up to 2000 m Overvoltage category: I Pollution Degree: 2 Power Requirements: Dimensions and Weight: 12 VDC (10 to 18 V), 30 W max. 215(W) 133(H) 103(D) mm (excluding protrusions) 221(W 143(H) 168(D) mm (including protrusions) 2.5 kg Accessories: Instruction manual... 1

22 VIDEO HD-SDI/SD-SDI Color LCD Waveform Monitor PATENTED: Equivalent cable length measurement The cabinet is sold separately. LV 5700A MULTI SDI MONITOR GENERAL The LV 5700A is a waveform monitor for HD-SDI and SD-SDI signals. Employs color TFT LCD screen. The functions of waveform monitors, vectorscopes, audio lissajous, and simple picture monitors are achieved with a single unit. Complete digital processing of SDI signals enables highly accurate measurements. In addition, extensive error detection functions and analysis functions are provided which allow the LV 5700A to be used as SDI signal monitor. FEATURES Two serial digital input systems The SDI input connector on the LV 5700A supports free rates. Thus, either HD-SDI or SD-SDI signals can be applied to the same connector. You can select auto or manual setting for the input signal format. Display Employs an LCD monitor with XGA resolution. Various displays such as waveform display, vector display, picture display, and status display can be placed side by side on the XGA monitor. You can monitor these displays simultaneously. Depending on the combination, bowtie, embedded audio, and data dump can also be displayed. Furthermore, each display can be magnified. Operation The LV 5700A can be controlled through the panel and remotely controlled through a computer via the Ethernet network. In addition, presets can be recalled using the remote connectors on the rear panel. Extensive Analysis Functions The LV 5700A can also be used as an analyzer to detect multiple types of transmission errors, detect gamut errors, display data dumps, ancillary data display, analyze the contents of voice control packets, measure the equivalent cable length, and so on. 22 Output Equipped with two active output connectors that reclock the input signal. One connector is an HD-SDI/SD-SDI switching type serial output; the other is a dedicated SD-SDI output. Other output connectors are the analog picture monitor output and the AES/EBU output that separates the embedded audio in the SDI signal. An analog XGA output connector is also provided allowing the screen to be displayed on an external monitor. External Synchronization Allows tri-level sync signals or B. B signals of NTSC and PAL to be input. SDI-EXT REF Phase Difference Display Function The SDI-EXT REF phase difference display function shows the phase difference between the SDI signal and the external sync signal (EXT REF). 5 BAR DISPLAY Peak levels of video signals can be displayed in place of the vectors. LV 5700A REAR PANEL

23 SPECIFICATIONS Video Format and Corresponding Standards Video Signal Standards Format Name 1080i/ i/ i/ p/ p/ p/ p/ p/ PsF/ PsF/ PsF/ PsF/ PsF/ i/ i/ p/60 720p/ p/50 720p/30* 720p/29.97* 720p/25* 720p/24* 720p/23.98* 525i/ i/50 *Formats whose evaluation verification has not been completed as of January Other Standards Ancillary data standard: Embedded audio standard: Format Setting Video System: Sampling Frequency: Input/Output Connector SDI Input Input Connector: External Reference Input Input Signal: Input Connector: XGA Output Output Signal: Output Connector: SDI Output Output Connector: Analog Output Output Signal: Output Connector: AES/EBU Output Output Signal: Output Connector: Remote Connector Function: Control Signal: Control Connector: Ethernet Connector Function: Input/Output Connector: Display Format Display Format: Waveform Display Waveform Operation EAV-SAV Period: GBR Conversion: Pseudo-Composite Display: Channel Assignment: Vertical Axis Filter: Horizontal Axis Operation Mode Overlay: Parade: Timing: SMPTE 291M HD-SDI SMPTE 299M SD-SDI SMPTE 272M Select manual setting or automatic setting HD: Auto switching between MHz and 74.25/1.001 MHz SD: Standard Supported SMPTE 274M,292M SMPTE RP211,292M SMPTE 240M,292M SMPTE 296M,292M SMPTE 259M 13.5 MHz BNC connector 2 systems A and B, 75 Ω Tri-level sync signal or NTSC/PAL black burst BNC connector passive loop-through 1 system 2 connectors XGA signal D-sub 15 pin female BNC connector 2 connectors One connector is a dedicated SD-SDI output connector Reclocks and outputs the selected SDI input signal, 75Ω Y, PB, PR or GBR BNC connector 1 system 3 connectors CH1/2, CH3/4, CH5/6, CH7/8 Separated from embedded audio and output Select 2 groups (8 ch) from 4 groups (16 ch) BNC connector 4 connectors Recalling of presets TTL level (LOW active) D-sub 25 pin female 1 connector Remote control from an external computer and monitoring of errors, etc. 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 1 connector(rj-45) XGA Effective area 1024 x 768 dots 1-screen display Waveform display, vectorscope display, picture display, audio display, and status display 2-screen display Waveform display and vectorscope display Waveform display and picture display Waveform display and audio waveform display 4-screen display Select audio waveform display, audio level meter display, or status display in addition to waveform display, vectorscope display, and picture display. Select show/hide Select Y, CB, CR or GBR conversion display Artificially converts component signals into composite signals and displays the result (the color matrix for HDTV signal is converted into SDTV) Select GBR order or RGB order during GBR conversion Display Flat, low-pass Displays multiple waveforms overlaid Displays waveforms side by side Time difference between channels Uses bowtie* signals *Authorized by Tektronix, Inc. LV 5700A 23 Display Format Line display: Line Magnification: Field Display: Field Magnification: Scale Scale Display Voltage Scale: % Scale: Vectorscope Display Sensitivity: Gain: EAV-SAV Period: I, Q Axes Simple Picture Display HD Display: SD Display: Embedded Audio Display Lissajous Display Display Channel: Display Method: Sound Image Display Display Channel: Peak Level Meter Display Display Channel: Display Method: Channel Ch Mapping: Status Display SDI Signal Status Display Signal Detection: CRC Error: EDH Error: BCH Error: Checksum Error: Gamut Error: Composite Gamut Error: Audio Information Detection: Error Count: V-ANC Monitor: Data Dump Display Display Format: Event Log Number of Logs: Audio Status Voice Control Packets: EDH Display EDH: Line Selector Operation Mode: Presets Number of Presets: Presets Items: Recall Method: Cursor Measurement Configuration: Amplitude Measurement: Time Measurement: Frequency Measurement: Screen Capture Capture Media Data Output Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature Operating Humidity: Operating Environment: Operating Altitude: Pollution Degree: Power Requirements: Dimensions and Weight: Accessories: Overlay: 1H, 2H Parade: 1H, 2H, 3H Timing: 2H Select x1, X10, ACTIVE, or BLANK Overlay: 1V, 2V Parade: 1V, 2V, 3V Select x1 or x20 0 V to 0.7 V, -0.3 V to 0.7 V 0 % to 100 %, -50 % to 100 % Select 75 % or 100 % Using a color bar Select x1, x5, or IQ-MAG Select show/hide Select show/hide Reduced display Magnified display Select from 2 ch or 8 ch display Select X-Y or L-R Select from 3-1 ch, 3-2 ch, and ch displays Simultaneous 8 ch display Peak meter Can be mapped arbitrary from 1 ch to 8 ch Detects the presence or absence of SDI signals Transmission error of HD-SDI signals Transmission error of SD-SDI signals Transmission error of embedded audio signals in the HD-SDI signal Transmission error of ancillary data Detects gamut errors Monitors the level error when the component signal is converted into composite signal Detects the presence or absence of audio on each channel Up to 100,000 errors NET-Q, CLOSED CAPTION Counts only the specified errors Displayed separately by serial data sequence or channel Up to 1,000 events VIDEO Analyzes and displays the voice control packets of the SDI signal Displays the status of the EDH packets Interlocked type between waveform display, vector display, and picture display Preset 100 sets All setup items Through the front panel, remote connector, and Ethernet Switch 8 points and 100 points for recalling through the remote connector Horizontal cursor: 2 lines (REF, ) Vertical cursor: 2 lines (REF, ) Measured in [%] and [V] Displayed in [ms] and [ms] Displays the frequency in which the time between cursors is considered a cycle. Captures the display screen Records 1 screen in the internal memory Internal memory (RAM) or compact flash card Save data in B.M.P. format to a PC via a compact flash memory card or Ethernet network. 0 to +40 C 85 % RH (without condensation) Indoor use Up to 2,000 m 2 90 to 250 VAC, 50 Hz/60 Hz, 120 Wmax. 9 to 17 VDC(Option) 215 (W) x 133 (H) x 449 (D) mm 4.9 kg Instruction manual... 1 Power cord... 1 Cover/Inlet stopper... 1 Screws for rack mounting (inch specification) pin D-sub connector pin D-sub connector cover... 1

24 VIDEO LV 5700A Multi-SDI Monitor Available Options Our industry is changing faster than our customers can adopt to the new technology; systems, formats and performance demands on the production, post production and distribution channels of the pro-video industry have created the necessity for a monitoring instrument that is not only flexible but also highly configurable and adoptable to future format and system changes. The Leader LV 5700A Multi-SDI monitor was designed to provide the utmost in system configuration flexibility and allows for future options to be added in order to ensure our customers' investment remains useful for years to come. The instrument handles HD-SDI and SD-SDI inputs in its standard configuration (see pages 22 to 23 for standard configuration specs and details) and can be upgraded to handle a variety of inputs depending on your system's needs. Our LV 5700A provides the flexible platform needed to satisfy the variety of formats and systems available in our industry today; but, it is Leader's wide selection of options that make the LV 5700A an excellent investment not only for today but for years to come. Two (2) expansion slots are available for the LV 5700A and the available options are listed below : LV 5700A OP70 (LV 57SER70) : HD/SD Eye Pattern Module LV 5700A OP73A (LV 57SER73A) : NTSC/PAL Composite Analog Input Module LV 5700A OP75 (LV 57SER75) : AES/EBU Digital Audio Module(8 Channels) For LV 5700A LV 5700A OP76 (LV 57SER76) : HD/SD Eye Pattern Module Selection Guide (Combination Conditions) Product Name Option Name Model Number 2 Options Selection 1 Options Selection HD/SD EYE Pattern *1 Option 70 (LV 57SER70) NTSC/PAL Composite Analog Input Option 73A (LV 57SER73A) AES/EBU Digital Audio Option 75 (LV 57SER75) HD/SD EYE Pattern *2 Option 76 (LV 57SER76) *1: Phase Detection is used for measuring the jitter value. Features include EYE Pattern, Jitter Display and Histogram. *2: Eye Pattern is used for measuring the jitter value. Features include EYE pattern only. NTSC/PAL Composite Analog Input Module (OP73A) SPECIFICATIONS Standards Supported NTSC: PAL: Input Composite Video: Input Connector: Input Impedance: Input Return Loss: Maximum Input Voltage: Output Composite Video Output Signal: Output Connector: Output Impedance: Output Amplitude: Frequency: Characteristics: Display WAVEFORM: VECTOR: PICTURE: Ideal for broadcast and field acquisition professionals, the option 73A adds expansion capabilities to accommodate analog NTSC/PAL composite inputs. Two composite inputs(auto-sensing) are provided and the selected input is fed to a monitoring output. Monitoring functions include waveform, vector and picture displays. SCH measurement is also provided for both NTSC and PAL and full line selection capabilities allow monitoring on a line-by-line basis. NTSC-M, SMPTE 170M PAL-B, G, H, I, ITU-R BT.470 Select A or B BNC connector 75 Ω 30 db (up to 6 MHz) ± 5 V (DC + Peak AC) OP73A Active BNC connector, 1 system 1 connector 75 Ω 1 Vp-p ±5 % 25 Hz to 5 MHz within ±5 % 5 MHz to 5.6 MHz within +5 % to -10 % Waveform display Vectorscope display Picture display * 2 screens mode, 4 screens mode, audio display, and status display are not available. Waveform Display Section Vertical Axis Sensitivity: Gain: Variable Gain: Amplitude Accuracy: 1 % Frequency Characteristics Composite Signal: Step Response (for 1V full scale, flat, 2T pulse, and 2T bar) Overshoot: Preshoot: Ringing: Pulse/Bar Ratio: Vertical Tilt: Filter: DC Restorer: Horizontal Axis Operation Mode: Display Format Line Display: Line Magnification: Field Display: Field Magnification: Time Base Accuracy: ±1 % Vectorscope Display Section Sensitivity: Setup: Gain: Variable Gain: Phase Accuracy: Amplitude Accuracy: Phase Adjustment Range: IQ Axis: SCH Measurement Section Accuracy : Color Frame Area: V Scale 1 Vp-p (-0.3 V to 0.7 V) IRE Scale 1 Vp-p (-40 IRE to 100 IRE) x1, x5 Selectable x 0.1 or less to x5 or more 25 Hz to 5 MHz within 2 % 5 MHz to 5.6 MHz within +3 % to -5 % ±2 % ±1 % ±2 % ±1 % ±1 % Luminance filter Clamp to the back porch (fixed) Overlay Displays only one single waveform Overlay 1H or 2H Select x1 or x10 Overlay 1V or 2V Select x1 or x20 Select 75 % or 100 % (ref color bar pattern) Select 0 % or 7.5 % Select x1, x5 or IQ-MAG x0.1 or less to x10 or more ±2 ±3 % 360 Select show or hide ±5 (room temperature 25 C) ±60 24

25 VIDEO LV 5700A Multi-SDI Monitor Available Options AES/EBU Digital Audio Module (8 Channels) (OP75) The LV 5700A Multi-SDI monitor is provided with audio monitoring, measurement and data analysis capabilities for embedded AES/EBU monitoring (audio is disembedded and output via 4 BNC connectors; 8 channels, as standard). Facilities using separate (nonembedded) AES/EBU audio will need to use the OP75 External AES/EBU Inputs option in order to monitor external AES/EBU. All of the embedded audio measurement, monitoring and analysis abilities of the LV 5700A are also available for monitoring external AES/ EBU using the OP75. Option 75 adds monitoring and display for 8-channels of AES/EBU digital audio inputs. Surround sound image, lissajous, bar graphs and digital levels are displayed. A speaker is also included to allow monitoring of the selected channel. HD/SD Eye Pattern Module (OP70 & OP76) Leader provides two different options for Eye Pattern monitoring for the LV 5700A; Option 70 and Option 76. Option 70 represents our full-featured Eye Pattern monitoring solution and takes up 2 slots in the LV 5700A while our Option 76 (reduced feature set) only occupies one slot in the LV 5700A leaving the other slot open for other options and upgrades. Our OP70 has selectable display modes that encompass eye pattern views, jitter measurements (both manual and automatic) and a histogram with jitter. The OP70 uses both equivalent sampling and phase detection methods in order to provide the eye pattern measurements. SPECIFICATIONS Format Supported: AES/EBU format 48 khz AES/EBU Digital Audio Input Input Channels: Input Connector: Input Impedance: Headphone Audio Output Output Channels: Output Connector: Output Format: Built-In Loudspeaker Output Format: 4 BNC, 8 channels (CH 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8) BNC Connector 75 Ω 1 terminal Miniature jack (stereo type) Stereo. Selects the channel from the menu to set up L, R channel Mono. Outputs selected L channel sound to speaker output. OP75 Our OP76 includes all of the measurement features of the OP70 except for the histogram function. Eye pattern measurements are made using the equivalent sampling technique. Both OP70 and OP76 provide eye pattern displays, cursor and automatic measurement modes. Jitter is characterized with automatic readouts of key parameter measurements for rise time, fall time, amplitude and jitter. Five high pass filters are selectable from 10 Hz to 100 KHz. Lower edge filters for timing jitter (10 Hz) or alignment jitter (100 KHz) measure jitter components up to one tenth of the clock frequency. An external rear panel clock input allows for making optimum, absolute jitter measurements without adding PLL reclocking artifacts while a rear panel output (OP70 only) allows to monitor demodulated jitter components on an external spectrum analyzer. SPECIFICATIONS Standard Supported: Data Rate: Eye Pattern Display Display: Method: Frequency Range: Amplitude Accuracy: Time Axis: Time Axis Accuracy: Jitter Filter: Cursor Measurement: Automatic Measurement: Jitter Display Display: Method: Amplitude Accuracy: Jitter Filter: Cursor Measurement: Automatic Measurement: Jitter Output Output Connector: Output Level: *Jitter output is enabled in jitter display mode. EXT REF Input for Eye Patterns Standard: Data Rate: Input Connector: Input Level: Input Format: Maximum Input Voltage: Note: HD SMPTE292M, SD SMPTE259M HD Gbps or 1.485/1.001 Gbps SD 270 Mbps Displays the SDI input waveform before equalizing Equivalent time sampling method 10 MHz to 2.5 GHz within +1, -3 db Within 800 mv ±5 % for 800 mv input 2 waveform display 100 ps/div 4 waveform display 200 ps/div 16 waveform display 800 ps/div Within ±3 % 10 Hz HPF, 100 Hz HPF, 1 khz HPF 10 khz HPF, 100 khz HPF Amplitude measurement using the Y cursor Time and jitter measurements using the X cursor Rise time and fall time measurements using the Tr and Tf cursors Measures and displays the amplitude, the jitter, the rise time, and the fall time from the eye pattern. Can be turned on/off Displays the jitter component of the SDI input Phase detection method Within ±10 % when applying 10 KHz 1 UI jitter (using 100 Hz filter) 10 Hz HPF, 100 Hz HPF, 1 khz HPF 10 khz HPF, 100 khz HPF Jitter measurement using cursors Displays the amount of jitter in time (sec) and unit interval (Ulp-p) 75 Ω BNC connector, 1 output Within 200 mv/ui ±20 % (at 10 khz jitter frequency and 75 Ω termination) OP70 HD SMPTE292M, SD SMPTE259M HD Gbps or 1.485/1.001 Gbps SD 270 Mbps 75 Ω BNC connector, 1 input Signal source amplitude Within 0.8 Vp-p ±10 % HD SMPTE292M, SD SMPTE259M ±2 V (DC + Peak AC) Option 70: Phase detection method is used for jitter measurement and functions are eye pattern, jitter display and histogram 25 SPECIFICATIONS Standard Supported: Data Rate: Eye Pattern Display Display: Method: Frequency Range: Amplitude Accuracy: Time Axis: Time Axis Accuracy: Jitter Filter: Cursor Measurement: Automatic Measurement: pattern. Can be turned on/off EXT REF Input for Eye Patterns Standard: Data Rate: Input Connector: Input Level: Input Format: Maximum Input Voltage: Note: HD SMPTE292M SD SMPTE259M HD Gbps or 1.485/1.001 Gbps SD 270 Mbps OP76 Displays the SDI input waveform before equalizing Equivalent time sampling method 10 MHz to 2.5 GHz within +1, -3 db Within 800 mv ±5 % for 800 mv input 2 waveform display 100 ps/div 4 waveform display 200 ps/div 16 waveform display 800 ps/div Within ±3 % 10 Hz HPF 100 Hz HPF 1 khz HPF 10 khz HPF 100 khz HPF Amplitude measurement using the Y cursor Time and jitter measurements using the X cursor Rise time and fall time measurements using the Tr and Tf cursors Measures and displays the amplitude, the jitter, the rise time, and the fall time from the eye HD SMPTE292M SD SMPTE259M HD Gbps or 1.485/1.001 Gbps SD 270 Mbps 75 Ω BNC connector, 1 input Signal source amplitude within 0.8 Vp-p ±10 % HD SMPTE292M SD SMPTE259M ±2 V (DC + Peak AC) Option 76: Equivalent time sampling method is used for jitter measurement and function is eye pattern

26 VIDEO Continuously monitors the status of the HD SDI/SD SDI signal line LT 292 HD/SD SDI LINE CHECKER GENERAL The LT 292 is a line checker that detects transmission errors of HD SDI and SD SDI signals and the status of video and audio signals. FEATURES Two serial digital inputs Equipped with one HD SDI input and one SD SDI input. The input signal format is automatically detected. Two serial digital outputs Equipped with one active output of the reclocked HD SDI signal and one active output of the reclocked SD SDI signal. Display The input format and other displays as well as various settings are shown on a 20-character 2-line LCD. Various errors are indicated using LEDs. Detected errors Detects transmission errors, cable errors, video errors, and audio errors. Logging function Logs can be recorded via the Ethernet port, on a CF card, or on the LT 292. Alarm output Detected errors are output from the D-sub connector on the rear panel (open collector output). Equivalent cable length meter function The intensity of the signal connected to the SDI input can be converted to a value in terms of the coaxial cable length and monitored. Operation In addition to operations from the panel, remote control is possible from a PC over an Ethernet connection. SPECIFICATIONS Video Formats and Corresponding Standards HDTV Supported video formats: Supported standards: SDTV Supported video formats 1 2 Supported standards: Error items: SDI HD-SDI: SD-SDI: Common to HD-SDI and SD-SDI: Video Freeze error: Color bar error: Black error/warning: Audio Mute error: Tone error: Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature: Operating Humidity: Operating Environment: Operating Altitude: Pollution Degree: Power Requirements: Dimensions and Weight: Accessories: LT 292 REAR PANEL SMPTE 274M, SMPTE 291M, SMPTE 292M,SMPTE 296M, SMPTE 299M, SMPTE RP i/ i/50 SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 272M, SMPTE 291M Turn ON/OFF for each item (however, format error is always ON) Line number error, CRC error, BCH error, and checksum error EDH error Format error, TRS error, reserved error, parity error, audio sequency error, and cable error/ warning Error when the video continuously freezes over the specified time Error when the color bar pattern continues longer than the specified time Error or warning when the intensity level is continuously less than or equal to the specified level for a time longer than the specified time Error when the AES/EBU embedded audio is continuously less than or equal to the specified mute level for a time longer than the specified time Error when the AES/EBU embedded audio is continuously a tone signal for a time longer than the specified time 0 to +40 C 90 % RH (without condensation) Indoor use Up to 2,000 m 2 90 to 250 VAC, 30 Wmax. 50 VAmax. 213 (W) x 88 (H) x 400 (D) mm, 3.8 kg Instruction manual... 1 Power cord i/60, 1080PsF/ i/59.94,1080PsF/ i/50, 1080PsF/ p/ p/ p/ p/ p/ PsF/ PsF/ p/60 720p/

27 VIDEO Provides Max-Min Indications And Helps In The Lighting Setup & Adjustment Process Display screen of PDA TV camera Light Lighting engineer Image display Measurement point Image control bar Settings Measurements display FS 3018 Lighting engineer checks lighting level on the PDA The FS3018 add-in software supports the lighting engineer by enabling him to use a PDA to check light intensity shown on the LV 5700A monitor Wireless LAN LV 5700A Waveform monitor LIGHTING MONITOR Status Display Waveform Display Vector Dispaly GENERAL FEATURES The FS 3018 LIGHTING MONITOR is a software program used to measure the intensity and colors at a specified position on the picture display on the LCD of an LV 5700A Series SDI video monitor and display them on a PDA display. The program is installed into an LV 5700A Series SDI video monitor for use. Wireless LAN can be easily set up between an LV 5700A Series SDI video monitor and a PDA, which is suitable for on site lighting where work is done away from the camera within a photo studio. Versatile functions are including the numeric judgment function of the intensity and color at the measurement point, zoom display function of the picture display, simple viewer function of waveforms and vectors, and recall function of presets are provided for more convenient use of the LV 5700A Series SDI video monitors. Measurement of Specified Point on the Picture Display The intensity (Y) and colors (R,G,B) of a specified position on the picture display are indicated using numeric values (percentage display) and simple bars. A cross cursor is displayed at the specified position. Supports Wireless Environment The Ethernet function of the LV 5700A Series SDI video monitors is used allowing easy configuration of a wireless LAN environment. Numeric Judgment Function Zoom Display Function Simple Viewer Function Recall Function Display and Control Using a Browser Program Monitoring function over a LAN for the network age Computer Network monitoring HUB LV 5700A LV 7700 Line monitoring over a LAN FS 3019 LT 292 SDI SIGNAL LINE MONITORING SOFTWARE GENERAL This system (the HD-SDI/SD-SDI line monitoring system) expands the area in which the LV 5700A Multi SDI Monitors and LT 292 HD/SD SDI Line Checkers can be applied. The system consists of a personal computer that has this software program installed, LV 5700As, and LT 292s connected over an Ethernet (LAN) network. The user can also view waveforms through the LV 5700A capture function. A total of 50 LV 5700A/LT 292 units can be connected. Time stamps are transferred from the computer to the LV 5700A/LT 292 for an accurate recording of the error log time. Thus, no deviation in time occurs between individual units. The system can set the detection parameters that the LV 5700A/LT 292 is equipped with on each unit connected over the network individually. FEATURES This line monitoring system transfers error information (logs) that the LV 5700A/LT 292 error detection function outputs to a computer which allows the user to view the error warnings and logs on a computer screen. In addition, an AVI file can be used to generate an alarm sound. 27

28 VIDEO Checks the Transmission Margin of the Coaxial Cable Laid in a HD-SDI/SD-SDI System LT 9610 SDI SYSTEM MARGIN CHECKER GENERAL The LT 9610 is a handy tool for checking the transmission margin of the coaxial cable laid in a HD- SDI/SD-SDI system. The HD-SDI/SD-SDI signal source and the HD-SDI/SD-SDI equivalent cable length display are built in. It converts the level of transmission attenuation of the coaxial cable under measurement to a cable length of a given cable type and displays the result. Built-in Signal Generator color bar Up to 20 ID characters can be multiplexed in the test pattern of the signal generator. An operator checks cable performance check field FEATURES Supports HD-SDI (1080i/ Gbps) and SD-SDI (525i/ Mbps). By converting the amount of transmission attenuation of the coaxial cable to a cable length of a given cable time, the following points are featured. The amount of transmission attenuation is intuitive as compared to displays such as the power value. If the characteristics of the cable are degraded due to the cable wearing out, the length is indicated longer than the physical length. This enables the amount of degradation and transmission performance to be determined. In a system in which different types of cables are mixed, the performance of the system (system margin) can easily be determined, because the cable length is displayed in terms of a given cable type. Built-in Signal Generator Because the HD-SDI/SD-SDI signal generator is built in, there is no need to prepare a separate signal source. In addition, highly accurate measurement is possible, because the signal generator and the equivalent cable length meter can be calibrated as a whole. The test pattern of the signal generator can be set to color bar or check field pattern. This enables the LV 7700 to be used as a simple standalone HD- SDI/SD-SDI signal generator. Up to 20 ID characters can be multiplexed in the test pattern of the signal generator. 8 channels (4 channels x 2 groups) of embedded audio can be embedded. GO/NOGO Judgemant Built-in Error Monitor Function Battery Operation 28

29 VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS Common Standard Supported HDTV: SDTV: Format HDTV: SDTV: Input/Output Connector: Auto Power Down: Display: Signal Generator Format: Test Pattern HDTV: SDTV: Embedded Audio Embedded Channels: Sampling Frequency: Resolution: Pre-emphasis: Frame Number: Frequency: Level: ID Character: Character Size: HDTV: SDTV: Cable Length Display Format: Auto switching through the input SDI signal Equivalent Cable Length Type HDTV: L-7CHD, LS-5CFB SDTV: L-5C2V Measurement Range HDTV: L-7CHD to 200 m LS-5CFB to 130 m SDTV: L-5C2V to 300 m Measurement Accuracy: ± 20 m Measurement Resolution: 7CHD:10 m LS-5CFB and L-5C2V: 5 m Error Monitor Function Monitor Items Format Error: TRS Error: CRC Error (HDTV only): EDH error SMPTE 274M, 292M SMPTE 125M, 259M LT i/ i/59.94 BNC 1 connector each 75 Ω Return loss 15 db (5 MHz to serial clock) Power turns off approx 5 minutes after the last key operation Can be disabled STN monochrome LCD 64 dots vertical x 128 dots horizontal Contrast adjustment available Manual switching through panel keys Multi format color bar check field 100/0/75/0 full field color bar/check field 8 ch (4 ch x 2 groups), ON/OFF selectable at the group level 48 khz sampling (synchronized to the video signal) 20 bits/24 bits switchable OFF, 50/15 µs, and CCITT switchable (switches only the CS bit) Enable/Disable switchable 1 khz -20/-18 db switchable Multiplex up to 20 alphanumeric characters (for HDTV and SDTV) 32 x 32 dots x 1/ x 2/ x 4 x 1/ x 2 Indicates an error when the input signal is not 1080i/59.94,525i/59.94 or when the signal is degraded to a point that the format cannot be determined. Monitored at all times. If a format error is detected, the words [FORMAT ERROR] blink with white and black inverted, and other errors are not monitored. Detects TRS (Timing Reference Signal) errors in the input SDI signal. Monitor ON/ OFF selectable. If a TRS error is detected, the word [TRS] blinks with white and black inverted. Indicates an error if the CRC multiplexed in the input HD-SDI signal and the CRC calculated within the LT 9610 do not match. The intensity signal is CRC-Y, and the chrominance difference signal is CRC- C. Monitor ON/OFF selectable. If a CRC error is detected, the word [CRC-Y] or [CRC-C] blinks with white and black inverted. (SDTV only): Checksum Error (HDTV only): Line Number Error (HDTV only): black inverted. Equivalent Cable Length Error: 7CHD: 10 m * If the threshold value of the equivalent cable length warning is greater than that of the equivalent cable length warning, error monitor takes priority. Hold Function Hold Off: Hold On: Indicates error detection only when an error is detected. The indication of the error detection is held once an error is detected. Releases the error detection indication sta- Preset Function: tus when using hold on. Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature: 0 to 40 C Operating Humidity: 85 % RH (without condensation) Spec-Guaranteed Temperature: 10 to 30 C Spec-Guaranteed Humidity: 85 % RH (without condensation) Operating Environment: Indoor use Operating Altitude: 2,000 m Overvoltage Category: I Pollution Degree: 2 Power Requirements: 4 AAA nickel hydride batteries, AC adapter Dimensions and Weight: 240 (H) x 94 (W) x 40 (D) mm Accessories: Indicates an error if the CRC multiplexed in the input SD-SDI signal and the CRC calculated within the LT 9610 do not match. Monitor ON/OFF selectable. If an EDH error is detected, the word [EDH] blinks with white and black inverted. Detects errors in the check sum that is included in the ancillary data of the input HD-SDI signal. Monitor ON/OFF selectable. If a checksum error is detected, the words [CHECK SUM] blink with white and black inverted. Indicates an error if the line number multiplexed in the input HD-SDI signal and the line number counted within the LT 9610 do not match. Monitor ON/OFF selectable. If a line number error is detected, the words [LINE NUMBER] blink with white and Indicates an error if the cable length display is greater than the specified threshold value. Monitor ON/OFF selectable independently for HDTV and SDTV. If an equivalent cable length error is detected, the word [LENGTH] blinks with white and black inverted. Threshold setting resolution LS-5CFB, L-5C2V: 5 m L-7CHD: 10 m Equivalent Cable Length Warning: Indicates a warning if the cable length display is greater than the specified threshold value. Monitor ON/OFF selectable independently for HDTV and SDTV. If an equivalent cable length warning is detected, the word [WARNING] blinks with white and black inverted. Threshold setting resolution LS-5CFB, L-5C2V: 5 m L- (projections excluded) Approx. 600 g (including the 4 AAA nickel hydride batteries) AC adapter... 1 Instruction manual

30 VIDEO LV 5152DA HD-SDI Monitor Conforming to 720p, 1080i, and 1035i Standards Digital Data Dump Function, Gamut Error Monitoring Function The cabinet is sold separately. LV 5152DA HD DIGITAL WAVEFORM MONITOR GENERAL The LV 5152DA HD Digital Waveform Monitor is designed to display 720p, 1080i, 1035i-line serials digital signal and analog signals. This instrument features two serial digital input systems and one analog component signal input system. In addition to the waveform monitor function, vector, bowtie, and audio signal display functions are provided. Digital input signal can be analyzed since transmission error monitoring function, equivalent cable length measurement function, and digital video data dump function are provided. Option 70: Waveform monitor function for NTSC component and composite signal is optionally equipped as factory option (No vector display) FEATURES Two serial digital input systems and one output system Serial digital signal input systems conforming to BTA S-004B standards; active output system to resend the input signal. Analog signal input system (Y, PB, PR or GBR) This input system enables the monitoring of both analog and digital signals since the analog input is provided. Digital data dump function Since parallel digital video data can be displayed in hexadecimal format, this instrument is convenient to trace troubles. Equivalent cable length measurement Indicates the serial digital signal level applied to the input connector as the coaxial cable (LS-5CFB) length instead of the actual level. Digital audio output conforming to SMPTE 276M Digital audio signal separated from the serial digital signal can be output. 30 Digital input error monitoring function Error logger function and contents display function of HD-SDI are provided. Vectorscope function (SMPTE 240M, 274M) Displays color difference signal in vector format. The analog GBR signal is converted into color difference signal with a matrix and displayed in vector format. Picture monitor output A D/A converter converts a serial digital signal into an analog signal, which is then output to the picture monitor. Y, PB, PR or G, B, R format can be selected. Input analog signals are directly output in analog mode. Conversion matrix, Y, PB, PR into GBR (SMPTE 240M, 274M) Simplifies signal level monitoring. Full-line selector mode Enables the selection and display of arbitrary video signal lines in each field. Since up to 15 lines can be continuously displayed, waveform is displayed with sufficient intensity. Measurements using cursor Ensures level measurement with 0.5% accuracy. Lissajous display for stereo audio signal Analog stereo audio signal can be displayed in lissajous format. Preset memory function Stores/recalls up to 10 panel settings to reduce setup time by presetting frequently used measurement conditions. Timing display Time difference and amplitude difference between channels can be monitored by using the timing display mode.

31 VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS Standards Digital/Analog Video Format Serial Digital Format: Subsidiary Data Format: Embedded Audio Format: Input Serial Digital Input Input Connector: Return Loss: Impedance: Analog Input Input Channel: Return Loss: Impedance: Analog EXT REF Input Input Channel: Return Loss : Impedance: Sync (Analog) Sync Amplitude: Output Serial Digital Active Output Output Signal: Output Level: Analog Picture Monitor Output Amplitude: Frequency Response: Output Connector: Digital Output Output Signal: Output Impedance: Output Connector: Amplitude: Sampling Frequency: Quantization Accuracy: Vertical Axis Deflection Sensitivity: Within ±1 %, GAIN 1 Within ±3 %, GAIN 5 Frequency Response (GAIN 1, Analog) FLAT: LOWPASS Attenuation: DIF D STEP Attenuation: DC Restorer Frequency Response Slow Mode: Fast Mode: Clamp Point Variable Range: Blanking Level Shift: Horizontal Axis Operation Mode: Display Method Line: Line Magnified: BTA S-004B, SMPTE 292M BTA S-005B, SMPTE 291M BTA S-006B, SMPTE 299M 75 Ω BNC, 2-system 15 db, 5 MHz to MHz 10 db, MHz to GHz 75 Ω, terminated CH1 (Y/ G), CH2 (PB/ B), CH3 (PR/ R), passive loop-through, 1-system 30 db, 50 khz to 30 MHz (both power on/ off) 75 Ω passive loop-through EXT REF, passive loop-through, 1-system 30 db, 50 khz to 30 MHz (both power on/ off) 75 Ω passive loop-through 0.3 Vp-p ±6 db Reoutput the selected input signal out of 2 systems 800 mvp-p ±10 % Y, PB, PR or GBR (Digital input, selectable) 1 V ±5 % 25 Hz to 30 MHz, within ±5 % BNC, 3-connectors, 1-system CH1/ 2, CH3/ 4, CH5/ 6, CH7/ 8, AES/EBU Format The relative phase of the output signal of the sound group 1(CH 1 to 4)and the sound group 2(CH 5 to 8)has not been guaranteed.within the same sound group the phase are matched. 75 Ω 4-BNC 1.0 V ±10 % 48 khz 16, 18, 20, 24 bits Within ±1 %, 25 Hz to 30 MHz (15 to 35 C, 50 khz ref.) 20 db, at 20 MHz (50 khz ref.) 20 db, at 30 khz (1.6 MHz ref.) 20 db, at 7 MHz (1.6 MHz ref.) 20 %, attenuation at 60 Hz input 80 %, attenuation at 60 Hz input Back porch 0.5 to 2 µs, relative to sync pulse raising edge 1 % (10 to 90 % of APL Variation) Overlay: Displays waveforms overlaid Parade: Displays waveforms side-by-side Timing: For bowtie signal* measurement * Authorized by Tektronix, Inc. 1H, 2H, 3H 1H MAG, 2H MAG, 3H MAG LV 5152DA Video System standards x 1035 / 60i BTA S-001B, 002B x 1035 / 59.94i SMPTE 240M,260M x 1080 / 60i, 30sF x 1080 / 59.94i, 29.97sF x 1080 / 50i, 25sF x 1080 / 30p x 1080 / 29.97p SMPTE 274M x 1080 / 25p x 1080 / 24p x 1080 / 23.98p x 1080 / 24sF x 1080 / 23.98sF x 720 / 60p x 720 / 59.94p SMPTE 296M 15 *NTSC (ANALOG ONLY) *OPTION Field: Field Magnified: Time Base Accuracy: Linearity: Vector Mode Amplitude Accuracy Sync Blanking: Picture Mode: Audio Mode Calibration Accuracy: Full Scale: Bandwidth: X-Y Phase Accuracy: Calibration Signal Digital Function Error Display Data Dump Function (only LV 5152DA): Equivalent Cable Length Meter Function: Display Accuracy: Gamut Error Display: Error Detection Range: Detector Setting Accuracy: Line Selector: Operation Field: Selectable Line: Line Window Window Range: Preset Function Preset/ Recall Controls: Remote Control Control Signal: Control Input: Cursor Measurement Configuration: Amplitude Measurement: Measurement Range : Accuracy: Resolution: Amplitude Ratio Measurement: Time Measurement: Measurement Range: Accuracy: Resolution: Time Ratio Measurement: Frequency Measurement: CRT Effective Display Area: Graticule: 1V, 2V, 3V 1V MAG, 2V MAG, 3V MAG Within ±3 % (0.1 µs/ div) Within ±3 % ±2 % (Y, PB, PR input), ±2 % (G, B, R input) Blanks sync dot Displays picture using Y or G signal ±0.5 db of full sale 0, 2, 4 dbm (menu selectable) Within 3 db at 20 khz Within 1 at 20 khz 1 V ±0.5 % LED on the front panel, Menu shows detail Displays 10 bits digital data in hexadecimal notation after parallel conversion is made. Compares serial digital signal level with reference signal (800 mvp-p) and displays level as the cable length. ±20 m LED on the front panel. Menu shows detail Exceeding 35 mv and 735 mv ±5 mv Intensifies a selected line FLD1, FLD2, ALL (at Interlace) Line 1 to 750, 1 to 1125 Line 1 to 525(Option70) Intensifies selected line and displays multiple lines 1 to 15 lines Up to 10 front panel controls All front panel controls (except INTEN, READOUT INTEN, ROTATION, FOCUS, ILLUM, POWER) TTL (low active) D-sub, 25-pin (REMOTE), rear panel Two horizontal cursors (REF, ) Two vertical cursors (REF, ) Voltage (V or %) between the REF and cursors 0 to 2000 mv, 0 to % ±0.5 % 1 mv or 0.1 % Amplitude between the REF and cursors relative to 100 % REF is displayed in R%. Measures time between the REF and cursors At least ±6 div from graticule center ±3 % 1/ 80 div When [ R% ] is selected with the menu, time between the REF and cursors relative to 100 % REF is displayed in R%. Frequency of one cycle between the REF and cursors 80 x 100 mm Internal (waveform) External (vector) Electronically-generated (vector, audio) Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature: 0 to 40 C Operating Humidity 90 % RH (without condensation) Operating Environment: Indoor use Operating Altitude: up to 2000 m Overvoltage Category: ΙΙ Pollution Degree: 2 Power Requirements: 90 to 250 VAC, 48 to 440 Hz, 100 W max. Dimensions and Weight: 215 (W) 132 (H) 429 (D) mm, 5.5 kg Accessories: Illumination lamp pin D-sub connector pin D-sub connector cover... 1 Screw, rack mounting (inch size)... 2 Cover, inlet stopper... 1 Power cord... 1 Instruction manual... 1 Optional Accessories: Cabinet:LR-2427B (with handle), LR-2404A (without handle)

32 VIDEO Displays Analog Component Signals of Multi-Format DTV Monitoring with Conversion Matrix (YPBPR to GBR) The cabinet is sold separately. LV 5152 MULTI FORMAT WAVEFORM MONITOR GENERAL The LV 5152 Multiformat Waveform Monitor is designed to display analog component signals of multiformat DTV. This instrument features two analog component signal input systems. In addition to the waveform monitor function, vector, timing, and audio signal display functions are provided. Moreover, the full line selector function and control setting menus are provided. Applications include production testing of multiformat HD/SD products, off-air transmitter monitoring of 1080/ 720/480 signals when used with a set top box and a color monitor. Post production and telecine rooms are supporting the increase in demand for multiformat testing including the increasingly common use of 1080/23.98p and 24p standard formats. FEATURES Complies DTV for USA and Europe Seven video formats for DTV-USA and three video formats for DTV-Europe are observed. Two analog signal input systems (YPBPR or GBR) are provided. Picture monitor output is provided in the selected format required by the monitor. Vectorscope function (SMPTE 274M, 296M) Displays color difference signal of component signals in vector format.the analog GBR signal is converted into color difference signals with a matrix and displayed in vector format. Conversion matrix YPBPR into GBR (SMPTE 274M, 296M) Simplifies signal level monitoring. Measurements using cursors Cursor level, time and frequency measurements have a 0.5% accuracy. 32 Preset memory function Stores/recalls up to 10 front panel settings to reduce setup time by presetting complex and frequently used measurement conditions for one button recall. Basic Operation Mode WFM(Waveform monitor mode) Displays up to three channel waveforms. VEC(Vectorscope mode) Vector display of PB and PR channel input signals. PIC(Picture monitor mode) Monochrome display of Y/G channel input signals. AUDIO(Audio mode) Lissajous display of analog stereo audio signal. Principal Functions Cursor Function Voltage and time measurements (WFM only). Full line Selector Selects line on each field (WFM, VEC, PIC) Timing Measurement Measures time difference between CH1(Y/G) and CH2(PB/B), CH3(PR/R) channel (WFM only). Format Converter Converts Y, PB, PR format signal into GBR format.

33 VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS LV 5152 Measurement Signal and Standards No Format FullLine/Flame Frequency Complied Spec /60I 1125/29.97(30) SMTPE 274M /50I 1125/25 SMTPE 274M /24P 1125/23.98(24) SMTPE 274M /24sF 1125/23.98(24) SMTPE 274M 5 720/60P 750/59.94(60) SMPTE 296M 6 480/60P 525/59.94(60) SMPTE 293M 7 480/60I 525/59.97(30) SMPTE 253M /50I 1250/25 SMTPE 295M 9 576/50P 625/50 ITU-R BT /50I 625/25 ITU-R BT Input System Signal Input Input Channel: Input Connector: Return Loss: Impedance: Maximum Input Voltage: CH1(Y/G),CH2(PB/B),CH3(PR/R),2-system BNC 30 db, 50 khz to 30 MHz (both power on/off) 75 Ω passive loop-through ±2 V (DC + peak AC) EXT REF Input Input Channel: Input Connector: Return Loss: Impedance: Maximum Input Voltage: Sync Amplitude: EXT REF, 1-system BNC 30 db, 50 khz to 30 MHz (both power on/off) 75 Ω passive loop-through ±12 V (DC + peak AC) 0.3 Vp-p ±6 db Picture Monitor Output Frequency Response: Output Impedance: Output Connector: Amplitude: 25 Hz to 30 MHz, within ± 5 % 75 Ω BNC, 1 system 1 V ± 5 % Vertical Axis Deflection System Deflection Sensitivity: Variable Range: GBR Matrix Deflection Sensitivity: Frequency Response: FLAT: LOWPASS Attenuation: DIF'D STEP Attenuation: Step Response: DC Restorer Frequency Response Slow Mode: Fast Mode: Clamp Point: Variable Range: Blanking Level Shift: Horizontal Axis Operation Mode: Display Method Line: Line Magnified: Field: Field Magnified: Time Base Accuracy: Linearity: Vectorscope Mode Frequency Range: Amplitude Accuracy: Within ± 1 %, GAIN x 1 Within ± 3 %, GAIN x 5 At least 0.5 to 1.2 times (both GAIN x 1 / x 5) Within ± 1 %, GAIN x 1 Within ± 3 %, GAIN x 5 x 1 GAIN Within ± 1 %, 25 Hz to 30 MHz (50 khz ref., GBR Matrix OFF mode) 20 db, at 20 MHz (50 khz ref.) 20 db, at 30 khz (1.6 MHz ref.) 20 db, at 7 MHz (1.6 MHz ref.) For 2T pulse, 2T bar Within ± 1 %, pulse/bar ratio Within ± 1 %, overshoot Within ± 1 %, preshoot Within ± 1 %, ringing Within ± 1 %, sag (vertical tilt) 20 %, attenuation at 60 Hz input 80 %, attenuation at 60 Hz input Back porch 0.5 to 2 µs, relative to sync pulse raising edge 1 % (10 to 90 % of APL Variation) Overlay: Displays waveforms overlaid Parade: Displays waveforms side-by-side Timing: For bowtie signal* measurement * Authorized by Tektronix, Inc. 1H, 2H, 3H 1H MAG, 2H MAG, 3H MAG 1V, 2V, 3V 1V MAG, 2V MAG, 3V MAG Within ±3 % (0.1 µs/ div) Within ±3 % 1 MHz ± 2 % (Y, PB, PR Input) ± 2 % (G, B, R Input) 33 Variable Range: Graticule: Sync Blanking: Picture Monitor Mode: Audio Mode Calibration Accuracy: Full Scale: Bandwidth: X-Y Phase Accuracy: Calibration Signal: Line Selector Operation Mode: Operation Field: Display: Line Window Function: Window Range: Operation Mode: Operation Field: Preset Function Preset/ Recall: Controls: Remote Control Control Signal: Control Input: Cursor Measurement Configuration: Amplitude Measurement: Measurement Range: Accuracy Resolution Amplitude Ratio Measurement: Time Measurement: Measurement Range: Accuracy: Resolution: Time Ratio Measurement: Frequency Measurement: CRT Effective Display Area: Graticule: Electronically-generated (vector, audio) Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature: Operating Humidity: Operating Environment: Operating Altitude: Overvoltage Category: Pollution Degree: Power Requirements: Dimensions and Weight: Accessories: Optional Accessories: At least 0.5 to 1.2 times (both GAIN x1 / x5) (for vertical and horizontal axes) Electronic graticule Blanks sync dot Displays picture using the Y or G signal. The picture is horizontally reduced in size because the CRT aspect ratio is not 16:9. ±0.5 db of full sale 0, 2, 4 dbm (menu selectable) Within 3 db at 20 khz Within 1 at 20 khz 1 V ±0.5 % WFM, VEC, PIC FLD1, FLD2, ALL (at Interlace) Only ALL at 1080/50i (1250Line). The selected line is intensified Displays brighter by overlaying multiple lines resulting in higher effective refresh rate. 1 to 15 lines WFM, VEC, PIC FLD1, FLD2, ALL (at Interlace) Up to 10 front panel controls All front panel controls (except INTEN, READOUT INTEN, ROTATION, FOCUS, ILLUM, POWER) TTL (low active) D-sub, 25-pin (REMOTE), rear panel Two horizontal cursors (REF, ) Two vertical cursors (REF, ) Voltage (V or %) between the REF and cursors 0 to 2000 mv, 0 to % ±0.5 % 1 mv or 0.1 % Amplitude between the REF and cursors relative to 100 % REF is displayed in R%. Measures time between the REF and cursors At least ±6 div from graticule center ±3 % 1/ 80 div When [ R% ] is selected with the menu, time between the REF and cursors relative to 100 % REF is displayed in R%. Frequency of one cycle between the REF and cursors 80 x 100 mm Internal (waveform) External (vector) 0 to 40 C 90 % RH (without condensation) Indoor use up to 2000 m II 2 90 to 250 VAC, 48 to 440 Hz, 60 W max. 215 (W) x 132 (H) x 429 (D) mm, 5.5 kg Illumination lamp pin D-sub connector pin D-sub connector cover... 1 Screw, rack mounting (inch size)... 2 Cover, inlet stopper... 1 Power cord... 1 Instruction manual... 1 LR-2427B (Cabinet, with handle) LR-2404A (Cabinet, without handle) LR-2700A-I (Rack-Mount Adapter, inch size)

34 VIDEO Observation of Serial Digital and Analog Signals EDH Measurement Function for Monitoring of Digital Input Transmission Error PATENTED: Equivalent cable length measurement The cabinet is sold separately. LV 5100DE (Eye pattern-display versioin) LV 5100D/LV 5100DE COMPONENT DIGITAL WAVEFORM MONITOR GENERAL The LV 5100D is a Component Digital/Analog Waveform Monitor for the 525/60 and 625/50 systems. It accommodates both digital and analog, and features two component serial digital inputs and a single 3- channel component analog input that allows you to make use of your existing video sources and is ideal for mixed digital/analog systems. At the digital inputs, an EDH measurement function enables transmission error monitoring and analysis. By using the equivalent cable length measurement function, it is possible to check signal strength in a form that is intuitively understandable. The LV 5100D also boasts a full range of analog component waveform monitor functions, including a picture monitor output for TV picture display of a video signal, a line selector function with a high-intensity CRT, and settings from a menu screen. FEATURES Two sets of serial digital inputs and output Two sets of serial digital passive through inputs conforming to ITU-R656-1 and SMPTE 259M standards are provided, in addition to an active output which provides retransmission of either of these inputs. Component analog inputs (Y, CB, CR, or GBR) By providing component analog inputs, it is possible to use the LV 5100D in mixed digital/analog applications. Analog picture monitor output The LV 5100D features an analog picture monitor output which outputs a serial digital video signal in either GBR format or Y, CB, CR format. Picture display function A picture display function is provided, enabling display of the Y or G video signal as a TV image on the CRT. When using the line selector, a selected line of the image is displayed with intensity modulation, a convenient feature in checking the positional relationship between a video signal and the picture. Vector display function Vector display is possible of both digital and analog signals. Equivalent cable length measurement function The strength of a signal connected to the serial digital input can be measured and displayed as an equivalent length of 5C-2V coaxial cable. EDH measurement function It is possible to monitor serial transmission error by means of EDH codes. Data damp function Displays arbitrary line of digital data in hexadecimal notation. Cursor measurement functions Level measurements are possible by using cursor lines. Stereo sound X-Y display function An analog stereo signal can be displayed in X-Y mode. Preset function Panel switch settings, including vertical and horizontal position settings can be stored in memory, enabling often-used measurement conditions to be stored for quick recall from either the front panel or remotely. 34

35 VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS CRT Type: Accelerating Potential: Scales: Measurement Signals Digital Signals Applicable Standards: Analog Signals: Input Serial Digital Inputs Number of Inputs: Input Connector Type: Return Loss: Analog Inputs Number of Inputs: Input Connector Type: Analog REF Input Input: Input Connector Type: BNC Outputs Series Digital Active Outputs Output Signal: Output Impedance: Return Loss: Analog Picture Monitor Output Formats: Frequency Response: Output Impedance: Output Connector Type: Vertical Axis Deflection System Deflection Sensitivity: Variable Range: Filter Characteristics FLAT: LOWPASS Roll off: DIF'D STEP: Gain: Horizontal Axis Operating Mode: Sweep Mode Sweep Time Line Display: Line Magnification: Field Display: Field Magnification: Time Accuracy: Sweep Length: Linearity: Display Position Adjustment Range: Vector Mode: Picture Mode: Audio Mode: 150 mm, rectangular, P4 phosphor 16.5 kv Internal graticules (waveforms), illuminated scales Displayed graticules (vector and audio) ltu-r601-3/ltu-r656-1, SMPTE 125M-1992/SMPTE 259M 4:2:2 serial digital component video signals 3-line analog component video signals Y, CB, CR or GBR Two sets of a single input, passive through BNC 25 db, 1 to 270 MHz (Powered on) 15 db, 1 to 270 MHz (Powered off) One set of 3 inputs, passive through BNC One input, passive through Retransmission of either of the serial inputs as selected 75 Ω 15 db min 1 to 270 MHz Y, CB, CR or GBR 25 Hz to 6 MHz 75 Ω BNC (One set of three connectors) ±1 %: referenced to a 1 V input full scale ±2 %: 5 ±0.5 %: Cursor measurements 0.7 to 2 Vp-p: 1 full scale 0.14 to 0.4 Vp-p: 5 Within ±2 %: 25 Hz to 6 MHz +2 to -5 %: 6 MHz to 8 MHz (50 khz reference) 35 db min. at 3.58 MHz 400 khz band pass filter (for measurement of the linearity of the luminance component) 5 ±10 %, referenced to FLAT response OVERLAY: Displays waveforms in overlay mode PARADE: Displays waveforms in parade mode TIMING: To measure time difference between channels using the bowtie* signal (*Used with permission of Tektronix,Inc.) Automatic sweep 1H, 2H, 3H 1H MAG, 2H MAG, 3H MAG 1V, 2V, 3V 1V MAG, 2V MAG, 3V MAG Within ±3 % 12.5 div ±0.7 div Within ±3 % LV 5100D Any part of the synced sweep can be displayed on the screen in any sweep mode. Vector display of Cb and Cr signals Picture display of Y or G signal Display stereo signal in lissajous pattern Digital Functions EDH Function Applicable Standards: Error Indicator: SMPTE RP165 ALARM LED (when error occurs on the serial digital input signal.) TRS Monitoring: Monitors SAV position with respect to EAV, and format. ANC Data Monitoring: Monitors presence of audio data, and channel display format. Data Dump Function: Displays 10 bits digital data in hexadecimal notation after parallel conversion is made. Equivalent Cable Length: Converts input signal level into equivalent Measurement Function: length of 5C-2V cable. CAL Amplitude: Line Selector FLD 1 & 2: FRAME : Preset Function Ten Sets of Panel Settings: can be Preset and Recalled: Cursor Measurements Available Cursors: Spec-Guaranteed: Power Requirements: Dimensions and Weight: Accessories: Optional Accessory: 1 V ±0.5 % Vertical cursor display 525 lines 625 lines Lines 1 to 262 Lines 1 to 312 Lines 1 to 525 Lines 1 to 625 All front panel settings (with the exception of INTEN, READOUT INTEN, ROTATION, FOCUS, ILLUM, and POWER switch) 2 horizontal cursor lines (REF and ) 2 vertical cursor lines (REF and ) Amplitude Measurement: Measurement of the voltage between the REF and cursors (V or %) Calibration Accuracy: Vertical: 0.5 % Time Interval Measurement: Measurement of the time interval between the REF and cursors Measurement Range: ±6 divisions min. from the center of the screen Resolution 1/80 div Frequency Measurement: Frequency displayed based on the period measured between the REF and cursors Environmental Conditions Operating: LV 5100D REAR PANEL Temperature: 0 to 40 C Humidity: 85 % RH (without condensation) Temperature: 10 to 35 C Humidity: 80 % RH (without condensation) 90 to 250 VAC, 48 to 440 Hz, 65 Wmax. 215 (W) 132 (H) 429 (D) mm, 5.0 kg (not including outer cabinet) Illumination lamp... 5 Rack mounting inch-size screws... 2 D-sub 25-pin connector... 1 D-sub 25-pin connector cover... 1 Screw lock... 2 E-ring... 1 Cover/Inlet stopper... 1 Power cord... 1 Instruction manual... 1 Cabinet: LR-2427B, LR-2404A, LR-2700A-I 35

36 VIDEO Vector/Waveform Measurement Using a Signal Unit 5870 (NTSC, SCH)/5872A (NTSC)/5873 (PAL) VECTOR/WAVEFORM MONITOR GENERAL The 5870, 5872A and 5873 are TV signal measurement monitors that integrate a waveform monitor with a vectorscope in one body. The 5870 has a SCH phase measurement circuit. Waveforms and vectors can be independently or simultaneously displayed on a single CRT by operating the provided electronic switches (this feature is only available for horizontal time limit display). In addition, the 5870 has a SCH phase measuring function for video editing. The SCH phase can be numerically readout on the CRT. The phase variations of jitter are also displayed with the waveform. Furthermore, a full-line selector function is installed for reading the field and line number on the CRT. As a result, These all models are very useful not only in observing the blanking time intervals for VITS, VIR, character broadcasting and ITS, but also in checking the various characteristics of video camera resolution. *The 5873 and 5872A are a model which the SCH phase measuring function is eliminated from the FEATURES 150 mm rectangular CRT with internal graticule. The 16.5 kv high-accelerating potential facilitates legible, clearly defined display. CRT displays of SCH measurements enable correct monitoring without reading errors. (5870) The full-line selector function used to select optional lines from the panel also monitor vertical interval test signals (VITS). Up to 9 fields and lines can be preset in memory. The field and line numbers selected by the line selector function are displayed on the CRT for confirmation during waveform observation. The dual-channel display function displays A and B inputs concurrently. The newly developed power supply circuit enables instrument operation using supply voltages of 90 to 250 VAC without switching. The standard DC operation function (11 to 20 VDC) enables instrument use in vehicles. All front-panel switches can be externally remote-controlled. Differential gain (DG) / differential phase (DP) can be displayed through single mode key operations. RGB/YRGB with parade display function. 5872A FRONT PANEL 5873 FRONT PANEL 5870/5872A/5873 REAR PANEL 36

37 VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS Model CRT Type: Accelerating Potential: Effective Display Area: Scale: Waveform Monitor Vertical Axis: Deflection Sensitivity: Gain Variable Range: Maximum Input Voltage: Frequency Response FLAT: LUM: IRE: CHROMA: Transient Response: Over Shooting: Preshooting: Ringing: Pulse to bar Ratio: Vertical Window Signal Tilting: Input Impedance: Return Loss: Video Output: Frequency Response: Output Impedance: DC Restoration: Horizontal Axis 1 H Sweep: 2 H Sweep: 1 µs/div: 0.2 µs/div: 1 V Sweep: 2 V Sweep: V. MAG : Sweep Time Accuracy: Sweep Length: Linearity: RGB/YRGB: Staircase Input: Maximum Input: Timebase: Control Signal: CAL: DG and DP Display DG: Measurement: DP: Measurement: 5870/5872A/ /5872A 150 mm rectangular 16.5 kv 100 (H) 80 (V) mm Internal graticule (for waveform and vector display) with scale illumination 1 Vp-p full scale, 1.0 scale: ±1 %, 5 MAG: ±3 % 5 MAG: ±3 % 1 full scale: 0.7 to 2 Vp-p, 5: 0.14 to 0.4 Vp-p ±2 V (DC+peak AC), AC coupled 25 Hz to 6 MHz±2 %, 6 MHz to 8 MHz +2 %, -5 % at 50 khz reference Attenuation: 35 db or more at 4.43 MHz Flatness between FLAT and LUM:1 % or less at 15 khz 4.43 MHz bandpass filter, Bandwidth: 2 MHz ±500 khz Flatness between FLAT and CHROMA: 1 % or less at 4.43 MHz or less at 3.58 MHz 1 V full scale (2 T pulse and 2 T bar for FLAT) ±2 % ±2 IRE ±2 % ±2 IRE ±2 % ±2 IRE Within ±1 % Within ±2 % 15 kω or more 40 db or more at 50 khz to 6 MHz 1 Vp-p ±5 % at Vp-p ±5 % at 140 scale deflection IRE scale deflection 25 Hz to 6 MHz ±5 % 75 Ω Clamped on the back porch Displays 1 H waveform Displays 2 H waveform 10 times of 2 H sweep 25 times of 1 H sweep Displays 1 V waveform Displays 2 V waveform 20 ±3 times 1 V and 2 V sweeps 1 µs/div: ±3 % 0.2 µs/div: ±3 % 12.5 div Within ±3 % Selectable (RGB at shipment) 10 Vp-p ±15 % for 9 div display ±12 V (DC+peak AC) RGB: 30 % or standard length (1 H sweep) YRGB: 22 % or standard length (1 H sweep) Apply TTL LOW active signal to rear panel remote connector. Amplitude: 1 Vp-p ±1 % Frequency: 100 khz ±0.1 khz Range: ±10 % Accuracy: ±1 % Range: ±10 Accuracy: ±1 1 Vp-p full scale, 140 IRE: ±1 %, <5872A> Attenuation: 35 db or more at 3.58 MHz Flatness: between FLAT and LUM: 1 % or less at 15 khz <5870> Conforms to IEEE STD 205 of 1972 Flatness between FLAT and IRE: 1 % or less at 15 khz 3.58 MHz bandpass filter, Bandwidth: 2 MHz±500 khz Flatness between FLAT and CHROMA: 1 % Model Vectorscope Section Chrominance Processing Bandwidth: Phase Accuracy: Amplitude Accuracy: Differential Phase: Differential Gain: Subcarrier Regenerator: Phase Adjustment Range: Display GAIN Variable Range: SCH Mode (5870 only) Absolute Accuracy: Relative Accuracy: Display Range : CRT Readout : Required Input SCH Mode(5870 only): Other Mode: EXT REF Sync Amplitude: Input Impedance: Return Loss : Maximum Input Voltage: Line Selector : CRT Readout: Remote Control Controllable Section: Control Signal: Control Input Connector: Power Requirements: Dimensions and Weight: Accessories: /5872A Fsc= MHz Fsc= MHz High Frequency=Fsc+500 khz High Frequency=Fsc+500 khz Low Frequency=Fsc-500 khz Low Frequency=Fsc-500 khz ±2 ±3 % ±1 ±1 % Sync capture range: ±50 Hz MAG input: 210 mvp-p to 1.05 Vp-p 5 MAG input: 43.2 to 210 mvp-p Sync and burst of composite video or black burst signal: 300 mvp-p ±6 db Synchronization with 143 mvp-p to 4 Vp-p 15 kω or more 40 db or more at 50 khz to 6 MHz ±12 V (DC+peak AC) Field 1, 3: 1 to 313 lines Field 2, 4: 314 to 625 lines Field selection:fd 1, 3, FD 2, 4 or FD 1, 2, 3, 4 Preset: 1 to 9, 9 points Preset No.: P1 to P9 Field: FD 1, 3, FD 2, 4 or FD 1, 2, 3, 4 Line Number: 1 to 313 or 314 to 625 ±5 at ambient of 25 C ±2 External reference: 360 Internal reference: ±80 SCH+80 to SCH-80 Sync and burst of composite video or black burst signal: 286 mvp-p ±3 db Sync and burst of composite video or black burst signal: 286 mvp-p ±6 db Field 1, 3:1 to 263 lines Field 2, 4:1 to 262 lines Field selection: FD 1, 3, FD 2, 4 or FD 1, 2, 3, 4 Preset: 1 to 9, 9 points Preset No.: P1 to P2 Field:FD 1, 3 FD 2, 4 or FD 1, 2, 3, 4 Line Number: 1 to 262 or 1 to 263 All front panel functions TTL (active low) Rear panel D-sub 25-pin (REMOTEA) D-sub 9-pin (REMOTE B) 90 to 250 VAC, 48 to 440 Hz, 50 Wmax.(5870),45 Wmax.(5872A/5873) 11 to 20 VDC, 2. 8 A at 12 V 215 (W) 132 (H) 429 (D) mm, 7.1 kg (5873, 5870), 7 kg (5872A) D-sub 25-pin connector... 1 D-sub 9-pin connector... 1 Cannon connector... 1 Screw (inch size)... 2 Illumination lamp... 5 Cover, inlet stopper... 1 Screw lock... 2 E-ring... 1 AC power cord... 1 Instruction manual

38 VIDEO Precise Video Signal Level Measurements with Cursor Provides Full Component Monitoring Capability PAT. PEND. The cabinet is sold separately. 5220/5222 WAVEFORM MONITOR GENERAL The Models 5220/5222 are precision Waveform Monitors designed to monitor video signals. The 5220 series with its bright CRT adds such extra features to conventional waveform monitors as a line selector, picture monitor mode, X-Y display mode for stereo audio signals, and menu screen for setting functions. These instruments have eight video inputs and one external reference input channel. Up to four waveforms. component or composite signals and the external reference, can be displayed side-by-side to reduce system size. These instruments can also be remotely controlled when combined with the 5210 series Vectorscope. Model Scanning Lines Field Frequency Subcarrier Frequency Sync System Color System FEATURES Hz 3.58 MHz M NTSC /625 60/50 Hz 3.58/4.43 MHz B, C, D, G, H, I, K, M NTSC/PAL/SECAM Precise measurements with cursor The cursor permits signal level measurements with 0.5% accuracy. Full line selector Since one or two lines of a video signal can be displayed, you can conveniently observe VITS, VIR, or teletext signals. The function also helps to test video camera characteristics. Picture display function These instruments can display video signals as a TV picture even without a picture monitor. In the line selector mode, the selected line is highlighted for identification on the picture. 38 Eight video inputs and one external reference input channel These instruments have eight video inputs and one external reference input channel. Up to four waveforms, including the external reference, can, be displayed simultaneously. The parade (side-by-side) or ALT (overlaid) display is selectable. The component signal can be displayed in the bowtie configuration. (Bowtie signal: U.S. PATENT 4,829,366 is used with permission of Tektronix, Inc.) Menu function For user-friendly front panel control, a menu controller is provided for various functions. Dual filter Both FLAT and LUM (low-pass filter) filtered characteristics can be displayed simultaneously. Preset function The front panel settings, including vertical and horizontal positioning, can be stored in memory, and recalled from the front panel or via the remote control connector on the rear panel. You can reduce setup time by presetting frequently used measuring conditions. Clamp position setting The clamp point can be set at any position, with the position being highlighted on the waveform. RGB/YRGB display function Y/C input connectors Bright CRT, accelerating potential of 16.5 kv Universal AC power supply, 90 to 250 V X-Y mode (Factory option)

39 VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS 5220/5222 CRT Type: Accelerating Potential: Effective Display Area: Graticule: Input Input Channel: Input Impedance: Maximum Input Voltage: Return Loss: Isolation between Channels: Gain Difference Between Channels: Loop Through Isolation: Measurement Signal 5220: 5222: Vertical Axis Deflection Factor: Variable Range: Filter FLAT: LUM Attenuation: CHROMA Band-Pass Filter: Bandwidth: Bandwidth error: Amplitude error: DIF'D STEP: Gain: Attenuation: Attenuation: Step Response: Overshoot: Preshoot: Ringing: Pulse/Bar Ratio: Vertical Tilt: DG: DC Restoration Frequency Response Slow Mode: Fast Mode: Clamp Point: Variable Range: Blanking Level Shift: Video Output Frequency Response: Input /Output Gain Ratio: Return Loss: DG, DP: Horizontal Axis Time Accuracy: Sweep Length: Linearity: Position Control Range: RGB/YRGB Selectable: Staircase Input: Maximum Input Voltage: CAL Amplitude: EXT REF Input Impedance Return Loss: Maximum Input Voltage: 150 mm rectangular (P4) 16.5 kv 100 (H) 80 (V) mm Illuminated internal graticule 5222 (625) 5220/5222 (525) CHA: 1, 2, 3, 4 CH1, 2, 3 CHB: 1, 2, 3, 4 15 kω, 75 Ω loop-through ±2 V (DC+peak AC) 40 db, 50 khz to 6 MHz 60 db, (Fsc) 0.5 % CH1 to CH4 70 db (Fsc) NTSC video signal (525/60) NTSC/PAL/SECAM video signal (525/60, 625/50) ±1 %: 1 Vp-p full scale (140 IRE ref) ±3 %: 5 ±0.5 %: Cursor measurement 0.5 Vp-p to 1.45 Vp-p: 1 full scale 0.1 Vp-p to 0.29 Vp-p: 5 Within ±2 % (25 Hz to 6 MHz) Within+2 to -5 % (6 MHz to 8 MHz) (50 khz ref.) 35 db (Fsc) 5222 (625) 5220/5222 (525) Fac ±2.4 MHz Fac ±2.2 MHz 2.4 MHz ±200 khz 2.2 MHz ±200 khz 1 % (Fsc) 400 khz band-pass filter 5 ±10 % (FLAT ref.) 20 db (14 khz, 2 MHz) 400 khz ref. 40 db (Fsc) 400 khz ref. For 1 V full scale, FLAT, 2T pulse, 2T bar ±2 % or less ±1 % or less ±2 % or less Within ±1 % (0.99: 1 to 1.01: 1) Within 1 % 1 % 20 % (absolute attenuation value for 60 Hz input) 80 % (absolute attenuation value for 60 Hz input) Back porch 5 to 7 µs or more (with respect to sync pulse leading edge) 1 % (With 10 to 90 % APL or color burst on/off) Within ±3 % (25 Hz to 6 MHz) 1.1 ±3 % (75 Ω term.) 30 db (50 khz to 6 MHz) 1 %, 1 Within ±3 % (1 µs/div) Within ±3 % (0.2 µs/div) 12.5 div ±0.7 div Within ±3 % Anywhere in the screen Factory setting: RGB 10 V ±15 %, 9 divisions display ±12 V (DC+peak AC) 1 V ±0.5 % 15 kω, 75 Ω loop-through 40 db (50 khz to 6 MHz) ±12 V (DC+peak AC) 39 Synchronization Sync Amplitude: INT: EXT: Remote Sync Sensitivity: Line Selector Field 1, 3: Field 2, 4: ALL : Preset Function Controllable Functions: Remote Control Combinations: Controllable Functions: Control Input: Cursors Configuration: Amplitude Measurement: Measurement Range: 0 to % 0 to IRE Calibration Accuracy: 0.5 %, vertical Resolution: 0.5 mv, 0.1 IRE, or 0.1 % Time Measurement Time between the REF and cursors Measurement Range: ±6 div or more from center Calibration Accuracy: Resolution: Frequency Measurement: ±3 % 1/80 div Frequency between the REF and cursors those apart 1 cycle Environmental Conditions Operating: Power Requirements: Power Consumption: Dimensions and Weight: Accessories: Optional Accessory: 5222 REAR PANEL 5220: CH1, 2, : CH1A, 4A, 1B, 4B 5222 (625) 5220/5222 (525) 0.3 Vp-p ±6 db Vp-p ±6 db 0.3 Vp-p ±6 db Vp-p ±6 db 143 mv to 4 V composite sync amplitude 2.0 to 5.0 V square wave or 4.0 V composite sync (activates at sync leading edge) 5222 (625) 5220/5222 (525) Line 1 to 313 Line 1 to 263 Line 314 to 625 Line 1 to 262 Line 1 to 312 Line 1 to 262 Up to 10 panel settings, Recallable All front panel controls (except REMOTE, INTEN, ROTATION, FOCUS, GAIN VAR, POWER) (NTSC) (NTSC/PAL/SECAM) All front panel controls (except INTEN, ROTATION, FOCUS, GAIN VAR, POWER) Rear panel D-sub, 15-pin (REMOTE A) D-sub, 9-pin (REMOTE B) Horizontal cursors (REF, ) Vertical cursors (REF, ) Voltage between the REF and cursors Unit: V, IRE, % 5222 (625) 5220/5222 (525) 0 to mv 0 to mv Temperature: 0 to 40 C Humidity: 90 % RH (without condensation) 90 to 250 VAC, 48 to 440 Hz 40 Wmax. 215 (W) 132 (H) 429 (D) mm, 4.2 kg Illumination lamp... 5 Screw, rack mounting (inch size) pin D-sub connector... 1 Metal case, 15-pin D-sub connector... 1 Power cord... 1 Cover, inlet stopper... 1 Screw lock... 2 E-ring... 1 Instruction manual... 1 Cabinet: LR-2427B, LR-2404A, LR-2700A-I

40 VIDEO Measurements of Composite Video Signal Amplitude, Timing, and Frequency Response 5861 only 5861V (PAL)/5860V (NTSC) WAVEFORM MONITOR GENERAL The 5861V and 5860V Waveform Monitors are oscilloscopes that are capable of quick monitoring amplitude, time and frequency response, etc. of composite TV signals, which are hard for ordinary oscilloscopes to measure. The waveform monitor is equipped with various modes and trigger functions that are optimum to video signal monitoring. Such various modes as 2H, 1H, 1 µs/div, 2V, 1V, and 2V MAG can be selected by the horizontal axis sweep. As FLAT, LUM (5861V), IRE (5860V), CHROMA, DIF GAIN and DIF'D STEP can be switched, it is possible to observe various characteristics of video signals. Furthermore, the line selector function is provided for observing VITS and VIR signals which are inserted during the vertical blanking period. In addition, the blanking output connector for blanking other periods that lines selected by the line selector, video output connector and other functions necessary for video signal monitoring are provided. 5860V FRONT PANEL FEATURES Depending on synchronization system and subcarrier frequency, the 5860V is compatible with the M system, and 5861V is compatible with the B, C, D, G, H, I, and K systems. Differentiated-step methods are used to display the differential of staircase signals to make measuring the linearity of transmission system luminance components easier. Built-in line selector function for monitoring VITS and VIR signals, a blanking output and a video output. Horizontal sweep mode selection from 2H, 1H, 1 µs/div, 2V, 1V, and 2V MAG. The frequency response of the vertical axis is switchable among FLAT, LUM (5861V), IRE (5860V), CHROMA, DIF GAIN, and DIF'D STEP. K factor scale provided for checking of frequency characteristics. 5861V REAR PANEL 40

41 VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS Model CRT Type: Accelerating Potential: Effective Display Area: Beam Rotator: Input Section Input Connector: Input Impedance: Maximum Input : Full Scale Graticule Full Scale: SYNC: VIDEO: Deflection Accuracy 1 V Full-scale Range: 4 V Full-scale Range: Within ±4 % of 1.0 scale at 4 V input Within ±4 % of 140 IRE at 4 V input Frequency Characteristics FLAT: 25 Hz to 3.6 MHz ±2 %, 3.6 MHz to 5 MHz+2 %, -5 % at 50 khz reference LUM: More than 35 db of attenuation at 4.43 Mz IRE: Conforms to IRE STD23S-1 (1958); more than 22 db of attenuation at 4.43 MHz CHROMA: 4.43 MHz bandpass filter 3.58 MHz bandpass filter Response: Within ±2 % at filter FLAT DIF GAIN: 4.43 MHz bandpass filter 3.58 MHz bandpass filter 3 to 5.5 times of CHROMA amplitude DIF'D STEP: For measuring the linearity of luminance 450 khz bandpass filter Response at filter "FLAT" 400 khz: Within ±2 % 500 khz: Within +0, -20 % 14 khz, 2 MHz: Within -90 % 3.58 MHz (5861V), 4.43 MHz (5860V): -99 % Transient Response: ±1.5 % or less in ±2 IRE or less in overshoot, preshoot, overshoot, preshoot, and ringing using the and ringing using the sin 2 pulse & bar signal sin 2 pulse & bar signal at FLAT with 1 V full at FLAT with 1 V full Sag (Vertical window signal): Variable Range: 1 V Full-scale Range: 4 V Full-scale Range: DC Regeneration: 5861V 5861V/5860V 5860V 150 mm rectangular, internal graticule with scale illumination 12 kv 80 (V) 100 (H) mm Adjustable from the front panel A and B on the rear panel (loop-through, BNC connector) 1 Vp-p full scale range: 15 kω, 50 pf 4 Vp-p full scale range: 60 kω, 50 pf ±5 V (DC+peak AC), AC coupled 1.0 scale 140 IRE 0.3 scale 40 IRE 0.7 scale 100 IRE Within ±2 % of 1.0 scale at 1 V input Within ±2 % of 140 IRE at 1 V input scale range. scale range. 2 % or less Input voltage of Input voltage of full scale IRE full scale 0.25 V or less to 1 V 1 V or less to 4 V Clamped at the back porch Model Video Output Output Connector: Output Voltage: Output Impedance: Frequency Characteristics: Sweep 1H Sweep: 2H Sweep: 1 µs/div: 1V Sweep: 2V Sweep: 2V MAG Sweep: Linearity: RGB/YRGB Display: Staircase : Maximum Input Voltage: Sweep: Sweep Line Length: Composite to YRGB: Control Signal: Control Signal: RGB and YRGB Input: External Synchronization Input Connector: Input Impedance: Input Sensitivity: Maximum Input Voltage: Line Selector Display Line: Blanking Output Output Connector: Voltage Level: Calibrator Waveform: Amplitude: Frequency: Environmental Conditions Operating: Power Requirements: Dimensions and Weight: Accessories: 5861V 5860V BNC connector on the rear panel 1 V ±15 % at full scale input 75 Ω ±10 % 25 Hz to 5 MHz ±5 % Display of 1H waveform Display of 2H waveform 10 times magnification of 2H sweep, 1 µs/div ±3 % Display of 1 V waveform Display of 2 V waveform Approx. 20 times magnification of 2V sweep ±3 % RGB is standard. (YRGB is optional.) 10 V ±15 %/9 div ±12 V (DC+peak AC) 1H display at 2H sweep 1V display at 2V sweep RGB: 30 % 3 or composite display YRGB: 22 % 4 of composite display Remote control from external or internal control signal 12 to 15 V (negative or positive), 15 ma 9-pin MT socket on the rear panel 9-pin D-sub connector (option) 2 terminals, BNC, loop-through type on the rear panel 15 kω to 5 Vp-p (Level of sync signal in composite video signal) ±8 Vp-p 13 to 22 and 325 to 14 to 21 lines of first and 334 lines second fields BNC connector on the rear panel 0 V: selected by line selector -2 V: for other duration Square waveform 1 Vp-p ±1 % 32 khz Temperature: 0 to 40 C 100, 120, 200, 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 50 Wmax. 215 (W) 132 (H) 429 (D) mm, 7.4 kg Scale illumination lamp pin MT plug... 1 Cover/lnlet stopper... 1 Screw, rack mounting(inch size)... 2 Power cord... 1 Instruction manual V WAVEFORMS DISPLAY Sweep Range Frequency Response Range 2H 1 µs/div 2V 2V MAG FLAT LUM CHROMA DIF GAIN DIF'D STEP 41

42 VIDEO Precise DG/DP Measurements with CRT Readout Three Video Inputs, One External Reference Input X-Y Display Capability, Auto Phase & Mag Burst PAT. PEND. The cabinet is sold separately. 5210/5212 VECTOR SCOPE GENERAL The Models 5210/5212 are precision Vectorscopes designed to monitor video signals. The 5210 series with its bright CRT features a vector display, DG/DP function to measure differential gain and differential phase with a line display, X-Y display mode for stereo audio signals, and menu screen for setting functions. These instruments have three video inputs and one external reference input channel. Up to four waveforms, including the external reference, can be displayed. The newly developed digital phase control ensures a phase measurement accuracy of within 1. These instruments can also be remotely controlled when combined with the 5220 series Waveform Monitor. Model Subcarrier Frequency Sync System Color system FEATURES MHz M NTSC /4.43 MHz M, B, G, H, I NTSC/PAL Three video inputs and one external reference input channel Up to four waveforms, including the external reference, can be displayed simultaneously. Digital phase control The newly developed digital phase control ensures a phase measurement accuracy of within 1 and display resolution of within 0.1 with alphanumeric readout. DG/DP measuring function These instruments enable accurate measurement of differential gain DG and differential phase DP with alphanumeric readout. X-Y display function The level and phase of stereo audio signals can be measured. Menu function For user-friendly front panel control, a menu controller is provided for various functions. Preset function The front panel settings, including vertical and horizontal positioning, can be stored in memory, and recalled from the front panel or via the remote control connector on the rear panel. Yon can reduce setup time by presetting frequently used measuring conditions. Automatic NTSC/PAL system discriminator (5212 only) The 5212 automatically selects the NTSC or PAL color system. Y/C input The C signal vector can be displayed by respectively applying the Y signal and C-signal to the CH1 and CH2 input connectors. Remote control These instruments can also be remotely controlled when combined with the 5220 series Waveform Monitor. The line selected by the waveform monitor is displayed automatically. Bright CRT, accelerating potential of 16.5 kv Universal AC power supply, 90 to 250 V 42

43 VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS 5210/5212 CRT Type: Accelerating Potential: Effective Display Area: Graticule: Input Input Channel: Input Impedance: Maximum Input Voltage: Return Loss: Isolation Between Channels: Gain Difference Between Channels: Phase Difference Between Channels: Loop-Through Isolation: Synchronization Sync Amplitude CH1, 2, 3 Video Signal: EXT Video Signal: Subcarrier: Signal Selection: Vector Mode Bandwidth Upper -3 db Point: Lower -3 db Point: Center Frequency (Fsc): Display: Phase Accuracy: Amplitude Accuracy: Digital Phase Control Phase Accuracy: Subcarrier Regeneration Pull-In Range: Pull-In Time: Phase Control Range: Phase Shift: Phase Shift: Burst Jitter: Position Variable Range Vertical Position: Horizontal Position: DG/DP Mode Measurement Accuracy DG: DP: Position Control Range Vertical Position: Horizontal Position: Auto Setup: DG Setup Accuracy: DP Setup Accuracy: X-Y Mode Input: 150 mm rectangular (P4) 16.5 kv 100 (H) 80 (V) mm Illuminated internal graticule CH1, CH2, CH3, EXT 15 kω, 75 Ω loop-through ±12 V (DC+peak AC) 40 db (50 khz to 6 MHz) 70 db (Fsc) ±0.5 % ±0.5 (Fsc) 70 db (Fsc) 5212 PAL 5210/5212 NTSC Burst, sync amplitude Burst, sync amplitude 0.3 Vp-p ±6 db Vp-p ±6 db Burst, sync amplitude Burst, sync amplitude 0.3 Vp-p ±6 db Vp-p ±6 db 2 Vp-p ±6 db Video or subcarrier, selectable 5212 PAL 5210/5212 NTSC Fsc+500 khz ±100 khz Fsc+500 khz ±100 khz Fsc-500 khz ±100 khz Fsc-500 khz ±100 khz MHz MHz Color bars 75 %, 100 % MAG mode setting OFF: Within ±1 BURST: Within ±2 5 MAG: Within ±2 OFF: Within ±3 % BURST: Within ±3 % 5 MAG: Within ±5 % Within ±0.5 Within ±150 Hz Within 1 sec 360 Within ±2 (Fsc ±50 Hz) Within ±2 (Burst amplitude ±6 db) ±0.5 At least ±8 mm from center At least ±8 mm from center Within ±0.5 % Within ±0.5 ±40 mm ±4 mm from center At least ±8 mm from center At CAL position Within ±2 % Within ±2 DC-coupled differential inputs (Balanced input) Input Impedance: 20 kω Calibration Accuracy: Within ±3 % Input Amplitude: 0 dbm to 12 dbm (600 Ω) (0.775 V to 3.1 Vrms) Maximum Input Voltage: ±12 V (DC+peak AC) Frequency Response: DC to 20 khz, 3 db X-Y Phase Difference: 1 (20 khz) Input Connector: 15-Pin D-sub connector (rear panel) V Position Control Range: At least ±8 mm from center H Position Control Range: At least ±8 mm from center GAIN GAIN Variable Range: Phase Shift by GAIN: Auto Phase Accuracy: REF SET VECT Mode: DG Mode: DP Mode: Preset Function Controllable Functions: Remote Control Combinations: Line Selection: Recall Function: Controllable Functions: Control Signal: Input Connector: CRT Readout Color System: Phase: Display Resolution: NTSC Setup: REF Channel: DG: Display Resolution: DP: Display Resolution: X-Y Display: Recall Mode: Y/C Display: Environmental Conditions Operating: Power Requirements Power Consumption: Dimensions and Weight: Accessories: Optional Accessory: 5212 REAR PANEL +3 db to -14 db or more Within ±1 (+3 db to -6 db) Burst phase is set to-(b-y) axis. Within ±2 PHASE display is set to 0.0 DG display is set to 0.00 % DP display is set to 0.00 Up to 10 panel settings All front panel controls (except INTEN, FOCUS. ROTATION, ILLUM, GAIN, VAR, POWER), and Menu (SYSTEM, DISPLAY) (NTSC) (NTSC/PAL) Full line selection capability Window display capability Available INPUT, REF, Y/C, RECALL TTL, low active D-sub, 9-pin (rear panel) NTSC/PAL (SYNC ABSENT) 0.0 to SETUP 7.5 %/SETUP 0 % CH1, CH2, CH3, EXT % to % (DG mode) 0.01 % to (DP mode) 0.01 X-Y scale is displayed (X-Y mode). Address to be recalled Y/C is displayed (Y/C mode). Temperature: 0 to 40 C Humidity: 90 % RH (without condensation) 90 to 250 VAC, 48 to 440 Hz 55 Wmax. 215 (W) 132 (H) 429 (D) mm, 4 kg Illumination lamp... 5 Screw, rack mounting (inch size) pin D-sub connector... 1 Metal case, 15-pin D-sub connector pin to 9-pin D-sub connector cable... 1 Power cord... 1 Cover, inlet stopper... 1 Screw lock... 6 E-ring... 3 Instruction manual... 1 Cabinet: LR-2427B, LR-2404A, LR-2700A-I 43

44 VIDEO Vector Display for Composite Video Signal 5851V only 5851V (PAL)/5850V (NTSC) VECTOR SCOPE GENERAL The 5851V and 5850V Vectorscope are designed to simultaneously measure the amplitude and phase of chrominance components contained in a composite video signal. To measure phase (i.e., direction with respect to burst signal) and amplitude (i.e., length from center) in vector format, the chrominance components containing color information of the video signal are first demodulated, then displayed on the CRT. VITS and VTR can also be displayed in vector format by applying blanking signal output from the waveform monitor to Z INPUT of the vectorscope. FEATURES The 150 mm rectangular CRT with internal graticule (with the scale illumination), it is possible to measure without parallax reading error. DP and DG measurements enable using the modulated staircase. Use with a waveform monitor to observe the vector VITS and VIR signals. The optional rackmount adapter enables a pattern generator, color monitor, and vectorscope to be integrated in a system. 5850V FRONT PANEL 5851V REAR PANEL 44

45 VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS Model CRT Type Accelerating Potential Effective Display Area Beam Rotator Graticule Composite Video Signal Input Input Input Impedance Max. Input Voltage Calibrated Value Blanking Input Sensitivity Polarity Chrominance Bandwidth Phase Accuracy Amplitude Accuracy Differential Phase Differential Gain 5851V 5851V/5850V 5850V 150 mm rectangular, internal graticule with scale illumination 12 kv 80 (V) 100 (H) mm Adjustable from the front panel Internal scale Allowable frame: ±20 % /±10 of standard color bar, circle, angle, U axis, V axis DG and DP, ±5 %/ ±3 of standard color bar, and ±20 %/ ±10 of burst signal A, B and EXT REF on the rear panel (loop-through, BNC connector) A, B: 2 MΩ, EXT REF: 10 kω ±5 V (DC+peak AC) Color Saturation: 75 %, 100 %, full scale Amplitude: 1 Vp-p, 1.24 Vp-p Variable Range: 0.5 to 5 times of the calibrated value EXT REF Subcarrier: 2 Vp-p ±6 db Black Burst: 0.45 Vp-p ±6 db (5851V)/ 0.43 Vp-p ±6 db (5850V) DC ±1 V Brightens With positive voltage Center: Fsc= MHz High Freq.=Fsc +500 khz Low Freq.=Fsc -500 khz ±2 ±3 % ±1 ±1 % Internal scale Allowable frame: ±20 %/ ±10 of standard color bar, circle, angle, R-Y axis, B-Y axis, I axis, Q axis, DG and DP, ±2.5 IRE/±2.5 of standard color bar, and ±20 %/ ±10 of burst signal Center: Fsc= MHz High Freq.=Fsc +500 khz Low Freq.=Fsc -500 khz Model Measurement Item Vector Measurement Horizontal Synchronization Input Sync Polarity Sync Level Range Subcarrier Signal Synchronization Synchronization by Burst Signal (of composite video signal) Sync Level Range 0.3 Vp-p ±6 db Vp-p ±6 db Synchronization by External Subcarrier Signal (which is applied to the EXT REF input) Subcarrier Signal Sync Level Range Synchronization by Black Burst Signal (which is applied to the EXT REF input) Black Burst Sync Level 0.45 Vp-p ±6 db 0.43 Vp-p ±6 db Range Note: The external subcarrier signal is switched to and from the black burst Power Requirements Dimensions and Weight Accessories 5851V 5850V Phase and amplitude of chrominance component in 75 % or 100 % saturation color bar signal Synchronization by the horizontal sync signal of composite video signal from input A or B. Negative 0.3 Vp-p ±6 db Vp-p ±6 db 2 Vp-p ±6 db signal internally. (set in black burst mode at shipment) Subcarrier Frequency Sync Capture Range MHz ±50 Hz (0 to 40 C) MHz Phase Adjustment Range 360, continuously variable Calibration Test Circle Set the chrominance signal applied from the input connector in asynchronous mode. 100, 120, 200, 240 VAC, selectable by internal wiring 50/60 Hz, 40 VA 215 (W) 132 (H) 429 (D) mm, 7.3 kg Illumination lamp... 5 Cover/Inlet stopper... 1 Screw, rack mounting (inch size)... 2 Power cord... 1 Instruction manual... 1 THE ANGLES FOR EACH HUE 5851V (PAL) 135 BURST R-Y (B-Y) B-Y BURST (R-Y)

46 VIDEO For Multi-channel Audio Signals (3-1, 3-2 types & 5.1 System) Digital Input/Analog Input Features LV 5836C SURROUND AUDIO MONITOR GENERAL The LV 5836C Surround Audio Monitor displays the sound image of multi-channel audio signals used in the 3-1/3-2 type of HDTV and 5.1 System. (Decoder is not equipped) This monitor is ideally suited for the editing applications in the mixing room of TV broadcast stations and in production studios. The sound image display of the unit is developed in cooperation with the Japan Broadcasting Corporation, NHK. FEATURES Digital signal processing The digital signal processor (DSP) enables the stable and fast measurement of the sound image, level, and phase. Sound Image Display The sound breath or locality of the multi-channel audio signal of the 3-1 and 3-2 types and Dolby digital can be observed with the sound image display. Lissajous Display The lissajous display is used to check the phase and polarity between selected two channels of the multi-channel signal. Since the multi-lissajous mode displays six lissajous simultaneously, the polarity of the multichannel signal can easily be checked. The down mixing mode makes down mixing and displays the selected two channels of the multichannel signal. Two lissajous display systems are provided; normal lissajous to display the pattern on the 0 to 90 axes, and matrix lissajous to display the pattern on the 45 axes. 46 Level Meter The digital 8 channel bargraph level meters or the analog 6 channel bargraph level meters can be displayed in full screen mode or with the sound image or lissajous. Phase Meter The phase meter can be displayed along with the sound image or lissajous.the phase meter can check the polarity of two input signals. Channel status Each digital channel status can be displayed when measuring digital input signal. Analog Input The balanced and unbalanced inputs are provided to connect various audio equipments. Digital Input The AES/EBU compatible digital input system enables direct connection of the digital audio equipments. Other Features Automatic gain controller always displays a waveform in suitable size for easy observation. Spot killer prevents CRT burn-in while no signal input. LV 5836C Rear Panel

47 VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS CRT Type: Surround Display Mode: Sound Image Display 3-1 Type: 3-2 Type: 5.1 Type: Lissajous Display: Analog: Digital: Multi-Lissajous 3-1 Type: 3-2 Type: 5.1 Type: Display axes: Multi-Level Display Analog 3-1 Type: 3-2 Type: 5.1 Type: Digital 3-1 Type: 3-2 Type: 5.1 Type: Automatic Gain Control: Operating Range: Display Gain: Variable: Spot Killer: Down Mixing 3-1 Type: 3-2 Type: 5.1 Type: Accuracy: Display: Meters: Level Meter Display Analog Reference Level: Digital Reference Level: Scale Analog Input: Digital Input: Phase Display: Rectangular, 150 mm, PDA (16 kv) 3-1, 3-2, 5.1 type, menu selectable L, C, R, S L, C, R, SL, SR L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE(S) Selected 2 channels can be displayed. L, R, C, LFE(S), SL, SR, Lm, Rm L, R, C, LFE(S), SL, SR, LL, RR, Lm, Rm L C, L R, C R, L S, S R L C, L R, C R, L SL, SL SR, SR R L C, L R, C R, L SL, SL SR, SR R (1/2) L LL, LL RR, RR R, L LFE, LFE C, LFE R (2/2) (Level and phase meters are not displayed. VARIABLE and AUTO-GAIN cannot be operated.) Matrix (sum/difference) or normal (X-Y) display, menu selectable L, R, C, LFE(S) L, R, C, SL, SR L, R, C, LFE(S), SL, SR L, R, C, LFE(S), LL, RR L, R, C, SL, SR, LL, RR L, R, C, LFE(S), SL, SR, LL, RR Level meter response is fixed to FAST. Displays waveform for optimum size 20 to +8 db (Level and phase meters are not displayed.) (Display gain and VARIABLE cannot be operated.) CAL'D, 0.5, 2, 10 ±6 db by using menu On/off, menu selectable Lm=L+0.707C+0.707S Rm=R+0.707C+0.707S Lm=L+0.707C+0.707SL Rm=R+0.707C+0.707SR Lm=L+0.707C+0.707SL Rm=R+0.707C+0.707SR Frequency response: 20 Hz to 20 khz ±1 db ±5 % On/off, menu selectable 20, 0, +4 db, menu selectable (0 db=0.775 V) 20, 18, 12 db, menu selectable LV 5836C Fast mode: 40 to +10 db Slow mode: 20 to +3 db 50 to 0 db On/off, menu selectable Indicates phase between selected two channels Meter indicates when selected channels are In-phase: + Out of phase: No relationship: 0 Channel Selector 3-1 Type: 3-2 Type: 5.1 Type: down mixed (Lm, Rm) Digital channel status display Channel Status Display: Channel Status Bit Dump: Input System Analog Balanced Input 3-1 Type: 3-2 Type: Input Connector: Input Impedance: Max. Input Voltage: Unbalanced Input 3-1 Type: 3-2 Type: Input Connector: Input Impedance: Max. Input Voltage: Digital Input Format: 3-1 Type: 3-2 Type: 5.1 Type: Input Connectors: Max. Input Voltage: Remote Control Control Input: Control Level: TTL level Environmental Conditions: Operating Temperature: Operating Humidity: Power Requirements: Power Consumptions: Dimensions & Weight: Accessories: Selects L, R, C, S and down-mixed signal (Lm=L+0.707C+0.707S, Rm=R+0.707C+0.707S) Selects L, R, C, SL, SR and down-mixed signal (Lm=L+0.707C+0.707SL, Rm=R+0.707C+0.707SR) Selects L, R, C, SL, SR, LFE, LL, RR and Displays digital audio channel status. Binary display (0-23 bytes) 4 inputs L, R, C, S 5 inputs L, R, C, SL, SR 6 inputs L, R, C, SL, SR, LFE XLR-3-32 or equivalent (male) 6 connectors L, R, C, SL. SR, LFE(S) 600 Ω/10 kω, selectable 50 V (p-p+dc): High impedance (to pin 1) +15 dbm (4.5 Vrms): 600 Ω (between pin 2 and 3) 4 inputs L, R, C, S 5 inputs L, R, C, SL, SR 6 inputs L, R, C, SL, SR, LFE Pin jack, RCA 6 pin jack L, R, C, SL, SR, LFE(S) 10 kω 50 V (p-p+dc), High impedance AES/EBU (48 khz) 4 inputs L, R, C, S 5 inputs L, R, C, SL, SR 8 inputs L, R, C, SL, SR, LFE, LL, RR BNC, 75 Ω 4 connectors L/R, C/LFE(S), SL/SR, LL/RR 12 V (p-p+dc) Display selection, sound image or lissajous Channel selection Display gain selection 10 to 40 C 90 % RH (without condensation) 90 to 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz 40 Wmax. 215 (W) 132 (H) 429 (D) mm, 5.3 kg Cover/Inlet stopper... 1 Power cord... 1 Instruction manual... 1 *"Dolby Digital" is trademark of Dolby Laboratory Licensing Corporation. Lissajous display Multi-lissajous display Multi-Level meter display Channel status display Channel status bit dump display 47

48 VIDEO Lissajous Display of Stereo Audio Signals Display with LED of Stereo Polarity Discrimination PAT.PEND 5835 STEREO AUDIO MONITOR GENERAL The 5835 is a Stereo Audio Monitor that provides a lissajous pattern display of stereo audio signal on a CRT screen, enabling monitoring of the phase and level of the signal. The lissajous pattern display of the stereo signal is provided with the left and right axes inclined at 45 degrees, enabling a good visual presentation of audio effects such as broadening and apparent position. The 5835 features a stereo polarity discrimination function, a spot killer, and two Cannon-type inputs, making it ideal for use in not only program editing. but in checking of transmission equipment as well. All this makes the 5835 a useful stereo audio monitor for broadcast studio, production studio. and recording studio or remote pickup applications as well REAR PANEL FEATURES The left and right channels are inclined at 45 degrees on the CRT display, not only enabling monitoring of level and phase, but providing a visual display of such audio signal phenomena as spread and positioning. Instant calibration of centering, rotation, and gain, using cross calibration (patent pending). Parallel-connected male and female type XLR Cannon connectors are provided as standard for the balanced input configuration, enabling direct monitoring of the lines required in broadcast studio, production studio, recording studio, and remote pickup application. A LED monitor has been used to implement a stereo phase display, thereby simplifying the task of checking the phase of a stereo signal during editing of commercial tapes, and When monitoring a broadcast output signal. When the voice signal goes out of phase, a yellow LED lights and remains lighted for at least 5 seconds, even if the voice signal is short. The Model 5835 is housed in an standard EIA half-rack size cabinet, simplifying rack mounting and use in systems in combination with other equipment. A 150 mm post-acceleration (12-kV/2-kV) type CRT ensure a bright display. A spot killer blanks the trace with no signal applied to prevent burn-in of the CRT phosphor. The scale-illumination lamp can be replaced easily from the top front panel. 48

49 VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS 5835 CRT Display Type: Accelerating Potential: Scale Illumination: Beam Rotation: Scales: X and Y-Axis Display modes: Input 1 Balanced input: Input 2 Unbalanced input: Input impedance: Input withstand Voltage: Gain adjustment: Full-scale input: Calibration accuracy: Frequency response: Phase flatness: Stereo polarity: LED hold time: Operating frequency: External output: Calibration: 6-inch, Rectangular 12 kv/2 kv (Post accelerator) Provided Adjustable from the front panel External Sum/difference Y axis: (L+R) X axis: (L-R) (X-Y display is possible using an internal switch, with left and right assigned to the Y and X axes, respectively.) Double left and double right inputs Cannon connectors: XLR-3-31 XLR-3-32 (1:ground, 2:hot, 3:cold) (2:cold, 3:hot connection is possible by changing an internal connector.) Input impedance: 20 kω min. (changeable to 600 Ω by means of an internal switch) Input withstand Voltage: 50 V(p-p + DC) (with respect to pin 1 ground) Caution: With a 600-Ω termination, do not apply inputs exceeding +15 dbm(4.5 Vrms). Double left and double right inputs (RCA-type connector) 20 kω min. 50 V(p-p + DC) Range: -20 db, 0 db, +10 db Variable: Continuously variable approx. ±10 db With 775 mvrms applied to left and right channels, a full-scale screen display is seen (with VARIABLE set to CAL D and RANGE set to 0 db). ±3 % 20 Hz to 20 khz: ±0.5 db 20 Hz to 20 khz: ±1 When the stereo signal goes out of phase, a yellow LED lights to indicate the incorrect condition. Approx. 5 s min. 200 Hz to 500 Hz(when the screen display amplitude is greater than approximately 1.5 divisions). Open-collector configuration Max:35 V, 50 ma, 200 mw On for reversed polarity (rear-panel BNC connector) 775 mvrms(0 db), 1 khz With the RANGE set to CAL, a 1-kHz sinusoidal signal is applied to both left and right channels, enabling ROTATION and POSITION adjustment and checking of the gain. Z Axis Spot killer: amplitude of approximately 1 division). Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature: Operating Humidity: Operating Environment: Operating Altitude: Overvoltage Category: Pollution Degree: Power Requirements: Power Consumption: Dimensions: Weight: Accessories: When no signal in input, the spot is blanked (operates at below a displayed 0 to 40 C 90 % RH (without condensation) Indoor use up to 2000 m II 2 100/120/220/240 VAC (selected by an internal tap) 35 Wmax. 215 (W) 132 (H) 429 (D) mm Approx. 7 kg Scale filter (for X-Y)... 1 Spare illumination lamps... 2 rack mounting screws... 2 Power cord... 1 Cover/Inlet stopper... 1 Instruction manual

50 VIDEO Various plug-in units expand the capability of the Multiformat Signal Generator. LT 443D MULTIFORMAT VIDEO GENERATOR MAINFRAME GENERAL The LT 443D Signal Generator can be flexibly used for the multiformat digital broadcast systems. Various plug-in units enable the output of SDI signals (i.e., HDTV, SDTV), sync signals, and analog signals. By using these signals and genlock functions, users can customize this signal generator as desired. FEATURES Plug-in units provide various functions Since up to four plug-in units can be installed in the mainframe (consisting of a power supply, main signal generator, and controller), users can customize this signal generator as desired. *1 The plug-in unit is installed at the factory; user cannot replace the unit. Applicable to multiformat HDTV For the SDI signals, HDTV 14 format unit and 525 line/ 625 line SDTV unit are provided. The NTSC/PAL analog video signal unit is also available. Since each unit can output the signal simultaneously, a multiformat system can be constructed to satisfy user's requirements. Various sync output Two units can simultaneously output HD signals with MHz clock and 74.25/1.001 MHz clock. Easy-to-use sync signals For today's modern age of digital TV systems, BB signal (for NTSC/PAL) and HDTV tri-level sync signals can be generated from the Analog BB Unit. Ethernet provided Since the ethernet capability is provided as standard. This feature can remotely control various functions and monitor he genlock status. User-friendly operability Leader's traditional design and operability concepts are also reflected in this instrument. User-friendly operation includes significantly reduced power-on initialization time is advantageous to a high-performance instrument. Reading logo mark data OPTION LT 443D-70 (NATURAL Picture Memory: Option 70) This option adds the NATURAL picture pattern output capability to the LT 443D mainframe. A compact flash memory card is used as an additional memory to store the NATURAL picture pattern. 50 SPECIFICATIONS Compartment Number of compartments: ID Function : LCD Panel Number of Characters: Internal Clock Internal Reference Frequency: Memory Card Slot Applicable Card: Function: External Interface Ethernet: USB (Universal Serial Bus): 10Base-T/100 Base-T (Automatic selection) Applicable to USB 1.1 This function will be supported Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature Range: Operating Humidity Range: Operating Environment: Operating Altitude: Overvoltage Category: Pollution Degree: Power Requirements: Power Consumption: Dimensions and Weight: Accessories: 4 Automatically identifies the unit installed. *2 Refer to specifications of each unit. 20 characters x 2 lines can be displayed (W/backlight) 27 MHz Compact flash memory card (CFA TYPE-1) *3 Storing/reading preset data Reading logo mark data (This function will be supported.) Reading NATURAL PICTURE data *4 *3 No compact flash memory card is supplied as standard accessory. Memory cards produced by following manufacturers should be procured (as of August 2002):SanDisk *4 The NATURAL picture function is only usable when the LT 443D-70 Option is installed in the mainframe. 0 to 40 C 90% RH (without condensation) Indoor use Up to 2000 m II 2 90 to 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz Approx. 75 W max. *5 426 (W) x 44 (H) x 560 (D) mm, Approx. 7 kg *5 *5 When four plug-in units (i.e., LT 443D-HD, LT 443D-SD, LT 443D-BL, LT 443D-GL) are installed. Power cord... 1 Cover/Inlet stopper... 1 UNIT BLANK PANEL(LT-443D-UB)... 3 Rack support(right and Left)... 1 set Screw (for rack support)... 4 About rubber Feet... 5 Instruction manual... 1 Logo Mark Software CD-R... 1

51 Diversified Units for Various Applications VIDEO LT 443D-GLA GENLOCK UNIT This unit provides genlock capability to lock the LT 443D mainframe with the external reference signal, and three independent black signal generators. The NTSC/PAL black burst signals, principal 20 types of HDTV analog tri-level sync signal formats, and 525p/625p analog sync signals can be used as an external reference signal. The following black burst signal formats can be selected. For NTSC/PAL system, black burst signal with field reference pulse is provided. For NTSC system, black burst with 10-field sequence identification conforming to the SMPTE 318M standards is provided. The instrument continues operation since the flywheel mode is provided even if the external reference signal is accidentally removed in genlock mode. By logging the genlock status, the time can be obtained when the external reference signal is removed. The log information can be stored on the CF CARD. Plug-In Unit for LT 443D The genlock timing can be adjusted for the entire color frame range when the NTSC/PAL black burst signal is applied; entire frame range when the HDTV analog tri-level sync signal is applied. Three black burst signal output systems with selectable formats are available as follows: For NTSC/PAL system, standard black burst signal and black burst signal with field reference pulse are provided. For NTSC system, 10-field black burst signal with ID conforming to the SMPTE 318M standards, 525p/625p analog sync signal, and HDTV analog tri-level sync signal are provided. The format and output signal timing of each output can be respectively set. The black signal timing can be adjusted for the entire color frame range when the NTSC/PAL black burst signal is applied; entire frame range when the HDTV analog tri-level sync signal is applied. SPECIFICATIONS Genlock Function Loop-Through Input Input Configuration: Return Loss: Reference Input Signal: Reference Input Signal Level HDTV: 525p/625p: NTSC: PAL: Operation Modes: Positive polarity: 300 mv Negative polarity: -300 mv -300 mv -286 mv -300 mv AUTO and MANUAL modes are provided for selecting INT or EXT mode. Genlock Timing Variable Range H-PHASE (FINE): Fine adjustment between the H-PHASE (COARSE) steps. H-PHASE (COARSE): ±1/2 line with respect to the input signal V-PHASE: ±1 frame with respect to the input signal F-PHASE: Up to ±5 frames with respect to the input signal. (Variable range depends on the input signal format.) Analog Sync Signal Output BLACK 1/BLACK 2/BLACK 3 Output Format: BNC connector, 75 Ω loop-through 30 db (0.3 MHz to 30 MHz) HDTV tri-level sync signal conforming to SMPTE 240M/274M/296M standards 525p/625p analog sync signal conforming to SMPTE 293M/ITU-R BT 1358 standards NTSC black burst signal conforming to EBU N14/SMPTE RP-154/SMPTE 170M/SMPTE 318M standards PAL black burst signal conforming to ITU-R BT standards HDTV tri-level sync signal conforming to SMPTE 240M/274M/296M standards 525p/625p analog sync signal conforming to SMPTE 293M/ITU-R BT 1358 standards Sync Level (into 75 Ω) HDTV: 525p: 625p: NTSC: PAL: Rise and fall times HDTV: 525p: 625p: NTSC: PAL: Horizontal Sync Width 1125-Line Format: 750-Line Format: 525p: 625p: NTSC/PAL: Vertical Sync Width: Output Connector: Number of Outputs: Timing Variable Range H-PHASE: V-PHASE: F-PHASE: NTSC black burst signal conforming to EBU N14/SMPTE RP-154/SMPTE 170M/SMPTE 318M standards PAL black burst signal conforming to ITU-R BT standards Positive polarity: 300 mv ±6 mv Negative polarity: -300 mv ±6 mv -300 mv ±6 mv -300 mv ±6 mv 40 IRE ±1 IRE -300 mv ±6 mv 54 ns ±20 ns 70 ns ±10 ns 100 ns ±10 ns 140 ns ±10 ns 200 ns ±10 ns Positive polarity: 593 ns ±40 ns Negative polarity: 593 ns ±40 ns Positive polarity: 539 ns ±40 ns Negative polarity: 539 ns ±40 ns 2.35 µs ±0.05 µs 2.35 µs ±0.1 µs 4.7 µs ±0.1 µs 5H (HDTV) / 6H (525p) / 5H (625p) / 3H (NTSC) / 2.5H (PAL) BNC 1 each Up to ±1 line-1 dot Up to ±1 frame-1 line Up to ±5 frames (depends on the input signal format.) LT 443D-HD HD-SDI UNIT/LT 443D-HDB(HD-SDI Out x 2, HD-SDI Black Out x 2)UNIT Plug-In Unit for LT 443D The LT 443D-HD HD-SDI Unit adds the 14 format HD-SDI signal output capability to the LT 443D mainframe. Various functions (e.g., ID character, simple motion pictures, embedded audio, NATURAL picture pattern*) are provided. *The NATURAL picture function is only usable when the LT 443D- 70 Option is installed in the mainframe. SPECIFICATIONS Output HD-SDI Video Output: Specifications Specifications: SDI Characteristics Bit Rate: Output Amplitude: Overshoot: Rise and Fall Time: Return Loss: Function Applicable Format: Test Patterns: 1 system, 2 outputs (75 Ω, BNC) Conforms to SMPTE 240M/274M/296M standards Gbps, 1.485/1.001 Gbps 800 mvp-p ±10% 10 % 270 ps (20 % to 80 %) 15 db (5 MHz to MHz) 10 db (742.5 MHz to GHz) 1035i/60, 1035i/59.94, 1080i/60, 1080i/59.94, 1080i/50, 1080p/30, 1080p/29.97, 1080p/25, 1080p/24, 1080p/23.98, 1080PsF/24, 1080PsF/23.98, 720p/60, 720p/59.94 The following formats will be supported: 720p/29.97, 720p/24, 720p/23.98, 720p/50, 720p/30, 720p/25 COLOR BAR 100 %, COLOR BAR 75 %, MULTIFORMAT COLOR BAR (ARIB STD-B28) FLAT FIELD 100 %, FLAT FIELD 50 %, FLAT FIELD 0 %, LINE SWEEP 100 %, MULTI BURST 100 %, BOWTIE 100 %, RAMP, SHALLOW RAMP, 10 STEP, PULSE & BAR, CHECK FIELD, RED RASTER 100 %, CROSS & DOT, MONOSCOPE 51 Variable Timing Variable Range: Variable In V: H: Entire frame range Line steps Clock steps (74.25 MHz or 74.25/1.001 MHz) Simple Motion Picture Mode (Scroll) Direction: 8 directions (vertical, horizontal, diagonal) Speed (Range, Resolution) Field Frame Interlace: Variable in field steps V Interlace: 0 to 256 lines in 2 line steps H Common: 0 to 256 dots in 4 dot steps ID Character: ID characters can be displayed at the arbitrary position on the screen. Embedded Audio Number of Channels Embedded: Sampling Frequency: Resolution: Preemphasis: Frame Number: Frequency: Level: 8 channels (4 channels x 2 groups) Each group can be set ON/OFF 48 khz (sync to video signal) 20 bits, 24 bits, selectable OFF, 50/15 µs, CCITT, selectable (CS bit is only selected.) None 50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 750, 800, 1.0 k, 1.2 k, 1.5 k, 1.6 k, 2.0 k, 2.4 k, 3.0 k, 3.2 k, 4.0 k, 4.8 k, 5.0 k, 6.0 k, 8.0 k, 9.6 k, 10 k, 12 k, 15 k, 16 k, 20 khz, silence -60 to 0 dbfs (settable in 1 db steps) *Frequency, level, and audio click can be set to each channel. *When the CHECK FIELD pattern is selected, no audio signal is embedded.

52 VIDEO LT 443D-BL ANALOG BLACK UNIT SPECIFICATIONS Analog Sync Signal Output BLACK 1, 2/BLACK 3, 4/BLACK 5, 6: Format: Sync Level (into 75 Ω) HDTV: 525p: 625p: NTSC: PAL: Rise and fall times HDTV: 525p Diversified Units for Various Applications The LT 443D-BL Analog Black Signal Unit adds the 20 format HDTV analog tri-level sync signal, 525p/625p analog sync signals, and NTSC/ PAL black burst signals output capability to the LT 443D mainframe. Three independent output systems (six outputs, two outputs per system) are provided to output multiformat black sync signal. The format and output signal timing can be respectively set each output. HDTV tri-level sync signal conforming to SMPTE 240M/274M/296M standards 525p/625p analog sync signal conforming to SMPTE 293M/ITU-R BT 1358 standards NTSC black burst signal conforming to SMPTE RP- 154/SMPTE 170M/SMPTE 318M standards PAL black burst signal conforming to ITU-R BT standards Positive polarity: 300 mv ±6 mv Negative polarity: -300 mv ±6 mv -300 mv ±6 mv -300 mv ±6 mv 40 IRE ±1 IRE -300 mv ±6 mv 54 ns ±20 ns 70 ns ±10 ns 625p: NTSC: PAL: Horizontal Sync Width 1125-Line: 750-Line: 525p: 625p: NTSC/PAL: Vertical Sync Width: Output Connector: Number of Outputs: Timing Variable Range H-PHASE: V-PHASE: F-PHASE: Plug-In Unit for LT 443D The ten-field black signal with ID conforming to the SMPTE 318M standards is also available. The entire range of timing can be set for the 525p/625p analog sync signals and NTSC/PAL black burst signals in 54 MHz clock steps. The entire range of timing can also be set for the HDTV analog tri-level sync signal in MHz or 74.25/1.001 MHz clock steps. 100 ns ±10 ns 140 ns ±10 ns 200 ns ±10 ns Positive polarity: 593 ns ±40 ns Negative polarity: 593 ns ±40 ns Positive polarity: 539 ns ±40 ns Negative polarity: 539 ns ±40 ns 2.35 µs ±0.05 µs 2.35 µs ±0.05 µs 4.7 µs ±0.1 µs 5H (HDTV) / 6 H (525p) / 5H (625p) / 3H (NTSC) / 2.5H (PAL) BNC (BLACK 1, 2/BLACK 3, 4/BLACK 5, 6) 2 each Up to ±1 line-1 dot Up to ±1 frame-1 line Up to ±5 frames (depends on the input signal format.) LT 443D-SD SD-SDI UNIT/LT 443D-SDB(SD-SDI Out x 2, SD-SDI Black Out x 2)UNIT Plug-In Unit for LT 443D The LT 443D-SD SD-SDI Unit adds the 525/625 line format SD- SDI signal (4:2:2 component signal) output capability to the LT 443D mainframe. Various functions (e.g., ID character, simple motion pictures, embedded audio, NATURAL picture pattern*) are provided. *1: The NATURAL picture function is only usable when the LT 443D-70 Option is installed in the mainframe. SPECIFICATIONS Output SD-SDI Video Output: Specifications Specifications: SDI Characteristics Bit Rate: Output Amplitude: Overshoot: Rise and Fall Time: Return Loss: Function Applicable Format: Test Patterns: Variable Timing Variable Range: Variable In V: H: 1 system, 2 outputs (75 Ω, BNC) Conforms to ITU-R BT. 601, SMPTE 125M standards Conforms to ITU-R BT. 656, SMPTE 259M standards 270 Mbps 800 mvp-p ±10 % 10 % 0.4 to 1.5 ns (20 % to 80 %) 15 db (5 MHz to 270 MHz) 525i/ MHz, 625i/ MHz COLOR BAR 100%, COLOR BAR 75%, EBU COLOR BAR, BBC COLOR BAR, SMPTE COLOR BAR, RAMP & COLOR, FLAT FIELD 100%, FLAT FIELD 50%, FLAT FIELD 0%, FIELD ID, CROSSHATCH, LINE SWEEP 100%, LINE SWEEP 60%, MULTIBURST 100%, MULTIBURST 60%, OVER SIZE RAMP, DIGITAL LIMIT RAMP, SHALLOW RAMP, 10 STEP, CHECK FIELD, MONOSCOPE, BOWTIE 100%, PULSE & BAR, RED RASTER, MULTIPULSE Entire frame range Line steps Clock steps (27 MHz) Simple Motion Picture Mode (Scroll) Direction: 8 directions (vertical, horizontal, diagonal) Speed (Range, Resolution) Field Frame: Variable in field steps V: 0 to 256 lines in 2 line steps H: 0 to 256 dots in 4 dot steps ID Characters Number of Characters: Up to 20 Size: 32 x 32 dots, 64 x 64 dots, selectable Embedded Audio Number of Channels Embedded: Sampling Frequency: Resolution: Preemphasis: Frame Number: Frequency: Level: 8 channels (4 channels x 2 groups) Each group can be set ON/OFF respectively. 48 khz (sync to video signal) 20 bits, 24 bits, selectable OFF, 50/15 µs, CCITT, selectable(cs bit is only selected.) ON/OFF, selectable 50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 750, 800, 1.0 k, 1.2 k, 1.5 k, 1.6 k, 2.0 k, 2.4 k, 3.0 k, 3.2 k, 4.0 k, 4.8 k, 5.0 k, 6.0 k, 8.0 k, 9.6 k, 10 k, 12 k, 15 k, 16 k, 20 khz, silence -60 to 0 dbfs (settable in 1 db steps) *Frequency, level, and audio click can be set to each channel. *When the CHECK FIELD pattern is selected, no audio signal is embedded. LT 443D-AA ANALOG AUDIO UNIT SPECIFICATIONS Output Number of Outputs: Output Impedance: Output Amplitude: Output Amplitude Accuracy: Output Amplitude Flatness: Installing the LT 443D-AA Analog Audio Unit in the LT 443D mainframe can output analog audio signal (two systems). Output characteristics (e.g., output level, frequency) can be independently set for each output system. The sound sampling frequency is synchronized with the video signal of plug-in unit installed in the mainframe Ω, balanced Vrms (into 600 Ω at 0 dbm) ±0.5 db (at 1 khz) ±0.5 db (1 khz ref.) 52 Output Connector: Function Sampling Frequency: Frequency: Level: XLR-3P x 2 Plug-In Unit for LT 443D 48 khz (Sync to video signal) 50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 750, 800, 1.0 k, 1.2 k, 1.5 k, 1.6 k, 2.0 k, 2.4 k, 3.0 k, 3.2 k, 4.0 k, 4.8 k, 5.0 k, 6.0 k, 8.0 k, 9.6 k, 10 k, 12 k, 15 k, 16 k, 20 khz, silence -40 to 4 dbm (settable in 1 dbm steps)

53 Diversified Units for Various Applications VIDEO LT 443D-DA DIGITAL AUDIO UNIT Installing the LT 443D-DA Digital Audio Unit in the LT 443D mainframe can output AES/EBU digital audio signals (four systems), silence signals (one system), and 48 khz word clock signals. Plug-In Unit for LT 443D The AES/EBU signal characteristics (e.g., output level, frequency) can be independently set for each output system. The sampling frequency is synchronized with the video signal of plug-in unit installed in the mainframe. SPECIFICATIONS Output AES/EBU Digital Audio Output Number of Outputs: 4 (2-channel output) Output Amplitude: 1 Vp-p ±0.1 V (into 75 Ω) Output Connector: BNC Silence Signal (DARS grade 2) Output Number of Outputs: Output Amplitude: Output Connector: 48 khz Word Clock Number of Outputs: Output Amplitude: Output Connector: Signal Specifications Specifications: Function Sampling Frequency: 1 (2-channel output) 1 Vp-p ±0.1 V (into 75 Ω) BNC 1 1 Vp-p ±0.1 V (into 75 Ω), 5 V CMOS, selectable BNC ANSI S4.40 (AES3-1992), AES SMPTE 276M, AES-3id khz (sync to video signal) Resolution: Preemphasis: Frequency: Level: Audio Click: Output ON/OFF: Timing Variable Range: 20 bits, 24 bits, selectable OFF, 50/15 µs, CCITT, selectable (CS bit can only be selected.) 50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 750, 800, 1.0 k, 1.2 k, 1.5 k, 1.6 k, 2.0 k, 2.4 k, 3.0 k, 3.2 k, 4.0 k, 4.8 k, 5.0 k, 6.0 k, 8.0 k, 9.6 k, 10 k, 12 k, 15 k, 16 k, 20 khz, silence -60 to 0 dbfs (settable in 1 db steps) 1, 2, 3, 4 sec, none Selectable ±1 AES/EBU frame Settable in 512 fs ( MHz) steps *The timing can be varied with respect to the Video Unit installed in the LT 443D mainframe. The setting s are common to the digital audio, silence and word clock signals. *Frequency, level, and audio click can be set to each channel. Other items (except timing) can be respectively set to the 2-channel output. LT 443D-CS ANALOG COMPOSITE UNIT Plug-In Unit for LT 443D The LT 443D-CS Analog Composite Unit adds the NTSC/PAL analog composite signal output capability to the LT 443D mainframe. Various functions (e.g., ID character, simple motion pictures, NATURAL picture pattern *1) are provided. *1: The NATURAL picture function is only usable when the Option LT 443D-70 is installed in the mainframe. SPECIFICATIONS Test Signal Output Format: Pattern: NATURAL Picture *4 *2 : APL MODE: Time Interval: ID Character Number of Characters: Size: Display Position: Blinking: Simple Motion Picture Function Direction: Speed: NTSC, NTSC+REFERENCE *2, NTSC+ID *3, NTSC+REFERENCE+ID *2 *3, NTSC+SETUP, NTSC+SETUP+REF *2, NTSC+SETUP+ID *3, NTSC+SETUP+REF+ID *2 *3, PAL *4, PAL+REFERENCE *4 *2 *2 REFERENCE and REF denote Field Reference. *3 ID denotes 10 field ID. *4 The 25-Hz offset subcarrier is used for the PAL system. COLOR BAR 100%, COLOR BAR 75%, EBU COLOR BAR, BBC COLOR BAR, SMPTE COLOR BAR, FLAT FIELD 100%, FLAT FIELD 50%, FLAT FIELD 0%, CROSSHATCH 1, CROSSHATCH 2, LINE SWEEP 100%, LINE SWEEP 60%, MULTIBURST 100%, MULTIBURST 60%, SHALLOW RAMP, 10 STEP, MOD 10 STEP, RAMP, MOD RAMP, MONOSCOPE, RED RASTER, WINDOW, PULSE & BAR Up to five screens of 24-bit full color BMP file can be simultaneously switched. APL OFF, APL HIGH, APL LOW, APL(BOUNCE), BOUNCE APL (BOUNCE) is switched at a preset time interval for APL HIGH and APL LOW. BOUNCE is switched at a preset time interval for FLAT FIELD 100 % and FLAT FIELD 0 %. 1 to 20 seconds (settable in one second steps) Up to x 32 dots, 64 x64 dots, selectable Arbitrary position on the screen. OFF, 1 to 10 seconds (settable in one second steps) 8 directions (up, down, left, right, and combinations) H: 0 to 256 dots in 4 dot steps V: 0 to 256 lines in 2 line steps (Pattern can be scrolled in field time steps.) *5 The Option LT 443D-70 should be installed in the mainframe to enable this function. Timing Variable: H-PHASE: V-PHASE: F-PHASE: Number of Outputs: Black Signal Output format: Output Signal: Format: Timing Variable H-PHASE: V-PHASE: F-PHASE: Number of Outputs: Signal Level: Horizontal Drive Pulse Output Format: Signal Level: Signal Polarity: Timing Variable H-PHASE: Number of Outputs: Vertical Drive Pulse Output Format: Signal Level: Signal Polarity: Timing Variable V-PHASE: Number of Outputs: The timing of OUTPUT 1 and 2 can be varied simultaneously. Up to ±1 line-1 dot Up to ±1 frame-1 line NTSC:Up to ±5 frames PAL: UP to ±2 frames 2 Depends on the test signal format. (Supports the field Reference and 10 field ID) Analog black burst The timing of OUTPUT 1 and 2 can be varied simultaneously. Up to ±1 line-1 dot Up to ±1 frame-1 line NTSC:Up to ±5 frames PAL: UP to ±2 frames 2 Systems (one each) 1 Vp-p(into 75 Ω) Depends on the test signal format. 2 Vp-p (into 75 Ω) Negative Up to ±1 line-1 dot 1 Depends on the test signal format. 2 Vp-p (into 75 Ω) Negative Up to ±1 frame-1 line 1 53

54 VIDEO Applicable to both HD-SDI and SD-SDI systems, 1U half-rack size LT 4400 MULTIFORMAT VIDEO GENERATOR GENERAL The 1U half-rack sized compact LT 4400 Multiformat Video Generator applicable to both HD-SDI and SD- SDI systems outputs SDI video signals. The various output capabilities are provided: color bar, SDI check field test pattern, ID characters, logomark in QVGA size, safety-area marker, superimposing embedded audio, genlock mode to synchronize external reference signal, and three independent analog black signal systems. FEATURES Applicable to both HD-SDI and SD-SDI systems Applicable to both HDTV (18 types of HDTV formats) and SDTV (525i/59.94, 625i/50) systems. The HDTV or SDTV can be selected. Superimposing ID characters The ID characters can be superimposed at the arbitrary position on the screen. The character blinks to indicate the freeze status. Superimposing logomark The logomark up to 320 (dot) x 240 (line) in QVGA size can be superimposed at the arbitrary position on the screen. The logomark is converted from the bit map to four-grade monochrome data. Safety-area marker The 90 % and 80 % safety-area markers can be superimposed on the screen. The 4:3 aspect-ratio marker can also be superimposed in HDTV format. Superimposing embedded audio The 16 channels of embedded audio signals (4 channels x 4 groups) can be superimposed. The frequency and level can be respectively set to each channel. Genlock mode This instrument can be locked by the NTSC/PAL black burst signals and HDTV tri-level sync signal for variable the timing. The NTSC/PAL black burst signals with field reference pulse signal, and NTSC/PAL black burst signal with 10-field ID are also applicable. Stay-in sync function This function ensures the stable operation in genlock mode even when the external reference signal is accidentally intermitted. Analog black signal output Three independent analog black signal output systems are provided. The black burst signal with the same format as the SDI output, or HDTV tri-level sync signal with the same format of clock frequency can be selected for variable the timing. The NTSC/PAL black burst signals with field reference pulse signal, and NTSC black burst signal with 10-field ID are also applicable. Pattern scroll (Simple motion picture mode) The simple motion picture mode is provided to scroll the pattern. Word clock output The 48 khz word clock output is provided to synchronize the audio signal. Applicable to SNMP The network system can easily be constructed since this instrument supports SNMP. (Not available currently) OPTION OP 70: FULL SIZE LOGO Option (factory option) Applicable to the LOGO MARK of a full screen. The Logo Mark of ull screen size (up to 1920 x 1080 dot) can be displayed. 54

55 VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS LT 4400 SDI Output Number of Outputs: Conform To HDTV: SDTV: 1 system, 2 outputs (75 Ω, BNC) HD-SDI/SD- SDI, selectable SMPTE 274M, SMPTE 296M, SMPTE 292M (except return loss) ITU-R BT 601, SMPTE 125M ITU-R BT 656, SMPTE 259M Applicable Format HDTV: 1080i/60, 1080i/59.94, 1080i/50, 1080p/30, 1080p/ 29.97, 1080p/25, 1080p/24, 1080p/23.98, 1080PsF/ 24, 1080PsF/23.98, 720p/60, 720p/59.94, 720p/50, 720p/30, 720p/29.97, 720p/25, 720p/24, 720p/ SDTV: Timing Variable Variable Range: Resolution: 525i/ MHz, 625i/ MHz Entire frame range V: Settable in line steps H: Settable in clock steps (74.25 MHz, 74.25/1.001 MHz, 27 MHz) Test Patterns HDTV: COLOR BAR 100 %, COLOR BAR 75 %, MULTIFORMAT COLOR BAR (ARIB STD-B28:75 % White, 100 % White, and + I signal, selectable), CHECK FIELD SDTV: COLOR BAR 100 % (applicable to both 525i/59.94, 625i/50), COLOR BAR 75 %, SMPTE COLOR BAR (applicable to 525i/59.94), EBU COLOR BAR/BBC COLOR BAR (applicable to 625i/50), CHECK FIELD (applicable to both 525i/59.94, 625i/50) Safety Area Marker HDTV: Action safety area (90 %), Title safety area (80 %) 4:3 aspect ratio Selectable ON/OFF individually SDTV: Action safety area (90 %), Title safety area (80 %) Selectable ON/OFF individually ID Characters Number of Characters: Up to 20 characters Size HDTV: 32x32/64x64/128x128 dots selectable SDTV: 32x32/64x64 dots selectable Display Position: Displays at an arbitrary position on the screen. Freeze Confirmation Display: Blinking OFF, 1 to 10 seconds Logo Mark Logo Mark Data: 4-level monochrome data between 0 and 3 Maximum Size: 320(dot) x 240(line) (QVGA size) Display Position: Displays at an arbitrary position on the screen Display Level: Set arbitrary levels for levels 0 to 3 Display Method: Simultaneous display with the ID character File Format Before Conversion: 24-bit full-color bitmap data (.bmp) format After Conversion: LT 4400/LT 443D dedicated (.lg) format Conversion Color Matrix: Y = 0.212*R *G *B Converts 256-level monochrome data(y) to four levels (level 0 to 3) using arbitrary threshold values. Conversion Method: Converted using the logo mark conversion application. Transferring the Logo Mark Data: Saves the data to a commercially sold Compact Flash card and inserts it to the LT *The data loaded from CF card to the LT 4400 cannot be held when the power is turned OFF. Pattern Scroll (Simple Motion Picture Mode) Direction: 8 directions (vertical, horizontal, diagonal) Speed (Range, Resolution) Field and Frame Interlace: Variable in field steps Others: Variable in frame steps V Interlace: 0 to 256 lines in 2 line steps Others: 0 to 256 lines in 1 line steps H Common: 0 to 256 dots in 4 line steps Embedded Audio Number of Channels Embedded: 16 Channels (4ch x 4group). Each group can be set ON/OFF Sampling Frequency: 48 khz (sync to video signal) Resolution: 20 bits, 24 bits, selectable Preemphasis: OFF, 50/15 µs, CCITT, selectable (CS bit can only be selected) Frame Number: ON, OFF, selectable Frequency: 400 Hz /800 Hz /1 khz, selectable (sets to each channel) Level: Can be selected including silence (sets to each channel) -60 to 0 dbfs (settable in 1 dbfs steps) Audio Click: 1 sec/2 sec/3 sec/4 sec/off (sets to each channel) * When the CHECK FIELD pattern is selected, no audio signal is embedded. * In the SDTV format, resolution becomes 20 bits when the 16ch is output. Genlock Function Reference Input Signal Input Configuration: BNC (75 Ω, loop through) Input Signal NTSC black burst signal: EBU N14/SMPTE RP154/SMPTE 170M/SMPTE 318M PAL black burst signal: ITU-R BT HDTV tri-level sync signal: SMPTE 274M, SMPTE 296M Sync Level NTSC black burst signal: -286 mv PAL black burst signal: -300 mv HDTV tri-level sync signal: ±300 mv Maximum Input Level: ± 4.5 V (DC + peak AC) Operating Input Level Range: ± 6 db External Lock Range: ± 10 ppm Jitter Burst Lock Mode: 0.5 Sync Lock Mode: 1 ns Operation Modes INTERNAL: Internal reference signal is used for operation. (INT mode) AUTO (GO INTERNAL): The EXT is automatically selected when the external reference signal is applied to the GENLOCK input. The INT mode is automatically selected when the external reference signal is removed. MANUAL (GO INT): The EXT mode is automatically selected when the external reference signal with the same format specified to the GENLOCK input is applied after power is turned on. The INT mode is automatically selected when no external reference signal is applied to the GENLOCK input or signal format does not match the specified format. AUTO (STAYinSYNC): The EXT mode is automatically selected when the external reference signal is applied to the GENLOCK input after power is turned on. If the external reference signal is accidentally removed during operation, the instrument continues operation under the conditions immediately before the signal is removed since STAYinSYNC mode is provided. After the external reference signal is recovered, the system is automatically locked. MANUAL (STAYinSYNC): The EXT mode is automatically selected when the external reference signal with the same format specified to the GENLOCK input is applied after power is turned on. If the external reference signal is accidentally removed during operation, the instrument continues operation under the conditions immediately before the signal is removed since STAYinSYNC mode is provided. The STAYinSYNC mode will be held until the reset operation is performed via the front panel even after the external reference signal is recovered. Genlock Timing Variable Range NTSC black burst signal: ± 5 frames PAL black burst signal: ± 2 frames HDTV tri-level sync signal: 1 frame (entire frame range) Resolution H: µs steps (13.5 MHz clock steps) V: 1 line steps F: 1 frame steps Reference Point (at the time of the black burst input) NTSC: The phase coincident point of line 4 of the NTSC PAL: and line 1 of the HDTV The phase coincident point of line 1 of the PAL and line 1 of the HDTV Analog Sync Signal Output Format NTSC black burst signal: EBU N14, SMPTE RP154, SMPTE 170M, SMPTE 318M HDTV tri-level sync: Output Signal Number of Outputs: Setting Output Format: Output Connector Output Impedance: 75 Ω Output Connector: BNC Output Timing Setting: Variable Range NTSC black burst signal: ± 5 frames PAL black burst signal: ± 2 frames SMPTE 274M, SMPTE 296M 6 Outputs (three output systems which equip with two connectors each) Settable Three systems can be set individually. HDTV tri-level sync: 1 frame (entire frame range) Setting Resolution NTSC black burst signal: µs steps (54 MHz in clock steps) HDTV tri-level sync: µs steps (74.25/1.001 MHz in clock steps, or MHz in clock steps) Word Clock Output Frequency: 48 khz Output Impedance: 75 Ω unbalanced ("1 Vp-p" output) Output Amplitude: 1 Vp-p ± 0.1 V (into 75 Ω), or 5 V CMOS, selectable Output Connector: BNC Number of Outputs: 1 Timing Variable Variable Range: ± 1 AES/EBU frame Setting Resolution: 512 fs ( MHz) steps Memory Card Slot Function: Storing/reading preset data Reading logo data Ethernet Connector Type: 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX, auto switching Function: Transferring operation status (e.g., genlock status) Remote control (e.g., pattern switching) SNMP supported (to be supported in the future) LCD Panel Number of Characters: Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 40 C Operating Humidity Range: 85 % RH (without condensation) Spec-Guaranteed Temperature: 10 to 30 C Spec-Guaranteed Humidity: 85 % RH (without condensation) 20 characters x 2 lines can be displayed (backlight) Operating Environment: Indoor use Operating Altitude: Up to 2000 m Overvoltage Category: Ι Pollution Degree: 2 Power Requirements: DC12 V (10 to 18 V) 20 W Dimensions and Weight: 213(W) x 44(H) x 400(D) mm (excluding projections) 1.8 kg Accessories: Instruction manual... 1 AC adapter

56 VIDEO The LT 444 is a changeover unit that switches to the backup system when accidents occur. LT 444 CHANGEOVER GENERAL The LT 444 is a changeover unit that automatically switches the signal from the primary signal to the backup signal when problems are detected in the primary signal. Two systems of input signals (primary and backup) are connected to the LT 444, and the LT 444 detects errors on the amplitude of the primary input signal. A single LT 444 provides 11 channels. HD-SDI (channels 1 to 6 only), SD-SDI, AES/EBU digital audio, analog black burst signal, and tri-level sync signals are supported through the configuration of the internal switch. If a switch occurs from the primary signal to the backup signal, the LT 444 indicates the channel that caused the problem on the panel LED. The LT 444 can be configured in the system with the LT 443D. FEATURES Input/Output Provides 11 channels (a single channel consists of PRIMARY input, BACKUP input, and OUTPUT output) on a single LT 444. Delay for Starting the Monitor The delay for starting the error monitor at power up can be set to FAST or SLOW depending on the rise time of the system signal source being connected. Determination Criteria of the Signal Level The internal preset switch allows level detection switching among SD-SDI, AES/EBU digital audio, NTSC or PAL analog black burst, HD analog trilevel sync, HD-SDI (only supported on channels 1 to 6), and other signals. Error Display When a signal level error is detected, the LT 444 illuminates the error LED on the panel as well as the panel LED that indicates the channel causing the problem. This feature allows quick investigation of the problem. LT 444 REAR PANEL 56

57 VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS LT 444 Inputs PRIMARY inputs: BACKUP input: Outputs OUTPUT outputs : Delay for Starting the Monitor Select from two delay settings for starting the error monitor at power up according to the rise time of the system signal source connected to the LT 444. FAST: SLOW: Input Signal Type Set the type of input signal applied to the LT 444 using the internal dip switch. Signal Type: Determination Criteria of the Signal Level Detection Level: Detects an error when the amplitude of the input signal drops by 2 to 5 db from the defined level and makes the switch. The detection level varies slightly depending on the type of signal specified using the internal dip switch. The detection level can be set to LOW or HIGH for each signal type. Detection Reference Level *1The signals levels inside the parentheses are those during normal conditions. When the Determination Criteria is Set to Low HD-SDI (CH1 to CH6 only): SD-SDI (270 Mb/s): SD-SDI (143 Mb/s): AES/EBU audio: NTSC black burst: PAL black burst: Tri-level sync: 1 input each for 11 channels (75 Ω BNC connector) 1 input each for 11 channels (75 Ω BNC connector) 1 output each for 11 channels (75 Ω BNC connector) Input/Output Characteristics (CH1 to CH11) Return Loss: 30 db 0 to 10 MHz 15 db 10 MHz to 750 MHz 10 db 750 MHz to 1.5 GHz Insertion Loss: 0.2 db 0 to 10 MHz 0.5 db 10 MHz to 200 MHz 2.0 db 200 MHz to 1.5 GHz Cross Talk: -60 db 0 to 10 MHz -30 db 10 MHz to 1.0 GHz -20 db 1.0 GHz to 1.5 GHz 1 minute or more (60 to 80 s) 4 minutes or more (240 to 320 s) HD-SDI (CH1 to CH6 only) SD-SDI (270 Mb/s) SD-SDI (143 Mb/s) AES/EBU digital audio Tri-level sync signal NTSC black burst PAL black burst 450 to 635 mv (800 mv) 450 to 635 mv (800 mv) 450 to 635 mv (800 mv) 631 to 794 mv (1000 mv) -180 to -227 mv (-286 mv) -190 to -238 mv (-300 mv) 337 to 476 mv (600 mv) When the Determination Criteria is Set to HIGH HD-SDI (CH1 to CH6 only): 505 to 713 mv (800 mv) SD-SDI (270 Mb/s): 505 to 713 mv (800 mv) SD-SDI (143 Mb/s): 505 to 713 mv (800 mv) AES/EBU audio: 734 to 924 mv (1000 mv) NTSC black burst: -210 to -264 mv (-286 mv) PAL black burst: -220 to -277 mv (-300 mv) Tri-level sync: 379 to 535 mv (600 mv) User-Defined Detection Level Setting (CH7 to CH11 only) USER setting 1: USER setting 2: Set between -100 mv to -700 mv *2 Expansion of the Detection Level Using the Attenuator (CH7 to CH11 only) Set the internal attenuator to expand the detection level further by 5 times USER setting 1: USER setting 2: Set between -700 mv to mv *2 *2When a signal equivalent to the H.SYNC waveform is applied. The specifications of the detection level may not be achieved depending on the waveform shape. Error Display Total Error LED: Error Channel LED: Panel Key Lock Time to Key Lock: External Control (REMOTE) Connector Application: Inputs: Outputs: Connector Type: Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature: 0 to 45 C Operating Humidity: 90 % RH (without condensation) Operating Environment: Indoor use Operating Altitude: Up to 2,000 m Overvoltage Category: II Pollution Degree: 2 Power Requirements: Dimensions and Weight: Accessories: Set between -100 mv to -700 mv *2 Set between -700 mv to mv *2 Notifies errors by illuminating the error LED on the panel. Detects the channel causing the error and notifies the channel by illuminating the corresponding LED. The key lock is automatically enabled when key operation is not detected for 60 s. For external remote control. RESET, AUTO SWITCHING, and TOGGLE SYNC FAULT and SYNC SOURCE 9-pin Dsub connector 90 to 250 VAC (no switching necessary), 50/60 Hz 25 Wmax. 426 (W) x 44 (H) x 560 (D) mm (excluding protrusions), 4 kg Rack supports... 2 Rack support attachment screws... 4 Power cord... 1 Instruction manual

58 VIDEO 3 Independent variable black burst outputs Equipped with SD-SDI output and analog composite output, 1U half rack size SG LT 428 COMPONENT DIGITAL SYNC GENERATOR GENERAL The LT 428 is a compact signal generator of half rack size. It is equipped with 3 independent black burst outputs, which facilitates the synchronization of digital devices that have different phases. FEATURES 3 Black Burst Outputs Equipped with 3 independent black burst outputs, each of which the phase can be varied. Genlock Able to synchronize to the NTSC or PAL video signals, black burst, and composite sync, and vary the timing. SDI Output Equipped with one system of component serial digital output conforming to SMPTE 259M. Analog Composite Output Equipped with one system of analog composite output. Digital Audio Output Equipped with one system of 2-channel digital sound output conforming to AES/EBU. Analog Audio Output Equipped with stereo sound output (The sound is output by switching with the digital sound). Word Clock Output Equipped with one system of 44.1 khz or 48 khz word clock. Setup Using a PC Since setting changes such as varying the phase of the black burst signal, genlock timing, video output pattern, and audio frequency are carried out from a PC via the RS232C, errors in operation can be prevented. LT 428 REAR PANEL 58 SPECIFICATIONS Remote Control Input Interface RS232C port, 9 pole D-sub, male Analog GENLOCK GENLOCK Signal (NTSC or PAL) Amplitude: Input SCH phase: Pull-in range fsc: Timing facilities Timing range: Analog Black Burst Outputs Sync amplitude: Burst amplitude: Timing range: SCH phase: Video Signal Generator SDI output Format: Timing range : Embedded Audio: VIDEO output Sync amplitude: Burst amplitude: Timing range : SCH phase Common test signals, : SDI and analog generator: Patterns dedicated for PAL: Patterns dedicated for NTSC: Patterns common for NTSC/PAL: AES/EBU Audio Generator Output format: Amplitude: Timing AES/EBU Output signals Tones: Click rate: Levels: Wordclock (WCLK) Generator Output impedance: Output characteristics: Reference output: Analog Audio Generator Output format: Reference amplitude: Analog audio output signals Tones: Click rate: Levels: Power Requirement Mechanical Data Mechanical data for cabinet: Mechanical data for cabinet fitted with 19" rack mount: Accessories: Nominally ±3 db Nominally ±45 ±50 Hz PAL:±4 fields NTSC:±2 fields PAL:-300 mv ±5 % NTSC:-286 mv ±5 % PAL:300 mv ±5 % NTSC:286 mv ±5 % PAL:±4 fields NTSC:±2 fields Adjustment ± Mb/s serial, complies with ITU-R BT 656 and SMPTE 259M PAL:±1 field NTSC:±1 field 1 khz stereo, silence and Off PAL:-300 mv ±5 % NTSC:-286 mv ±5 % PAL:300 mv ±5 % NTSC:286 mv ±5 % PAL:±1 field NTSC:±1 field Adjustment ±180 All signals in standard 4x3 aspect ratio. EBU Color Bar/75 % SMPTE Color Bar/FCC Color Bar Color Bar ITU801 Balanced 110 Ω According to AES Vp-p Typically µs to -9.6 µs in 0.8 µs steps Stereo 1 khz/etc 1 or 3 s. -18 dbfs/etc 75 Ω HC-MOS clock, 0 to 5 V un-terminated 44.1 or 48 khz Balanced 30 W Balanced by active circuitry. 0 dbu, corresponding to 775 mv Stereo 500 Hz/Stereo 1 khz/ Stereo EBU 1 khz, single click in ch. A/Stereo 8 khz 1 or 3 s. 0 dbu/etc (0 dbu=775 mv) 90 to 250 VAC 25 W max. 42(H) 217(W) 380(D) mm 1.5 kg 44(H) 442(W) 380(D) mm 2.3 kg Main cable... 1 interface cable... 1 Rack Mount Kit... 1 CD-ROM... 1

59 Provides six black burst outputs VIDEO 410BB NTSC SYNC GENERATOR GENERAL The 410BB is an NTSC Sync Generator that provides sync generator signal for other video equipments. FEATURES Provides six black outputs Provides composite sync and subcarrier outputs Provides SMPTE color bars output Digital waveform generation provides highly accurate and stable signals. Supplies two 1 khz outputs of audio tone The low-profile rackmount size easily fits into system configuration SPECIFICATIONS Black Burst (1) System and other System Number of Scanning Lines Field Frequency: Line Frequency: Subcarrier Frequency: Output Impedance: Number of Outputs: 6 (2) Sync Signal and Color Burst Sync Signal Amplitude Blanking Level: Rise/Fall Times: Horizontal Sync Pluse Width: Vertical Sync Pluse Width: Equalizing Pluse Width: Vertical Serration Pluse Width: Vertical Blanking Period: Color Burst Amplitude NTSC-M, conforms to SMPTE 170M standards 525, interlaced Hz khz MHz ±10 Hz 75 Ω 286 ±14.3 mv 0 ±20 mv 140 ±20 ns 4.7 µs±100 ns 3H 2.3 µs±100 ns 4.7 µs±100 ns 20H +1.5 µs 286 ±14.3 mvp-p Number of Cycles Rise/Fall Times SCH Phase Composite Sync Amplitude Output Impedance Polarity Timing Rise/Fall Times Number of Outputs Subcarrier Amplitude Output Impedance Frequency Phase Number of Outputs SMPTE Color Bar Specifications Full Amplitude Number of Outputs Analog Audio Tone Frequency Output Waveform Output Amplitude Output Impedance Output Connector Number of Outputs Others Power Requirements Dimensions and Weight 6 kg Environmental Conditions Operating Storage Accessories ns, or ns ±10 4±0.2 V into 75 Ω 75 Ω Negative ±100 ns, compared with black burst 140±20 ns 1 2±0.2 Vp-p into 75 Ω 75 Ω MHz ±10 Hz ±10, compared with black burst 1 Conforms to SMPTE EG standards. 1 Vp-p ±20 mvp-p into 75 Ω 2 1 khz±100 Hz Sine Wave 0±0.5 dbm, or 4±0.5 dbm, selectable by internal switching 600 Ω, balanced XLR type (3-pin), cannon 2 100, 120, 220, 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 20 Wmax. selectable by internal wiring 426 (W) 44 (H) 400 (D) mm Temperature:0 to 40 C Humidity: 85 % RH(without condensation) Temperature:-10 to 50 C Rack support... 1 set Power cord... 1 Instruction manual BB REAR PANEL 59

60 VIDEO 29 formats of DTV signals conforming to ISDB ATSC DVB Standards throughout the world LT 448 MULTIFORMAT PATTERN GENERATOR GENERAL The LT 448 Multiformat Pattern Generator is designed to output analog component and composite signals applicable to the DTV systems. The test patterns generated are monoscope, color bar, crosshatch, gray scale, circle, character, and much more. FEATURES Applicable to multiformat The 17 formats of component signals are provided for DTV conforming to ISDB, ATSC, and DVB standards based on 1920 x 1080, 1280 x 720, 720 x 480, and 720 x 576 formats. The NTSC/PAL/SECAM composite output and VGA, used for a computer monitor, are provided. These 29 formats are suitable for production line applications of projectors, etc. G, B, R/Y, PB, PR signal output Two component signal formats (i.e., G, B, R/Y, PB, PR) can be selected. Sync signal output CS (tri-level or binary level), HD, and VD sync signals are output. Monoscope pattern Monoscope patterns (i.e., 16:9 for HDTV, 4:3 for SDTV interlace, 16:9 (S) for SDTV progressive) suitable for inspecting resolution is provided as standard for the format applicable to DTV. S connector Since an S connector is provided to output Y/C separation signals, this instrument is suitable for adjusting and inspecting an equipment with S connector. The S connector identifies S1 and S2 signals. D connector The D5 output conforming to JEITA CP-4120 standards is provided as standard. Preset/recall function Up to 100 setting conditions of formats and patterns can be stored. RS232C interface This instrument can be remotely controlled by using a personal computer. Remote controlling address The address to be recalled can be incremented or decremented by grounding the remote connector pin. Signal generator in a digital technology The digital signal generator produces highly stable and accurate signals (except audio signals). DVI connector DVI-D connector conforming to DDWG standards is provided as standard. NATURAL PICTURE pattern is optionally equipped as factory option. LT 448 REAR PANEL 60

61 VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS LT 448 Video Signal Video Data Quantization Parameter Number of Bits (Common to G/Y, B/PB, R/PR): 8 bits (except sync signals) Component Signal *Specifications are common to both HDTV and SDTV unless otherwise noted. Specifications HDTV: Conforms to SMPTE PR160 standards. SDTV: Conforms to EBU-N10, SMPTE 253M standards. Video Signal Format: G, B, R or Y, PB, PR can be selected via the front panel controls. Output Impedance: Output Connector: Number of Outputs BNC (G, B, R/Y, PB, PR, selectable): 2 15-pin Mini D-sub: 1 D Connector: 1 Sync Signal Tri-Level 75 Ω BNC, 15-pin mini D-sub, D connector, simultaneous output HDTV: Added to G/Y, B/PB, and R/PR Binary Level SDTV: Added to G/Y Output Control Function Sync Signal ON/OFF: Settable for G, B, R INVERT: Inverts pattern. Composite Signal *In NTSC system, specifications are common to NTSC-M (USA) and NTSC-J (Japan) unless otherwise noted. Specifications: Conforms to SMPTE 170M, ITU-R BT.470 standards Color System: NTSC, NTSC 4.43 PAL, PAL-M, PAL-N, PAL-60, SECAM Setup Level 0 % fixed for monoscope pattern NTSC-M, PAL-M: 7.5 % NTSC-J, NTSC 4.43, PAL, PAL-N, PAL-60: 0 % SECAM: 0 % Output Impedance: 75 Ω Output Connector: BNC, RCA jack Number of Outputs: 1 each Output Control Function INVERT: Inverts luminance only. Y/C Separation Signal Specifications: Conforms to JEITA CPR-1201 standards Signal Specifications: Same as the composite signal (except NTSC-J) Output Connector: S connector Number of Outputs: 1 Aspect Ratio ID Signal: Superimposed on the C signal in NTSC-J mode Output Impedance in DC:10 kω ±3 kω Aspect Ratio ID Signal Voltage: 0 V fixed for all formats (except NTSC-J) S1 (squeeze signal output): 5 V S2 (letter box signal output): 2.2 V 4.3 Signal Output: 0 V Output Control Function INVERT: Inverts luminance only. Computer Monitor Signal Specifications: Conforms to VESA STANDARDS Video Signal Format: G, B, R Output Impedance: 75 Ω Output Connector: BNC, 15-pin mini D-sub, simultaneous output Number of Outputs BNC (G, B, R Only): 2 15-pin Mini D-sub: 1 Sync Signal Binary Level: Added to G Output Control Function SYNC ON G: ON/OFF, selectable INVERT: Inverts pattern. D Connector Output (Applicable to D5) Specifications: Conforms to JEITA CP-4120 (D1/D2/D3/D4/ D5 outputs), RC-5237 standards. Video Signal Signal Specifications: Same as the component signal Format: G, B, R or Y, PB, PR can be selected via the front panel controls. Output: Always output; does not detect whether a plug is inserted. DVI Output Specifications: Conforms to DDWG (Digital Display Working Group) DVI standards. 61 Signal Format: Single Link T.M.D.S (digital signal only) Applicable Format: VGA, SVGA, XGA HDTV (except 1080p/60, 1080p/50, 720p/24) SDTV (except 480i/60, 576i/50) DDC Function: Not available HOT PLUG Detection: Not available Output Control Function INVERT: Inverts pattern. Output Connector: DVI-D Number of Outputs: 1 G, B, R Level Control Function: G, B, R output level can be respectively adjusted by using the screwdriver adjustment on the bottom. Adjustable Range: 0 to 1.0 Vp-p (into 75 Ω load, active picture) Sync Signal Output CS Output Output Impedance: 75 Ω Output Connector: BNC Number of Outputs: 2 HD Output Level: TTL level Output Connector: BNC, 15-pin mini D-sub Number of Outputs BNC: 2 15-pin Mini D-sub: 1 Output Polarity: Negative (positive for SVGA, SXGA) Selectable in user setting mode VD Output Level: TTL level Output Connector: BNC, 15-pin mini D-sub Number of Outputs BNC: 2 15-pin Mini D-sub: 1 Output Polarity: Negative (positive for SVGA, SXGA) Selectable in user setting mode Audio Signal Frequency: OFF/1 khz/400 Hz, selectable Output Level: 1.2 Vp-p ±0.12 V (into 600 Ω load) Output Impedance: 600 Ω Output Connector: RCA jack Number of Outputs: 2 each Control Mode Startup Memory: Front panel settings are stored in the internal memory when power is turned on. Preset/Recall: Up to 100 front panel settings (address 00 to 99) can be stored/recalled. Area Settings: Consecutive addresses, out of 100 addresses, can be recalled. Begin address: BEGIN Remote Control End address: END Front panel controls can be remotely controlled with a personal computer via the RS232C interface. Address Remote Control Mode: By grounding the connector pin, the address to be recalled can be incremented (INC) or decremented (DEC). The begin address (BE- GIN) can also be set by grounding the pin. User Setting Mode HD Output, VD Output: Ramp Pattern: Step Pattern: Multiburst Pattern: Output polarity can be set in each format. Superimposing this signal on the PB, PR output can be set ON/OFF. Superimposing this signal on the PB, PR output can be set ON/OFF. Superimposing this signal on the PB, PR output can be set ON/OFF. Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature: 0 to 40 C Operating Humidity: 90 % RH (without condensation) Spec-Guaranteed Temperature: 10 to 30 C Spec-Guaranteed Humidity: 85 % RH (without condensation) Operating Environment: Indoor use Operating Altitude: Up to 2,000 m Overvoltage Category: II Pollution Degree: 2 Power Requirements: 90 to 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 60 W max. Dimensions and Weight: 426 (W) x 88 (H) x 400 (D) mm (excluding projections) 5.6 kg Accessories: Power cord... 1 Instruction manual... 1

62 VIDEO MULTIFORMAT PATTERN GENERATOR LT 448 LT 448 Output Format Applicable Output Connectors No. Format Standards Aspect Ratio COMPONENT OUT (BNC) D CONNECTOR (D Connector) COMPOSITE OUTPUT BNC,RCA Jack Y/C OUTPUT S Connector HD,VD,CS OUTPUT BNC RGB OUT D Connector Y,PB,PR RGB Y,PB,PR RGB Y,PB,PR RGB DVI-D COMPONENT HDTV p/ M i/ sF 274MRP p/ M p/ M PsF/23.98 RP p/50 274M p/25 274M i/5025sF 274MRP p/ M p/ M p/ M p/50 296M p/25 296M 16:9 16:9 16:9 16:9 16:9 16:9 16:9 16:9 16:9 16:9 16:9 16:9 16:9 COMPONENT SDTV p/ i/ p/ i/50 293M :9S 4:3 16:9S 16:9L 16:9S 4:3 16:9S 16:9L COMPOSITE 18 NTSC-M 19 NTSC-J 20 NTSC PAL 22 PAL-M 23 PAL-N 24 PAL SECAM 170M 170M :3 16:9S 16:9L 4:3 16:9S 16:9L 4:3 16:9S 16:9L 4:3 16:9S 16:9L 4:3 16:9S 16:9L 4:3 16:9S 16:9L 4:3 16:9S 16:9L 4:3 16:9S 16:9L COMPUTER MONITOR 26 VGA SVGA XGA SXGA VESA VESA VESA VESA 4:3 4:3 4:3 4:3 * Output connectors marked with are enabled when the format is selected. Connectors without marking are disabled (i.e., high impedance state) when the format is selected. * No signal is output from the DVI-D connector when Y, PB, PR is selected in the VGA format, however. * (S):SQUEEZE, (L):LETTER BOX 62

63 63 VIDEO COMPONENT, HDTV p/ i/ sF p/ p/ PsF/ p/ p/ i/5025sF p/ p/ p/ p/ p/25 COMPONENT, SDTV p/ i/ p/ i/50 COMPOSITE 18 NTSC-M 19 NTSC-J 20 NTSC PAL 22 PAL-M 23 PAL-N 24 PAL SECAM COMPUTER MONITOR 26 VGA SVGA XGA SXGA Full Field Raster Ramp Convergence Crosshatch Multiburst Character Window ANSI Gray Scale Natural Picture (Option) Monoscope Demodulation SD Multi Multiformat HD Multi Split Field Checker LT 448 Pattern format * Patterns marked with circle can be displayed; others are displayed in black. * (S):SQUEEZE, (L):LETTER BOX MULTIFORMAT PATTERN GENERATOR LT 448

64 VIDEO Conformed to NTSC, PAL and SECAM Systems The Leading Pattern Generator with GENLOCK Function 408NPS(NTSC/PAL/SECAM) PATTERN GENERATOR GENERAL The 408NPS is a Pattern Generator that conforms to NTSC, PAL, and SECAM systems. The video sweep and multiburst signal functions are used to check the frequency characteristics of video equipment. In addition, the all-channel, synthesized RF output enables to adjust and check TV and VTR with TV-band tuners. The GENLOCK and black burst functions also facilitate pattern generator use as a sync signal source for various types of video equipment. The RF frequency can be set directly from the panel or the applicable country, band, and channel can be selected from internal data. FEATURES The video sweep frequency can be selected from 100 khz to 15 MHz in two bands. There are six markers in band 1 and seven markers in band 2. The markers can be turned on and off at the same time. The GENLOCK function enables generator synchronization with another pattern generator. The sync, burst (NTSC and PAL systems), luminance, chrominance (SECAM system: subcarrier level variable), and setup (NTSC system) levels can be changed independently. There are 13 basic patterns including SMPTE color bar and convergence patterns. The luminance, chrominance, and RGB signals can be turned on and off. And the circle pattern and moving marker synthesizing functions can be used with the basic pattern to generate various patterns. (SECAM system: no DEM pattern) The signal generator can separately output such video signals as composite video, RF, black burst signals (NTSC and PAL systems), such sync signals as HD, VD, and composite sync signals. The RF output covers all VHF, UHF and Cable TV channels and includes most of the necessary broadcast channel data. Sound modulation of 400 Hz or 1 khz can be applied to RF output. The 400 Hz and 1 khz audio outputs are used to check sound circuit. The RF signal can modulate internal with patterns and sound signals, as well as external video and sound signals. The 8-pin digital RGB, 21-pin RGB multi-connector and Y/C (s connector) are provided as standard. Up to 100 types of panel setting can be stored in memory and the memory recall area can be specified. (memory with battery backup) The remote function provides memory address control. The GPIB interface is optionally available. (factory option) 64

65 VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS Color Systems: Patterns Crosshatch: Convergence: Window: Checker: 5-step: 10-step: Others: Demodulation Patterns (DEM) SECAM: Full-field Color Bars: SMPTE Color Bars: Rasters: Multiburst: Frequencies: Amplitude: Flatness: Video Sweep Sweep Frequency Range: Sweep Speed: Amplitude: Flatness: Marker NARROW: WIDE: Accuracy: Sync Signal No. of Scanning Lines: Line Frequency: Field Frequency: Mode Control White: Red: Green: Blue: Burst: Sync: Luminance: NTSC-M PAL-B, C, D, G, H, I, K,L SECAM III-B, C, D, G, K, L 408NPS White line (100 %, 15 (V) 11 (H)) on black background and white corner marker (100 %) at upper-left corner of the screen. Synthesized pattern of white line (100 %, 15 (V) 11 (H) on black background and white dot (75 %, 14 (V) 10 (H)) White (100 %) window on black background 8 (V) 6 (H) white (100 %) and black checker pattern Staircase luminance signal consisting of 5 equal steps Chroma signal is on/off possible. B-Y axis 40 % (NTSC: 286 mvp-p, PAL: 280 mvp-p) SECAM: Chroma signal is on/off possible. Staircase luminance signal consisting of 10 equal steps. Chroma signal is on/ off possible. B-Y axis 40 % (NTSC: 286 mvp-p, PAL: 280 mvp-p) SECAM: Chroma signal is on/off possible. Several patterns selectable Without this pattern 75 % amplitude color bar The eight colors on screen from left to right are white, yellow, cyan, green, magenta, red, blue, black. White can be switched to 75 % or 100 %. NTSC: Conforms to SMPTE ECR standard (1-1978). PAL, SECAM: NTSC test patterns (SMPTE ECR ) adapted to PAL and SECAM 8 colors in RGB combinations NTSC: 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 3.58, 4.2 MHz fixed or variable (1 MHz to 15 MHz) PAL, SECAM: 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 4.8, 5.8 MHz fixed or variable (1 MHz to 15 MHz) 50 % or 100 %, selectable ±0.5 db (0.5 to 10 MHz) ±1.0 db (10.1 to 15 MHz) NARROW: 0.1 to 5 MHz WIDE: 0.3 to 15 MHz * Two bands selection Synchronous with field scan 50 % or 100 % ±0.5 db (0.1 to 10.0 MHz) ±1.0 db (10.1 to 15.0 MHz) NTSC: 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 3.58, 4.2 MHz PAL, SECAM: 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 MHz 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14 MHz ±(3 % +50 khz) NTSC: 525 lines (interlaced scanning) PAL, SECAM: 625 lines (interlaced scanning) NTSC: khz PAL, SECAM: khz NTSC: Hz PAL, SECAM: 50 Hz White color bar/raster level selection (75 % or 100 %) Red color bar/raster on/off Green color bar/raster on/off Blue color bar/raster on/off Burst signal on/off Sync signal on/off Luminance signal on/off 65 Chrominance: Invert: Circle: Moving Marker: Amplitude Preset Sync Signal Variable Range: Burst Signal Variable Range: Luminance Signal Variable Range: Chrominance Signal Variable Range: Setup Signal Variable Range: Front Panel Output Composite Video Signal Output Polarity: Voltage: Impedance: Trigger Output Mode: Output: RF Output Frequency Range: Frequency Preset Resolution: Frequency Switching Time: Frequency Characteristic: Spurious: Output voltage: Impedance: Modulation Polarity: Accuracy: Sound Output: System: Frequency: Modulation Signal: Modulation System: Frequency characteristic: Rear Panel Output Composite Video Output Polarity: Voltage: Black Burst Output Polarity: Burst: Sync Signal: Output: Subcarrier Output Frequency: Voltage: Chrominance signal on/off Black-and-white inversion of crosshatch, convergence, window, and checker patterns Synthesis of circle for crosshatch, convergence, window, and checker patterns Synthesis of moving markers for all patterns NTSC: 0 to 200 % (286 mv=100 %) PAL, SECAM: 0 to 200 % (300 mv=100 %) NTSC: 0 to 200 % (286 mv=100 %) PAL, SECAM: 0 to 200 % (300 mv=100 %) NTSC: 0 to 200 % (660 mv=100 %) PAL, SECAM: 0 to 200 % (700 mv=100 %) NTSC: 0 to 200 % (627 mv=100 %) PAL: 0 to 200 % (664 mv (cyan)=100 %) SECAM: 0 to 200 % (476 mv=100 %) The SECAM ID and chrominance components are not the frequency modulation (FM) factor variation but the carrier level variation. NTSC: 0 to 20.0 % (54 mv=7.5 %) PAL, SECAM: None Positive (sync: negative) 1 Vp-p fixed ±28 mvp-p (into 75 Ω load) 0 to 1 Vp-p continuously variable (into 75 Ω load) 75 Ω HD or VD, selectable with panel switch TTL 30 to 900 MHz 10 khz f function available in CH mode (up to ±10.00 MHz) 2s or less ±5 db 10 dbc 180 µv rms to 10 mv rms approx (into 75 Ω), continuously variable 75 Ω Negative or positive ±50 ppm of setting value Overlaid on RF output (ON/OFF possible) Intercarrier system NTSC: 4.5 MHz PAL, SECAM: 5.5 MHz ±275 Hz, 6 MHz ±300 Hz, 6.5 MHz ±325 Hz, selectable 400 Hz, 1 khz, or external input NTSC: FM PAL, NTSC: AM and FM 50 Hz to 50 khz: ±1 db 50 khz to 100 khz: ±3 db Positive (sync: negative) Fixed:1 Vp-p ±28 mvp-p (into 75 Ω load) Variable:0 to 1 Vp-p (into 75 Ω load) Positive (sync: negative) NTSC: Vp-p ±20 mvp-p (into 75 Ω load) PAL: 0.3 Vp-p ±20 mvp-p (into 75 Ω load) SECAM: None NTSC: Vp-p ±20 mvp-p (into 75 Ω load) PAL, SECAM: 0.3 Vp-p ±20 mvp-p (into 75 Ω load) Two BNC connectors NTSC: MHz ±50 Hz PAL: MHz ±50 Hz (optionally ±2 Hz possible) SECAM: None 2 Vp-p (into 75 Ω load)

66 VIDEO Other Outputs Composite Sync Output Polarity: Negative Voltage: 4 Vp-p ±0.5 Vp-p (into 75 Ω load) Composite Blanking Output Polarity: Negative Voltage: 4 Vp-p ±0.5 Vp-p (into 75 Ω load) Burst Flag/Color Blanking Output Polarity: Negative Voltage: 4 Vp-p ±0.5 Vp-p (into 75 Ω load) V. DRIVE Output Polarity: Negative Voltage: 4 Vp-p ±0.5 Vp-p (into 75 Ω load) H. DRIVE Output Polarity: Negative Voltage: 4 Vp-p ±0.5 Vp-p (into 75 Ω load) Sound Output Frequency: 400 Hz ±20 Hz and 1 khz ±50 Hz Voltage: 1 Vp-p ±50 mv (into 1 kω load) No. of Outputs: 1 each (total of two) R-Y Output Voltage: 0.7 Vp-p ±28 mvp-p (into 75 Ω load) B-Y Output Voltage: 0.7 Vp-p ±28 mvp-p (into 75 Ω load) Y Output Voltage: TTL Output RGB Output: SYNC Output: Connector: Y/C Voltage: Connector: 1 Vp-p ±28 mvp-p with SYNC (into 75 Ω load) Fan out 1 (positive logic) Fan out 1 (negative logic) H. SYNC and V. SYNC 8-pin square connector NTSC: Y: 1 Vp-p ±28 mvp-p (into 75 Ω load) (between sync and white signal) C: Vp-p ±24 mvp-p (into 75 Ω load) (chroma level setup 0 %) PAL: Y: 1 Vp-p ±28 mvp-p (into 75 Ω load) (between sync and white signal) C: Vp-p ±24 mvp-p (into 75 Ω load) (chroma level) SECAM:Y: 1 Vp-p ±28 mvp-p C: Vp-p ±24 mvp-p (chroma level) Two systems: Round miniature connector (S connector) and BNC connector (Y output and C output) RGB Multiple Output NTSC Polarity Voltage Impedance VIDEO Positive 1 Vp-p ±42 mvp-p 75 Ω (sync: negative) (into 75 Ω load) RGB Positive 0.7 Vp-p ±0.1 Vp-p 75 Ω (into 75 Ω load) SOUND 0.4 Vp-p ±50 mv 10 kω Ys L 0 to 0.4 V 75 Ω H 1 to 3 V Ym L 0 to 0.4 V 75 Ω H 1 to 3 V AV L 0 to 0.4 V 22 kω H 3 to 5 V Connector: 21-pin connector (EIAJ21P) Polarity Voltage Impedance VIDEO Positive 1 Vp-p ±42 mvp-p 75 Ω (sync: negative) (into 75 Ω load) RGB Positive 0.7 Vp-p ±0.1 Vp-p 75 Ω (into 75 Ω load) SOUND 1.4 Vp-p ±0.2 Vp-p 10 kω Ys L 0 to 0.4 V 75 Ω H 1 to 3 V SLOW SW L 0 to 2 V 10 kω H 9.5 to 12 V PAL Connector: 21-pin connector Rear Panel Input EXT VIDEO Input Polarity: Input Voltage: Input Impedance: GENLOCK Input Input Type: Sync Signal Operating Input Range: Horizontal Delay: Burst Signal Operation Input Range: Subcarrier Phase: Positive (sync: negative) 1 Vp-p (into 75 Ω load) 75 Ω 75 Ω loop-through NTSC: 286 mv ±3 db (sync signal amplitude) PAL, SECAM: 300 mv ±3 db (sync signal amplitude) Input signal ±2 µs variable NTSC: Vp-p ±3 db PAL: 0.3 Vp-p ±3 db NTSC: MHz ±50 Hz Subcarrier Lock Range: PAL: MHz ±50 Hz 0 to 360 continuously variable * SECAM: Horizontal and vertical sync EXT SOUND Frequency Range: Input Range: Input Impedance: Presettings: 50 Hz to 100 khz 1 Vp-p (into 10 kω load) 10 kω Up to 100 sets of pattern, mode, level, and RF frequency or channel can be stored in internal memory. Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature: Operating Humidity: Power Requirements: Dimensions: Weight: Accessories: 0 to 40 C 80 % RH (without condensation) 100, 120, 220, or 240 VAC ±10 % (changeable, maximum input voltage: 250 V by internal tapping), 50/60 Hz, 60 VA 426 (W) 88 (H) 400 (D) mm Approx. 9 kg BNC-BNC cable (3C-2V, 1 m)... 1 Power cord... 1 Instruction manual

67 VIDEO 408 NPS Rear Panel Video output system: VIDEO output, Y output, Y/C separate output R-Y output, (with S connector) and B-Y output Drive signal output: Sound output Composite Blanking, (400 Hz, 1 khz) Composite Sync, V Drive, H Drive Burst Flag, and Subcarrier External video modulation input (75 Ω) External sound input Remote control connector 8-pin RGB digital output GENLOCK input (loopthrough) Black burst output (two systems) NTSC: 21-pin multi-connector, analog RGB, composite video, Ys, Ym, AV and sound output (400 Hz, 1 khz) PAL/SECAM: 21-pin multi-connector, analog RGB, composite video, Ys, SLOW, and sound output (400 Hz, 1 khz) 67

68 VIDEO Monoscope and color still picture patterns are provided LT 436NP NTSC/PAL PATTERN GENERATOR GENERAL The LT 436NP Analog Pattern Generator applicable to NTSC and PAL systems is ideal for production line, inspection, and R&D applications of LCD TVs. Providing 24 test patterns (e.g., monoscope pattern, 8-color raster, flash pattern, slant pattern, variable luminance raster, color still picture), this instrument is suitable for the latest high quality and resolution LCD TVs. The full color still picture pattern data can be changed by sending bit map data. FEATURES Monoscope pattern The monoscope pattern with a resolution of 1000 TV lines is provided. Since color bar is superimposed on this pattern, resolution and color reproducibility can be tested simultaneously. Color still picture pattern A full-color still picture pattern can be stored inside the instrument. Users can transfer and use their original data for the still picture pattern. The sample pattern stored inside the instrument when it is shipped from the factory is Leader s original still pic- ture pattern. For NTSC, an ITE color matching chart(a lady with a carnation) is provided as a fixed color still pattern in addition to the rewritable color still picture pattern. S connector Since S connector is used to output Y/C signals, this instrument can be used for adjusting and inspecting LCD TVs equipped with the S connector input. Component signal output Since Y, PB, PR and G, B, R can be output together with the composite signal, this instrument can be used for adjusting and inspecting LCD TVs equipped with the component signal input. D Connector (for D1) Two output systems (i.e., D connector, BNC connector) are provided to output Y, PB, PR component signals. Various test patterns Since various patterns (e.g., monoscope pattern, 8- color raster, flash pattern, slant pattern, variable luminance raster) are provided, this instrument is ideal for a variety of adjustment and inspection applications. LT 436NP REAR PANEL 68

69 VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS Video Signal Common Specifications for Video Signal Color Format : NTSC (525/60) PAL (625/50) Scanning Method NTSC : PAL : 525 interlace scanning 625 interlace scanning 624 non-interlace scanning LT 436NP Field Frequency NTSC : Hz±25 ppm PAL : Hz±25 ppm(at interlace scanning) Hz±25 ppm(at non-interlace scanning) Line Frequency NTSC : khz±25 ppm PAL : khz±25 ppm Output Impedance: 75 Ω Composite Video Signal Subcarrier Frequency NTSC : MHz±25 ppm PAL : MHz±25 ppm Output Level Video Level NTSC : 714 mv (100 % Level)±22 mv PAL : 700 mv (100 % Level)±21 mv Sync Level NTSC : 286 mv±9 mv PA L : 300 mv±9 mv Color Burst Level NTSC : 286 mvp-p±9 mv PAL : 300 mvp-p±9 mv Phase Error : ±3 Output Connector NTSC : BNC (Always outputs NTSC signal) PAL : BNC (Always outputs PAL signal) NTSC/PAL : BNC, RCA pin jack (NTSC or PAL signal selectable) Number of Outputs : 1 each Y/C Separation Output System : Same as the composite signal specifications Output Connector : S type (NTSC/PAL,Selectable) Number of Outputs : 1 Y, PB, PR Signal Y Output Level Video Level : 700 mv ±21 mv(100 % Level) Sync Level : 300 mv ±9 mv PB, PR Output Level ±350 mv ±21 mv(100 % Level) Output Connector : BNC, D-connector (525/60 Always output) Number of Outputs BNC : 2 each (Also used for R, G, B) D-connector : 1 * The number of scanning lines is the same as the composite signal. R, G, B Signal Sync Signal : R, G, B Output Level Video Level : 700 mv ±50 mv (100 % Level) Sync Level : 300 mv ±15 mv (When sync signal is added) Output Connector : BNC Number of Outputs : 2 each (Two connectors are also used for Y, PB, PR) * The number of scanning lines is the same as the composite signal. D Connector (for D1 Format) Output * Signal in 525/60 format is always output. (Signal in 625/50 format is not output.) Specifications : Video Signal Signal Format : Output : Identification Signal Line 1, 2, 3 : Output DC Impedance : Auxiliary Lines Auxiliary 1, 2, 3 : Connector Connector : Pin Assignments Sync Signal Output Sync Signal : Output Level : Output Impedance : Output Connector : Number of Outputs : Conform to JEITA CP-4120 standards Same as the Y, PB, PR signal. Inserting a plug does not turn the output off. 0 V 10 kω NC D connector (conforms tojeita RC-5237 standards) Pin Number Signal Name Pin Number Signal Name 1 Y 8 Line 1 2 Y_GND 9 Line 2 3 PB 10 Auxiliary Lines 2 4 PB_GND 11 Line 3 5 PR 12 Plug Detect GND 6 PR_GND 13 Auxiliary Lines 3 7 Auxiliary Lines 1 14 Plug Detect HS, VS, C.SYNC 0 V to 5 V±250 mv (into open circuit) 75 Ω BNC 1 each Pattern Display Pattern Color Bar NTSC : Full field color bar (100/0/100/0, 100/0/75/0 saturation, selectable) SMPTE color bar Split field color bar PAL : Full field color bar (100 %, 75 % saturation, selectable) SMPTE color bar (A ratio is the same the NTSC system.) Split field color bar (A ratio is the same the NTSC system.) * For NTSC (525/60) and PAL (625/50) systems, the R, G, B connectors do not output the SMPTE color bar and split field color bar. (A black raster is output.) Raster : White, yellow, cyan, green, magenta, red, blue, black (100 %, 75 % saturation,selectable) Demodulation NTSC : The phase of R-Y and B-Y in the chroma signal are inverted every line. PAL : The phase of R-Y and B-Y of the chroma signal, and I and Q are inverted every line. * For NTSC (525/60) and PAL (625/50) systems, the R, G, B connectors do not output this signal. (A black raster is output.) Flashing : The 0 % or 100 % monochrome pattern is alternately displayed every field. Slant Pattern : Black line displayed from lower-left to upper-right corners at aspect ratio of 4:3 on a 100 % white background Line Sweep NTSC : PAL : Pulse Bar NTSC : PAL : Ramp : Step NTSC : PAL : 0.1 to 5.0 MHz Marker 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 3.58, 4.5 MHz 0.25 to 6.1 MHz Marker 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 MHz Modulated 12.5T pulse, 2T pulse, 2T bar Modulated 20T pulse, 2T pulse, 2T bar 0 to 100 % ramp Level of 0 to 100 % is divided into 10 equal steps for 11 levels. Level of 0 to 100 % is divided into 10 equal steps for 11 levels. Split Gray Scale : The screen is split in ratio of 1:1 for top and bottom At top portion, level between 0 % and 100 % is divided into 15 equal steps for 16 levels. Bottom portion is a 100 % white pattern. Window : Black/white reversible Monoscope : Scale in units of % Color bars can be superimposed (100/0/75/0 saturation) Chroma component ON/OFF function (including color burst) Convergence NTSC : 17 (V) x 14 (H) lines PAL : 19 (V) x 15 (H) lines Character NTSC : 47 (H) x 24 (V) alphanumeric characters PAL : 45 (H) x 24 (V) alphanumeric characters * Color burst is not superimposed in both NTSC and PAL systems. Color Still Picture NTSC : PAL : 755 dots (H) x 483 lines (V) 923 dots (H) x 574 lines (V) Full color Data can be changed by sending bit map data. (Windows application software is supplied for sending bit map data.) Level Variable in Video Period Applicable Pattern : Raster White Window Variable Range : Continuous variable between 0 and 100 % Sound Output Frequency : 1 khz±150 Hz Output Level : 1 Vp-p±0.1 V Output Impedance : 10 kω±2 kω Output Connector : RCA pin jack Number of Outputs : 2 Environmental Conditions Operating :Temperature : 0 to 40 C Operating :Humidity : 90 %RH (without condensation) Spec-Guaranteed :Temperature:10 to 30 C Spec-Guaranteed :Humidity : 85 %RH (without condensation) Operating Environment : Indoor use Operating Altitude : Up to 2,000 m Overvoltage Category : Pollution Degree : Power Requirements : 90 to 250 VAC, universal, 50/60 Hz, 40 W max. Dimensions and Weight : 426 (W) x 88 (H) x 400 (D) mm, 5.9 kg Accessories : Power cord... 1 Floppy disk (LT 436 series application software)... 1 Instruction manual... 1 * Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation, registered in the USA and other countries. 69

70 VIDEO Y, P B, P R component output, D1 connector, S connector provided LT 436 NTSC PATTERN GENERATOR GENERAL The LT 436 Analog Test Signal Generator is applicable to the NTSC system. Since various patterns (e.g., still picture pattern of a lady with a carnation, monoscope pattern, color bar, 8-color raster, line sweep) are provided, resolution, color reproducibility, linearity, high-voltage regulation, character reproducibility can be tested using a single unit. With the Y, PB, PR component signal output and D1 and S connectors, this instrument can be used for adjusting and inspecting a variety of AV equipment. LT 436 REAR PANEL 70 FEATURES Color still picture pattern A full-color still picture pattern can be stored inside the instrument. Users can transfer and use their original date for the still picture date. The sample pattern stored inside the instrument when it is shipped from the factory is Leader s original still picture pattern. In addition, an ITE color matching chart(a lady with a carnation) is provided as a fixed color still pattern in addition to the rewritable color still picture pattern. Monoscope pattern The monoscope pattern with a horizontal resolution of 1000 TV lines is provided. Since color bar is superimposed on this pattern, resolution and color reproducibility can be tested simultaneously. Y, PB, PR component signal output Since component signals can be output together with the composite signal, this instrument can be used for adjusting and inspecting AV equipment equipped with component signal input. D1 connector D connector (D1) is built-in for digital broadcasts. *D connector is used as the component signal interface prescribed by JEITA. S connector Since an S connector is provided to output Y/C separation signals, this instrument can be used for adjusting and inspecting AV equipment equipped with S connector input. Various test patterns Since various patterns (e.g., still picture pattern, monoscope pattern, color bar, 8-color raster) are provided, this instrument is ideal for a wide variety of adjustment and inspection applications.

71 VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS LT 436 Video Signal Video Signal (Common) Scanning System: 525 lines, interlace scanning Field Frequency: Hz ±25 ppm Line Frequency: khz ±25 ppm Output Impedance: 75 Ω Composite Signal Color System: NTSC (525/60) Subcarrier Frequency: MHz ±25 ppm Output Level Video Level: 714 mv ±22 mv (100% white) Sync Level: 286 mv ±9 mv Color Burst Level: 286 mvp-p ±9 mv Phase Error: ±3 Output Connector: BNC, RCA jack Number of Outputs: 1 each Y/C Signal Signal Specifications: Same as composite signal Output Connector: S connector Number of Outputs: 1 Y, PB, PR Signal Y Output Level Video Level: 700 mv ±21 mv (100% White) Sync Level: 300 mv ±9 mv PB, PR Output Level: ±350 mv ±21 mv (100% saturation) Output Connector: BNC, D connector Number of Outputs BNC 1 each D Connector 1 * The number of active scanning lines is 483; same as the composite signal. D Connector Output (D1) Specifications: Conforms to JEITA CP-4120 standards. Video Signal Signal Specifications: Same as Y, PB, PR signal Output: Always output (Inserting a plug does not turn out put off.) Identification Signal Lines 1, 2, 3: 0 V DC Impedance: 10 kω Auxiliary Lines Lines 1, 2, 3: NC Connector Connector: D connector (conforms to JEITA RC-5237 standards.) Pin Assignments: Pin No. Signal Name Pin No. Signal Name 1 Y 8 Line 1 2 Y GND 9 Line 2 3 PB 10 Auxiliary line 2 4 PB GND 11 Line 3 5 PR 12 Detects whether a plug is inserted. GND 6 PR GND 13 Auxiliary line 3 7 Auxiliary line 1 14 Detects whether a plug is inserted. Patterns Patterns Displayed Color Bar: Raster: Line Sweep: Marker: Pulse & Bar: Step: Monoscope Pattern: Convergence: Window: Character: Full-field color bar (100/0/100/0 or 100/0/75/0, selectable) SMPTE color bar (setup:0 % 75/0/75/0, saturation) Split-field color bar(75/0/75/0, saturation) White, yellow, cyan, green, magenta, red, blue, black (100 % or 75 % saturation, selectable) 0.1 to 5.0 MHz 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 3.58, 4.5 MHz Modulated 12.5 T pulse, 2 T pulse, 2 T bar Level of 0 to 100 % is divided into 10 equal steps,11 levels. Color component ON/OFF Maximum horizontal resolution: 1000 TV lines Scale in units of % Color bar superimposed Color component ON/OFF (including color burst) Black/white reversible 17 (V) x 14 (H) lines Black/white reversible Black/white reversible Alternately displays two lines corresponding to 94 (H) x 24 (V) or 47 (H) x 24 (V) alphanumeric characters. Black/white reversible * Color burst is not superimposed. Still Picture Sample Pattern Resolution 755 dots(h) x 483 dots(v) Display color 24 bits full color Fixed Pattern: a lady with a carnation(color matching chart conforming to ITE standards) * Leader Electronics Corp. encodes ITE digital standard picture data (GBR data) for this pattern. Rewritable pattern: Original sample pattern. Date can be changed by transferring bitmap date. Windows application program for transferring date is provided. * Note that when date is transferred, internal date is overwritten; the default sample date cannot be used after an arbitrary date transfer. Sending Still Picture Pattern Original Data: Windows-type bitmap data Sending Method: Using accessory software and RS232C connector Time Required: Approx. 15 minutes (at baud rate of 38.4 kbps) Accessory Software Operating Environment: Windows 95, 98, NT, 2000 Level Variable Applicable Pattern: Variable Range: White raster,window 0 to 100 % (continuous) Sound Signal Frequency: 1 khz ±150 Hz Output Level: 1 Vp-p ±0.1 V Output Impedance: 10 kω ±2 kω Output Convector: RCA jack Number of Outputs: 2 RF Signal Output System: M Output Channel JAPAN: CH10, CH11 USA: CH12, CH13 Sound Carrier Frequency: 4.5 MHz Sound Modulation Frequency: 1 khz ±150 Hz Output Level: At least 0.5 mvrms Output Impedance: 75Ω Output Connector: F Number of Outputs: 1 * This model is simplified. Therefore, double-sideband modulation is used for the RF system and parameters (e.g., P/S) do not conform to official standards. RS232C Connector Operation: Sending still picture pattern Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 40 Operating Humidity Range: 90 % RH (without condensation) Spec-Guaranteed Temperature Range: 10 to 30 C Spec-Guaranteed Humidity Range: to 85 % RH (without condensation) Operating Environment: Indoor Use Operating Altitude: Up to 2000 m Overvoltage Category: II Pollution Degree: 2 Power Requirements: Dimensions and Weight: 90 to 250 VAC universal, 50/60 Hz 20 Wmax. 213 (W) x 88 (H) x 300 (D) mm (excluding projections) 3.0 kg Accessories: Floppy disk (LT 436 series application software)... 1 Power cord... 1 Instruction manual... 1 * Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation, registered in the USA and other countries. 71

72 VIDEO Component signal outputs of Y/B-Y/R-Y & GBR LT 416 NTSC/PAL/SECAM PATTERN GENERATOR GENERAL Model LT 416 is a precision test-signal source which provides four color systems of NTSC, PAL, SECAM, and NTSC-4.43 for testing and adjusting all kind of video products such as TV, VTR etc. In addition of a composite signal output, the generator provides a Y/C output and a component signal outputs(except SECAM) of Y/B-Y/R-Y and GBR so that it is suitable to a production line for video products of component system. RF output is easily selected by setting channel number while the channels are pre-programmed by each countries. 15 test patterns including color bars, raster, convergence and circle satisfy the most desired applications. FEATURES Conforms to four standards (i.e., NTSC, PAL, SECAM, NTSC-4.43) This generator is ideal for adjusting and testing TVs, and AV equipments. S connector An S connector is provided to output Y and C signals for adjusting AV equipments with S connector. Component video signal output This generator output the composite video signal and component video signal. Since Y/ B-Y/ R-Y or G/ B/ R is output, the generator allows test signals for component AV system adjustment and testing. (The SECAM color signals (B-Y, R-Y) are not output.) RF setting The channel plan based on the country system is provided for easier RF frequency setting Various test patterns This 15 patterns including color bar and circle are provided for various adjustment and test processes. LT 416 Rear Panel 72

73 VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS LT 416 Composite Video Signal Output Color System: Scanning Method NTSC/ NTSC-4.43: PAL/ SECAM: Field frequency NTSC: PAL/ SECAM: NTSC-4.43: Line frequency NTSC: PAL/ SECAM: NTSC-4.43: Subcarrier Frequency NTSC: PAL: NTSC-4.43: Video Generating System: Number of Quantitative Bits: Output Impedance: Output Level: Setup Level: Output connector Fixed output: Variable output: Sync Signal Amplitude: Horizontal Sync Width: Vertical Sync Width NTSC/ NTSC-4.43: PAL/ SECAM: Vertical Blanking Period NTSC/ NTSC-4.43: PAL/ SECAM: Color Burst Amplitude: Number of Cycles: NTSC-4.43: 11 cycles SECAM Color Identification Signal Amplitude D R Line: 540 mvp-p +40 mvp-p, -50 mvp-p D B Line: 500 mvp-p ±50 mvp-p SECAM Color (Back porch on the horizontal blanking period) Amplitude D R Line: 215 mvp-p ±25 mvp-p D B Line: 167 mvp-p ±20 mvp-p Test Patterns Color Bar: 100/ 0/ 75/ 0 Full-field Color Bar Demodulator Pattern (Not output when the SECAM is selected) PAL: NTSC: line n: line n+1: line n: line n+1: Multiburst Frequency NTSC/ NTSC-4.43: 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 3.58, 4.2 MHz PAL/ SECAM: 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 4.8, 5.5 MHz Amplitude: 100 % (* 1 ) Raster Output eight colors in combination with red, green and, blue Color: Amplitude: Window Window Amplitude: 100 % (* 1 ) Step 10 equal steps from 0 mv to 700 mv white Max. Luminance Amplitude: Circle Pattern: Interlace/ Progressive: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, NTSC line interlace scanning 625-line interlace scanning (Progressive scanning can be performed for all color systems when the CIRCLE or CON- VERGENCE pattern is selected.) Hz ±30 ppm (60.06 Hz ±30 ppm for progressive scanning) 50 Hz ±30 ppm (50.08 Hz ±30 ppm for progressive scanning) Hz ±150 ppm (60.06 Hz ±150 ppm for progressive scanning) khz ±30 ppm khz ±30 ppm khz ±150 ppm MHz ±30 ppm MHz ±30 ppm MHz ±50 ppm Digital system using 4 fsc sampling (without SECAM) 8 bits 75 Ω 1 Vp-p ±50 mvp-p (Between sync tip and 100 % white) NTSC: 0 % ( 7.5 % model optionally available) RCA jack... 1 BNC mvp-p ±14 mvp-p(ntsc/ NTSC-4.43) 300 mvp-p ±15 mvp-p(pal/ SECAM) 4.7 µs ±200 ns 3H 2.5H 20H 25H 286 mvp-p ±23 mvp-p (NTSC/ NTSC-4.43) 300 mvp-p ±24 mvp-p (PAL/ SECAM) NTSC: 9 cycles,pal: 10 cycles, Combination of normal and reversed B-Y and R-Y for each line Combination of normal and reversed B-Y, R-Y, I, and Q for each line R-Y, -(R-Y), B-Y, -(B-Y), R-Y, -(R-Y), B-Y, -(B-Y) -(R-Y), R-Y, B-Y, -(B-Y), R-Y, -(R-Y),-(B-Y), B-Y I, -I, Q, -Q, I, -I, Q, -Q -I, I, Q, -Q, I, -I, -Q, Q 100 % white, yellow, cyan, green, magenta, red, blue, black Same as color bars 100 % White circle pattern (with black fringe) on the convergence pattern Color Burst on/ off Selectable (Flicker may occur on the border of convergence and circle patterns.) Convergence Luminance Amplitude: 75 % Number of Vertical Lines NTSC/ NTSC-4.43: 17 PAL/ SECAM: 19 Number of Horizontal Lines NTSC/ NTSC-4.43: 14 PAL/ SECAM: 15 Horizontal Line Width: 2 lines Number of Dots NTSC/ NTSC-4.43: PAL/ SECAM: Dot Pulse Vertical Width: Color Burst: Interlace/ Progressive: (* 1 ) Notes on pattern specifications Signal amplitude (100 %) is as follows. PAL/ SECAM: NTSC/ NTSC-4.43: Accuracy: Y/ C Separation Output Specifications: Output Impedance: Connector: Number of Outputs: Y, B-Y, R-Y Output Output Signal (* 2 ): Y, B-Y, R-Y Y Output Amplitude NTSC/ NTSC-4.43: PAL: Sync Signal Amplitude NTSC/ NTSC-4.43: PAL: B-Y, R-Y Output Amplitude: Output Impedance: Connector: Number of Outputs: 1 each (* 2 ) B-Y and R-Y are output when the SECAM is selected; Y is only output. R, G, B Output Output Signal (* 3 ): R, G, B Output Amplitude: C.SYNC Output Amplitude: Output Impedance: Connector: Number of Outputs: 1 each (Pulse noise may be superimposed on the leading and trailing edges of the R, G and B Sync signals.) (* 3 )R, G, B are output when the SECAM is selected; C.SYNC is only output. RF Output System NTSC: PAL: SECAM: Carrier Frequency Range: Carrier Frequency Setting Method: Modulation Polarity: Modulation System: Sound Signal Intercarrier Frequency: Modulation Signal: Output Voltage VHF: UHF: Number of Output: Sound Output Output Signal: Amplitude: Number of Output: Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature: Operating Humidity: Spec-Guaranteed Temperature: Spec-Guaranteed Humidity: Operating Environment: Operating Altitude: Overvoltage Category: Pollution Degree: Power Requirements: Dimensions and Weight: Accessories: 16 x x 14 2 lines On/ off selectable Selectable 700 mvp-p 714 mvp-p Same as the composite signal Same as the composite signal 75 Ω S type mvp-p ±36 mv 700 mvp-p ±35 mv 286 mvp-p ±14 mv 300 mvp-p ±15 mv 525 mvp-p ±26 mv 75 Ω BNC R, G, B, C.SYNC 700 mvp-p ±35 mv (NTSC, PAL, NTSC-4.43) C-MOS Level (NTSC, PAL, SECAM, NTSC-4.43) 75 Ω BNC M B, D, G, H, I, K B, D, G, H, K, L (The RF is disabled when the NTSC-4.43 is selected) VHF and UHF Direct setting using programmed country channel plan (Arbitrary frequency cannot be set) Negative or Positive Double sideband 4.5, 5.5, 6.0, 6.5 MHz 1 khz ±200 Hz At least 1 mvrms (into 75 Ω) At least 0.5 mvrms (into 75 Ω) 1 (75 Ω, BNC) 1 khz ±100 Hz, sine wave 1.2 Vp-p (into 600 Ω) 1 (RCA jack) 0 to 40 C 90 % RH (without condensation) 10 to 30 C 85 % RH (without condensation) Indoor use Up to 2000 m II 2 90 to 250 VAC, 50/ 60 Hz 15 W max. 426 (W) x 88 (H) x 300 (D) mm 4.6 kg Power cord... 1 Instruction manual

74 VIDEO Converts Analog RGB Signal into Five formats for Digital TV Broadcasting System LT 1606 VIDEO ENCODER GENERAL The LT 1606 extends the flexibility of programmable RGB generators, in terms of stock and custom patterns and raster parameters (within limits), into the testing of monitors and systems that operate in fully encoded NTSC, PAL and the new HDTV analog-component systems. NTSC and PAL outputs contain fully encoded subcarrier and burst and are available in full composite and separate Y/C using the standard 4-pin SVHS connector. Analog-component feeds Y,PB,PR as well as actively buffered RGB, are available at the same time, making the encoder an extremely useful tool for engineering, setup of HDTV projectors, service and QC applications. FEATURES Generates NTSC, PAL and HDTV Analog Components Operates from R, G, B, CS and Clock from RGB Generators LT 1610A, LT 1611, LT 1615 NTSC, PAL or HDTV Set Up Automatically from Input Clock NTSC and PAL Outputs in Full Composite, Separate Y and C and Analog Components Y, PB, PR HDTV Includes 1080i, 1080p, 720p, 480i, 480p and Others HDTV Analog are 3-Wire Y, PB, PR with Tri-Level Sync Simultaneous Active RGB Outputs to Drive RGB Monitors LT 1606 Rear Panel 74

75 VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS LT 1606 Input Signals Analog R, G, B (Specifications are common to each signal) Polarity: Positive Amplitude NTSC: 714 mv (pedestal level to 100%) (pedestal level: 0 mv) *Input signal level required to obtain the Y output level of 714 mv (pedestal level to 100% white) PAL, 480i, 480p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p: 700 mv (pedestal level to 100%) (pedestal level: 0 mv) *Input signal level required to obtain the Y output level of 700 mv (pedestal level to 100% white) Maximum Input Voltage: 1.5 Vp-p Input Coupling: DC coupled Impedance: 75 Ω Sync Signal: Not required Connector: BNC, 1 each Composite Sync Logic Polarity: Negative Amplitude: C-MOS/ TTL level (H = 4 V, L = 1 V) H Sync period NTSC: µs PAL: µs 480i: µs 480p: µs 720p: µs 1080i: µs 1080p: µs Connector: BNC, 1 *The sync should be positioned at the specified point on the blanking period of R, G, B signal. Clock Signal Frequency NTSC: MHz PAL: MHz 480i: MHz 480p: MHz 720p/ 1080i: MHz Frame (Field) Frequency Hz MHz Frame (Field) Frequency 60 Hz 1080p: MHz Frame Frequency Hz MHz Frame Frequency 60 Hz Amplitude: ECL level ( 0.6 Vp-p) Input Coupling: AC coupled Impedance: 75 Ω Connector: BNC, 1 Output Signals Composite Signal, Y/C Signal Video System: NTSC, PAL (automatic selection) *In the PAL system, 25 Hz offsetting of the subcarrier is disabled. Level: 1 Vp-p±50 mv (sync tip to 100% white) Sync Level NTSC: 286 mv±15 mv PAL: 300 mv±15 mv Color Burst Level NTSC: 286 mv±15 mv PAL: 300 mv±15 mv Phase Accuracy: ±3 Impedance: 75 Ω Connector Composite: BNC, 2 Y/C: S, 1 Y, PB, PR Output Video System: NTSC, PAL, 480i, 480p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p (automatic selection) Level: 1 Vp-p±50 mv (sync tip to 100% white) Sync Level NTSC: 286 mv±15 mv PAL, 480i, 480p: 300 mv±15 mv 720p, 1080i, 1080p: 300 mv±15 mv(negative Polarity) 300 mv±15 mv(positive Polarity) Video Level Y NTSC: 714 mv±36 mv (pedestal to 100% white) Others: 700 mv±35 mv (pedestal to 100% white) PB PR NTSC: Others: 714 mvp-p±36 mv 700 mvp-p±35 mv NTSC: 714 mvp-p±36 mv Others: 700 mvp-p±35 mv Impedance: 75 Ω Connector: BNC, 2 each Analog R, G, B Active Output Output Signal: Active output for analog R, G, B Level: Input level ±5% Frequency Response: ±3 db(30 MHz) Impedance: 75 Ω Connector: BNC, 1 each Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature: 0 to 40 C Operating Humidity: 85 % RH (without condensation) Spec-Guaranteed Temperature: 10 to 30 C Spec-Guaranteed Humidity: 85 % RH (without condensation) Operating Environment: Indoor use Operational Altitude: Up to 2,000 m Overvoltage Category: Pollution degree: 2 Power Requirements: 100, 115, 230 VAC, ±10%, 250 V max. (selectable), 50/ 60 Hz, 15 VA max. Dimensions and Weight: 295 (W) x 72 (H) x 210 (D) mm 2 kg Accessories: Power cord... 1 Sample Data(3.5 inch FD)... 1 (For LT 1610 Series Programmable Video Generators) Instruction manual

76 VIDEO Letter Size, Digital Output 150 MHz, Analog Output 150 MHz LT 1610A PROGRAMMABLE VIDEO GENERATOR High-Speed Pattern Switching Built-in Color Still Picture GENERAL This group of two RGB generators offers dedicated analog, digital or combined analog/digital outputs to best suit application needs. Dot clock frequencies handle a wide range of applications ranging to SXGA (1200 x 1024). All in the group operate from user-replaceable ROMs making them ideal for production operations wherein parameters are not to be altered by operators. Remote control units (LT B) extend program selection to remote control points and widen operator control to signal output conditions including sync format and polarities. Full PC control gives the operator complete control over raster architecture, signal-output conditions and selection from stock and custom patterns. Control extends to the graphic design of custom patterns and the downloading of images from digital still cameras or scanners. X-Y cursors permit the coordinates of defective pixels in the display to be accurately established and provision is made to test monitor power-saving actions spelled out in VESA standards. Fast image switching speeds production work by reducing the wait for new images to appear. Image sequencing may be programmed and scrolling window or character actions aid in gauging image decay characteristics. A factory option adds 2 MB of RAM to extend image memory to accommodate up to 6 VGA format images. FEATURES PC Programming and Control Operates in Windows Environment ROM Setup and Control for Stand-Alone Operations Both Analog and Digital RGB, Clock to 150 MHz/150 MHz Digital Outputs 8-Bit Parallel, Handles Most Flat-Panel Displays High Speed Switching Speeds Pattern Selection Power Saving Display Function as Specified in VESA Standards Graphic Design of Custom Test Patterns Stock Test Patterns Include SMPTE RP-133 & Flower Image X-Y Coordinates Locates Picture Faults Image Downloading from Scanners and Digital Cameras Accessories Provide LVDS Drive to LCD Panels Auto Pattern Switching and Scroll Gauge Image-Decay Characteristics *Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. LT 1610A Rear Panel 76

77 VIDEO Letter Size, 150 MHz Clock, Dedicated for Analog RGB LT 1611 PROGRAMMABLE VIDEO GENERATOR High-Speed Pattern Switching Built-in Color Still Picture GENERAL This group of two RGB generators offers dedicated analog, digital or combined analog/digital outputs to best suit application needs. Dot clock frequencies handle a wide range of applications ranging to SXGA (1200 x 1024). All in the group operate from user-replaceable ROMs making them ideal for production operations wherein parameters are not to be altered by operators. Remote control units (LT B) extend program selection to remote control points and widen operator control to signal output conditions including sync format and polarities. Full PC control gives the operator complete control over raster architecture, signal-output conditions and selection from stock and custom patterns. Control extends to the graphic design of custom patterns and the downloading of images from digital still cameras or scanners. X-Y cursors permit the coordinates of defective pixels in the display to be accurately established and provision is made to test monitor power-saving actions spelled out in VESA standards. Fast image switching speeds production work by reducing the wait for new images to appear. Image sequencing may be programmed and scrolling window or character actions aid in gauging image decay characteristics. A factory option adds 2 MB of RAM to extend image memory to accommodate up to 6 VGA format images. FEATURES PC Programming and Control Operates in Windows Environment ROM Setup and Control for Stand-Alone Operations Analog RGB, Clock to 150 MHz High Speed Switching Speeds Pattern Selection Power Saving Display Function as Specified in VESA Standards Graphic Design of Custom Test Patterns Stock Test Patterns Include SMPTE RP-133 & Flower Image X-Y Coordinates Locates Picture Faults Image Downloading from Scanners and Digital Cameras Accessories Provide LVDS Drive to LCD Panels Auto Pattern Switching and Scroll Gauge Image-Decay Characteristics *Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. LT 1611 Rear Panel 77

78 VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS LT 1610A/LT 1611 Model LT 1610A LT 1611 Dot Clock Frequency Analog Digital 1/1 Clock Mode Digital 1/2 Clock Mode Horizontal Frequency Number of Vertical Scanning Lines Video Memory MHz (10 ppm) MHz (10 ppm) MHz (10 ppm) khz, 8192 dots maximum (in 1 dot steps *1) 8179 maximum (interlace) (2048 dots 2048 dots) 4 Patterns Fixed Patterns: 28 (Color still picture, SMPTE RP-133, crosshatch, dots, color bars, gray scale, circle, window, character list, all-character, character pattern, etc.) Programmable Patterns [Parameter-Controlled Patterns: 15, Special Pattern: 1] Signal Output Level Analog Video R, G, B: V, Setup (conforms to RS-343-A) ON/OFF HS, VS, CS, DISP (BNC): 5 V/3.3 V, selectable HS, VS, CS, DISP (BNC): CMOS/TTL level (5 V) CLK (BNC): ECL amplitude, AC coupled output Digital CMOS/TTL level (5 V) and CMOS/TTL level (3.3 V)*2, selectable Equalizing Pulse Serration Pulse Composite Video Sync Signal Scanning Analog Output (BNC) OFF/0.5H/1H, selectable OFF/0.5H/1H/XOR, selectable ON/OFF selectable (G only) Level: Conforms to RS-343-A Non-interlace, interlace, interlace shrink R, G, B, HS, VS, CS, DISP, CLK Analog Output Fine Adjustment Offset level (adjustable R, G, B respectively) Video level (adjustable R, G, B together) RGB balance (adjustable R, B) Digital Output (Amphenol 57 series, 50-pin connector) DIGITAL OUTPUT1 R7-R0, G7-G0, B7-B0, HS, VS, CS, HD, VD, DISP, CLK, CTRL0 (AV), CTRL1 (YS), Vcc (5 V/3.3 V) DIGITAL OUTPUT2 R7-R0, G7-G0, B7-B0 (1/2 CLOCK RATE) *3 CTRL2 (YM), Vcc (5 V/3.3 V) Output Control ON/OFF and inversion for R, G, B ON/OFF and negative/positive for HS, VS, CS, HD, VD, DISP, CLK External Interface RS232C (D-sub 9-pin connector) REMOTE (Amphenol 57 series, 36-pin connector) Environmental Conditions Power Requirements Dimensions Operating temperature: 0 to 40 C Spec-Guaranteed temperature: 5 to 35 C 90 to 250 VAC, universal (50/60 Hz) 295 (W) 72 (H) 210 (D) mm Weight 3.2 kg 2.9 kg Accessories User ROM 1. Windows application software (3.5" FD) 1. Power cord 1. Instruction manual 1. *1 Timing for H-PERIOD, H-SYNC, and H-BP can be set in 1 dot steps. *2 CMOS/TTL level must be only 3.3 V for frequency range of 135 MHz (67.5 MHz MHz) to 150 MHz (75 MHz + 75 MHz) *3 In 1/1 clock mode, signals (i.e., R7-R0, G7-G0, B7-B0) are not output. The output impedance is set to 330 Ω through a pull-down resistor connected to ground since output pin of the IC. "Windows" is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation, registered in the USA and other countries. 78

79 VIDEO Letter Size, Analog Output 260 MHz, Digital Output 200 MHz LT 1615 PROGRAMMABLE VIDEO GENERATOR High-Speed Pattern Switching Built-in Color Still Picture (16-color, 256-color, Full color Scroll/ Rewrite function) GENERAL This group of three RGB generators offers dedicated analog, digital or combined analog/digital outputs to best suit application needs. High dot-clock capabilities are featured, up to 260 MHz in analog, which allows operation in UXGA (1600 x 1200) systems. All in the group operate from user-replaceable ROMs making them ideal for production operations wherein parameters are not to be altered by operators. Remote control units (LT B) extend program selection to remote control points and widen operator control to signal-output conditions including sync format and polarities. Full PC control gives the operator complete control over raster architecture, signal-output conditions and selection from stock and custom patterns. Control extends to the graphic design of custom patterns and the downloading of images from digital still cameras or scanners. X- Y cursors permit the coordinates of defective pixels in the display to be accurately established and provision is made to test monitor power saving actions spelled out in VESA standards. Fast image switching speeds production work by reducing the wait for new images to appear. Image sequencing may be programmed and scrolling window or character actions aid in gauging image-decay characteristics. A factory option adds 4 MB of RAM to extend image memory to accommodate up to 12 VGA format images. LT 1615 Rear Panel FEATURES Image Downloading from Scanners and Digital Cameras Accessories Provide LVDS Drive to LCD Panels Auto Pattern Switching and Scroll Image Gauge Decay Characteristics External Clock Input PC Programming and Control Operates in Windows Environment ROM Setup and Control for Stand-Alone Operations Both Analog and Digital RGB, Clock to 260 MHz/200 MHz Digital Outputs 8-Bit Parallel, Handles Most Flat-Panel Displays High Speed Switching Speeds Pattern Selection Power Saving Display Function as Specified in VESA Standards Graphic Design of Custom Test Patterns Stock Test Patterns Include SMPTE 133 & Flower Image Image Downloading X-Y Display Function Locates Pixel Coordinates (to Locate Display Faults) Auto Display Functions (Pattern Switching & Scroll) X-Y Coordinates Locates Pixel Faults *Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. 79

80 VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS LT 1615 Dot Clock Frequency Analog: Digital 1/1 Clock Mode: Digital 1/2 Clock Mode: Horizontal Frequency: (in 1 dot steps *1) Number of Vertical Scanning Lines: Video Memory: Patterns: Signal Output Level Analog: TTL: Digital: Equalizing Pulse: Serration Pulse: MHz (10 ppm) MHz (10 ppm) MHz (10 ppm) khz, 8192 dots maximum 8179 maximum (interlace) (2048 dots x 2048 dots) x 8 (2048 dots x 2048 dots) x 8 Fixed Patterns: 33 (Color still picture, SMPTE RP-133, crosshatch, dots, color bars, gray scale, circle, window, character list, all character, character, pattern, etc.) Programmable Patterns [Parameter-Controlled Patterns: 15, Special Pattern: 1] Video R, G, B: V (5 mvstep) Sync: V (5 mv step) Setup V (1 mv step) HS, VS, CS (BNC): CMOS/TTL leve (5 V/3.3 V), selectable DISP(SMA): CMOS/TTL level (5 V/3.3 V), selectable. CLK OUT (SMA): ECL amplitude, AC coupled output CMOS/TTL Level (5 V) CMOS/TTL level (5 V) and low voltage CMO/TTL level (3.3 V) *2, selectable. OFF/0.5 H/1 H, selectable OFF/0.5 H/1 H/XOR, selectable Composite Video Sync Signal: ON/OFF, selectable adjustable R, G, B Scanning: Non-interlace, interlace, interlace shrink Dot Clock Input(SMA): EXT CLK IN: 116 dbµ (50 Ω) Input range: MHz Analog Output (BNC): R, G, B, HS, VS, CS (SMA): DISP (SMA): CLK OUT: Output range MHz Analog Output Fine Adjustment: Offset level (adjustable R, G, B individually) Video level (adjustable R, G, B interlocked) RGB balance (adjustable R,B only) TTL Output (Amphenol 57 Series, 24-pin connector): HS, VS, CS, (HD), (VD), (I), (I ),CLK (HD), (VD) can be selected by setting of DIP SW 1. Option 71 : R, G, B, R, G, B, (I), (I ) can be selected. *3 Digital Output (Amphenol 57 series, 50-pin SPECIFICA- connector) Digital Output 1: R7-R0, G7-G0, B7-B0, TIONS HS, VS, CS, HD, VD, DISP, CLK, CTRL0, CTRL1, Vcc (5 V/3.3 V) Digital Output 2: R7-R0, G7-G0, B7-B0, FIELD (1/2 CLOCK RATE) *4 CTRL2, Vcc (5 V/3.3 V) Output Control: ON/OFF and inversion for R, G, B ON/OFF and negative/positive for HS, VS, CS, HD, VD, DISP, CLK External Interface: RS232C (D-sub 9-pin connector) REMOTE (Amphenol 57 series, 36-pin connector) Environmental Conditions Operating temperature: 0 to 40 C Spec-Guaranteed temperature: 5 to 35 C Power Requirements: 90 to 132 VAC, 180 to 250 VAC, universal (50/60 Hz) Dimensions & Weight: 295 (W) 139 (H) 210 (D) mm, 4.8 kg Accessories: User ROM... 1 Windows application software... 1 Power cord... 1 Instruction manual... 1 *1 Timing for H-PERIOD, H-SYNC, H-BP, HD-START, and HD WIDTH can be set in 1 dot steps. When setting the H-WIDTH in 1 dot steps, the dot clock frequency should be 75 MHz or lower. When setting the H-WIDTH in 2 dot steps, the dot clock frequency should be 150 MHz or lower. When setting the H-WIDTH in 3 dot steps, the dot clock frequency can be used. *2 CMOS/TTL level must be only 3.3 V for frequency range of 135 MHz (67.5 MHz MHz) to 200 MHz (100 MHz MHz) *3 TTL video signal output is factory option. (R, G, B, I, R, G, B, I ) *4 In 1/1 clock mode, signals (i.e., R7-R0, G7-G0, B7-B0) are not output. The output impedance is set to 330 Ω through a pull-down resistor connected to ground since output pin of the IC. "Windows" is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation, registered in the USA and other countries. 80

81 Evolution of LCD, CRT, Plasma display test VIDEO Powerful features for production line, high-speed frequency switching capability, and much more. Large-capacity internal memory and uniquely designed data transfer circuit for high-speed pattern switching capability satisfy the production line. Complicated operation can be easily done by personal computer or dedicated remote controller. Control mode used via the RS-232C interface is ideal for Computer-Integrated Manufacturing(CIM). Production line Remote control program screen CIM Controller RS232C Display to be measured Dedicated Remote Controller(LT B) Test Fixture LT 1610 series units LT 1610A/1611 Three functions satisfy production line requirements. LT 1615 Coordinate display capability Residual image evaluation capability Power saving test capability Locates defective display areas. Scrolling capability for character and window patterns are provided to evaluate the residual image of displays. The power saving function of computer display in compliance with VESA standards can be tested. Easy editing of program data Programming(e.g., horizontal/vertical timings, test pattern) to data ROM can be easily executed in the Windows screen. To write data into the user ROM, picture and data can be transferred from the personal computer to the LT 1610 series units via the RS-232C interface in the Windows environment. Program can be easily edited on the Excel or Lotus since this instrument can fetch external data. Example for program of horizontal and vertical timings LT 1610A/1611 LT

82 VIDEO color still picture One VGA size 640(H) x 480 (V) 256-color built-in One XGA size 1024 (H) x 768 (V) 256-color built-in(rewritable) There are three modes: 16-color, 256-color, or full color. Up to 1024(H) x 1024(V) size full color pictures can be output. The dot clock frequency is up to 65 MHz for analog output. The 1/1 clock mode is only provided for digital output,and dot clock frequency is up to 50 MHz. Color still Picture by Model Introducing Optional Equipments for LT 1610 series Function 1.Program memory selection 2.Usable range setting for Program address 3.Program address selection 4.Output pattern selection 5.Directly controlling the output signal 6.Program data copy 7.High-speed pattern switching mode selection [Function With the multiple still picture suitable for the display characteristic evaluation allows quick pattern evaluation. [For LT 1610A,1611] Still picture backup RAM2 MB Up to six VGA size patterns can be registered. Up to two XGA size patterns can be registered. [For LT 1615] Still picture backup RAM4 MB Up to 13 VGA size patterns can be registered. Up to five XGA size patterns can be registered. 82

83 VIDEO Checks Bottom Level and Magnitude of LCD Panel Flicker LT 9213A LCD FLICKER CHECKER GENERAL The LT 9213A greatly reduces the investment in capital equipment required to adjust and evaluate flicker in LCD and other display panels. Visual methods are difficult, non-repeatable and fatiguing to operators and spectrum analyzer methods are costly and require experienced personnel. Use of the LT 9213A saves space as well, and once set up, provides production speed with fast GO/NO GO judgements. A DC output proportional to the meter reading is provided as well as a TTL output of GO/NO GO finding. The optical sensor is provided. FEATURES Large Equipment Cost Savings as Opposed to Spectrum Analyzer Methods Large Indicator Eliminates Operator Fatigue Amplitude Compressor Simplifies Bottom Adjustment Selectable Bandpass Filter Eliminates Noise and Interference and Adapts the Unit to a Wide Range of LCDs GO-NO GO Indicators and Judgement Speed Throughput DC AGC for Relative Flicker Measurements Aids in Evaluating Compliance with VESA Accommodates a Wide Range of Brightness (0.5 to 300 cd/m 2 ) SPECIFICATIONS System: Functions: Flicker Measurement Measurement Range: Indication of brightness variation Variable frequency bandpass filter provided to select flicker component Input section Abnormal brightness (too bright, too dim) indicator, input level adjustor DC AGC normalizes brightness dispersion. Meter sensitivity adjustor Variable frequency bandpass filter provided to select flicker component Flicker indication compressor (COMPRESSION/ LINEAR, selectable) GO/ NO-GO judgment and output DC output in proportion to the meter indication Flicker waveform monitor output 0 to 30 %, 2 ranges (RESPONSE: LINEAR, SENSITIVITY: FIX) Panel Brightness Range when a provide sensor is used. Switchable LOW/HIGH by BRIGHTNESS RANGE SWITCH on rear panel. LOW: 0.5 cd/m 2 to 50 cd/m 2, include Brightness level adjustor HIGH: 30 cd/m 2 to 300 cd/m 2, include Brightness level adjustor Brightness Range Indicator: Measurement Accuracy: The brightness ia measured when the sensor is fully contacted to the LCD panel. Indicates abnormal brightness (too bright, too dim) ±10 % of full scale (LINEARITY: LINEAR, SENSITIVITY: FIX) 0.3 to 2 times (refer to FIX) Average responding Sensitivity Adjustor: Meter Indication: Built-In Filter Variable Filter Type: Single-resonance bandpass filter Center Frequency: 20 Hz to 150 Hz, variable Selectivity: Q=3 *Typical attenuation characteristics: 20 db at 60 Hz (20 Hz tuning frequency) Frequency Response (30 Hz ref.) 20 Hz to 60 Hz: ±0.5 db 60 Hz to 150 Hz: ±1 db Fixed Filter Type: RC low-pass filter, 6 db/oct Attenuation: 3 db at 400 Hz DC Output Output Signal: Proportion to meter indication Output Voltage: 1 V±50 mv at full scale, into open Output Resistance: 1 kω approx Connecting cable length: 10 m Accessory Sensor Type: Silicon photodiode Model: S (manufactured by Hamamatsu Photonics K.K.) Connecting cable length: 3 m Monitor Output Output Signal: Flicker component normalized by DC AGC Output Voltage: 0.1 Vp-p/% approx. Output Resistance: 600 Ω approx Connecting cable length: 10 m GO/ NO-GO Function Method: Preset on the meter Setting: Judgement value in preset mode Indicator: LED (GO: Green, NO-GO: Red) Output: TTL level, fun out: 1 GO: LO, NO-GO or not judged: HI Connecting cable length: 10 m Power Requirements: 100 V/ 115 V/ 230 V ±10 %(250 V max.), 50/60 Hz 7 W MAX. Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 40 C Operating Humidity Range: 80 % RH (without condensation) Spec-Guaranteed Temperature Range: 10 to 35 C Spec-Guaranteed Humidity Range: 80 % RH (without condensation) Dimensions and Weight: 132 (W) x 148 (H) x 250 (D) mm, 2.4 kg Accessories: Sensor... 1 BNC - BNC cable... 1 Power cord... 1 Instruction manual

84 LEVEL METER Digital terrestrial TV + Digital CATV Digital Display All Channel (VHF+UHF+Cable TV) Simple Operation, Low-Cost Model LF 941D SIGNAL LEVEL METER GENERAL The Model LF 941D TV Signal Level Meter enables speedy and accurate measurement of VHF/UHF TV and CATV signals. This level meter can measure levels of digital broadcast signals as well as conventional analog broadcast signals. Since ten programmable channels are provided to store arbitrary frequencies, a pilot signal, FM broadcast signals, and frequently used frequencies can be stored. The large digital display for level readout and bargraph level indicator for antenna installation enhance speedy and accurate level measurements. This compact & lightweight level meter is ideal for VHF/ UHF antenna and CATV installations. FEATURES This level meter can measure levels of digital and analog VHF/UHF TV and CATV signals. Ten programmable channels are provided to store arbitrary frequencies. Compact, lightweight (1.3 kg), and simple operation ideal for field use. Digital level readout for easy and accurate measurements. Sound carrier level can also be measured. Continuous 12-hour operation with six Alkaline C cells. Time settable automatic power-off function prevents useless battery power consumption. Built-in eight channel tables for worldwide use. 84

85 LEVEL METER SPECIFICATIONS Frequency Range: 46 to 870 MHz (0.05 MHz steps) * 1 Frequency Setting: Settable in 50 khz steps (The frequency of memory channels can only be set.) Built-In Channel Table: Japan, USA (corresponding to each CATV channel of STD, HRC, IRC), ITU-R (CCIR), China, UK, Honk Kong area, Indonesia, Australia (Selectable with switch) Level Measurement Broadcast Format Analog: Digital: AM (video), FM (sound), CW MSK, BPSK, QPSK, 16 to 256 QAM, OFDM, 8VSB (Channel bandwidth: 5 MHz, 6 MHz, 7 MHz, 8 MHz) Resolution: 1 db Measurement Bandwidth: 280 khz (typ.) Measurement Range: Analog: 30 to 110 dbµv (- 30 to 50 dbmv)(1 db steps) Digital: 45 to 100 dbµv (- 15 to 40 dbmv)(1 db steps) Minimum Display Level* 2 Analog: 20 dbµv (typ.) Digital: 35 dbµv (typ.) Accuracy Analog: ±3 db Digital: LF 941D ±3 db (Frequency response of channel bandwidth should be flat.) Detection Method Analog: Peak detection Digital: Average-value detection Display LCD panel: Display area: 30 x 70 mm Input connector: F-type, 75Ω Monitor Output: FM detection (sound frequency) AM detection (video frequency) Output Connector: 3.5φ, monaural jack (for earphone) Memory Number of Channels: Up to 10 channels Storable Item: Frequency, Modulation type (analog or digital) Power Supply: 6 C cells Power consumption: Up to 2.5 W Battery Life: At least 4 hours with high-grade Manganese battery At least 12 hours with Alkaline battery (room temperature) Other Functions Automatic power-off: 5, 10, 20, 60 minutes, continuous Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 40 C Operating Humidity Range: 85 % RH (without condensation) Spec-Guaranteed Temperature Range:0 to 40 C Spec-Guaranteed Humidity Range: 85% RH(without condensation) Storage Temperature Range:-10 to 50 C Operating Environment:Indoor/outdoor use (no rain water) Operating Altitude: Up to 2000 m Pollution Degree: 2 Dimensions: 180(W)x68(H)x200(D)mm Weight: (excluding projections) 850 g (excluding battery) Approx. 1.3 kg (including C battery) Accessories: Carrying Case... 1 Name Plate... 1 C cell... 6 Instruction Manual... 1 * 1 Could not operate 47.8 to 40.2 MHz and 95.8 to 96.2 MHz * 2 The displayed level below the measurement range (UN- DER light) is only for your reference; the measurement accuracy is not guaranteed. Use this value such as antenna direction adjustment. 85

86 LEVEL METER Compact, Lightweight, Handy type/ High Cost-performance to MHz FOR WLL / PHS PAT. PEND LF 970 PHS HANDY FIELD ANALYZER GENERAL The LF 970 Handy Field Analyzer is compact, lightweight, portable, and ideal for checking the service area and checking/solving communication interference when installing a PHS public station, private system, or WLL system. FEATURES Easy operation and quick measurement LCD screen and one-touch key operation enable portability and support field use. Synchronization checking between cell stations Frame synchronization can easily be checked with CS transmission timing measurement function. Checking the PS Call test mode between personal stations lets you easily locate communication interference. Compact and lightweight Compact, lightweight, and four AA cells enable portability. RS232C interface provided as standard Measurement data transfer and remote control capabilities with personal computer. [MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS] Multi CS measurement mode (MULTI) Measures CS-IDs and levels on control carriers that exceed the carrier sense level, then sorts them from larger levels. Five stations can be displayed simultaneously. Up to 80 stations can be measured. Single CS measurement mode (SINGLE) Measures level and error rate (UW, CRC error) of the single cell station. The settable measurement period is one to ten seconds in one second steps. The settable measurement period is one to ten seconds in one second steps. CS transmission timing measurement mode (TIME) Measures the transmission timing between the specified cell station and other cell stations. Cell stations with a level exceeding the carrier sense level between the specified cell station and other cell stations. Cell stations with a level exceeding the carrier sense level being set can be measured. Calling and paging check functions for PS (PS- TEST) Monitors the link channel establishment phase between personal and cell stations with specified PS-ID and CS-ID, then detects link establishment request and establishment assignment. The result is displayed in OK/NG format. 86

87 LEVEL METER SPECIFICATIONS LF 970 Reception Section RF Input Impedance: Maximum Input: Frequency Range: Frequency Setting: Frequency Accuracy Within: Radio Access Method: Modulation Method: Transmission Rate: Measurement Level: Resolution: Accuracy: 50 Ω 100 dbµv (EMF) MHz to MHz 300 khz steps ± (25±2) TDMA-TDD /4 shift QPSK (roll-off rate=0.5) 384 kbit/s PS-TEST 0 to 60 dbµv (EMF), attenuator off 30 to 85 dbµv (EMF), attenuator on MULTI, SINGLE, TIME 0 to 85 dbµv (EMF), attenuator is switched automatically 0.1 db PS-TEST ±3 dbµv (10 dbµv to 60 dbµv) attenuator off ±3 dbµv (35 dbµv to 75 dbµv) attenuator on MULTI, SINGLE, TIME ±3 dbµv (10 dbµv to 75 dbµv) automatic attenuation Selectivity on Adjacent Channel (600 khz from carrier): 50 db CS Transmission Timing Measurement Resolution: 1µs Display Section Display Panel: STN monochrome LCD Number of Dots: 64 (V) 128 (H) dots Data Memory Function: Stores/ recalls measurement screen Number of Storable Items: 1000(depends on measurement mode) Auto Power-Off Turned off about 5 minutes after last key operation, cancellable Remote Control Connector: RS232C serial interface, 9-pin D-sub connector All control settings except power on/ off with personal computer Outputs contents stored in data memory mode to the PC. Battery Life for Continuous Operation Alkaline Battery: Approx. 6 hours (AA Cell 4) Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature: 0 to 40 C Operating Humidity: 85 % RH (without condensation) Storage Temperature: -10 to 50 C Operating Environment: Indoor and outdoor use (no rain water) Operating Altitude: up to 2,000 m Pollution degree: 2 Dimensions: 240 (H) 94 (W) 40 (D)mm Weight: Approx. 560 g (including battery) Accessories: Antenna... 1 AACell (Alkaline Battery)... 4 Safety Strap... 1 Instruction Manual... 1 Examples of Measurement Screen 87

88 SIGNAL GENERATOR Suitable for Inspection on Production Applications of Integrated Services Digital Broadcasting-Terrestrial (ISDB-T) Tuner and TV Shown with Option 71 LG 3802 (S1 version) ISDB-T SIGNAL GENERATOR GENERAL The LG 3802 ISDB-T Signal Generator with the OFDM capability conforms to Integrated Services Digital Broadcasting-Terrestrial (ISDB-T) standards for digital terrestrial TV system in Japan. This instrument features a channel coding/modulation, C/N generator, and up converter in a single package. Consequently, the modulated signal covering VHF and UHF channels can be output. Since a pseudo random signal source (PN) and BER counter are provided, the BER measurement of a TV set and tuner can be performed with this model only. In addition to the internal TS signal, the MPEG-2 TS can be externally applied. Therefore, the receiver can be checked visually and acoustically by using the existing TS. With such versatile capabilities, overall functions of the reception system can be tested. LG 3802 Rear Panel Shown with Option FEATURES All-in-one This instrument features the signal generator capability and BER measurement capability in a single package. The BER function is used to measure the front-end section, the MPEG-2 TS function is used to visually check entire system. In addition to the digital terrestrial TV broadcasting, this instrument can also be used for the connected segment transmission of 1, 3, and 8 segments in digital terrestrial audio broadcasting. Arbitrary transmission parameter settings The transmission parameter can be arbitrary set via the front panel controls. The QVGA LCD graphically displays the setting conditions. MPEG-2 TS encoding/modulation in realtime The MPEG-2 TS applied from the DVB-ASI or DVB- SPI connector can be encoded/modulated in realtime. In addition to the MPEG-2 TS, broadcasting TS prescribed in the ARIB standards can also be used. 100 preset conditions Up to 100 preset conditions can be stored in the memory. Since the stored contents can be categorized into 10 groups, the preset mode is convenient for inspection applications. OPTION Various factory options The following factory options are available: OP 71: USB STORAGE Option (factory option) The TS can be played back from the HDD drive connected via the USB, or internal HDD drive. OP72A: Fading Option (factory option) The Fading noise can be added to a mobile and portable receivers to check a ghost and multipass.

89 SIGNAL GENERATOR SPECIFICATIONS Channel Coding Section Broadcasting system Digital Terrestrial TV: Digital Terrestrial Audio: Transmission Parameter Hierarchical layer: ARIB STD-B31 ARIB STD-B29 TV: 3 layers max. Audio 3 segment: 2 layers max. Audio 1 segment: 1 layer only Mode: MODE 1, MODE 2, MODE 3 Guard Interval: 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32 Carrier Modulation: DQPSK, QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM Convolution Coding Rate: 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 Time Interleave Length: 0 to 32 (depends on broadcasting system and MODE) Number of Segments: TV: 13, each layer can arbitrary be set. Audio 3 segment: 3, each layer can arbitrary be set. Audio 1 segment: 1 Connected Segment Transmission: Settable (*1) Partial Reception: Settable (*2) Reed-Solomon Code: RF Signal Generator Section Frequency Range: Output LG 3802 (S1 version) ON/OFF, selectable *1: Segment structure is fixed. *2: For the TS not independent of PCR packet, the PCR of partial reception section cannot be updated. 50 to 860 MHz Range: -100 to +13 dbm (into 50Ω) Resolution: 0.1 db Impedance: 50 Ω Input/Output Signal Sources Internal Signal Pseudo Random Signal: Still Picture Pattern Pattern: Screen Size: Sound (Tone): DVB-ASI Signal Input Input Connector: BNC Input Impedance: 75 Ω Input Level: 0.8 Vp-p Baud Rate: 270 Mbps DVB-SPI Signal Input Input Connector: 25-pin D-sub Input Impedance: 100 Ω differential input Input Level: LVDS Input Format: MPEG-2 TS or BER count input, selectable ASI, SPI Input Specifications Input Packet Format: 188, 204 bytes Applicable Stream: MPEG-2 TS (ISO/IEC ) Input Data Rate: TV: Mbps max. (*4) Audio 3 segment: Mbps max. (*4) Audio 1 segment: Mbps max. (*4) Update Parameter: External REF Input Input Connector: Input Impedance: Input Level: Input Frequency: REF Output Output Connector: Output Impedance: Output Level: Output Frequency: BER Counter Section Input Section Packet Length: Input Connector: GO/NO-GO Function Limit Settings: GO/NO-GO Indication: C/N Generator Section C/N Variable Range: Setting Resolution: Additional Controller: External Interface Memory Card Interface Memory Card: PCR (8 max.) PTS/DTS (8 max.) (*5) Continuity counter (64 max.) (*5) *4: Maximum number of segments is obtained under the conditions below: Guard interval 1/32 Carrier modulation 64QAM Coding rate 7/8 The Maximum number of input data rate depends on the modulation parameter. *5: This function can only be used when the internal TS is repeatedly played back. BNC 50 Ω 0.8 Vp-p 10 MHz BNC 50 Ω 0 dbm 10 MHz 204 bytes (including 16-byte Reed- Solomon code) DVB-SPI INPUT connector is used. Upper and lower limits of BER can be set. Displays GO/NO-GO on the screen. 0 to 30 db 0.1 db ON/OFF, selectable Compact flash card (CFA TYPE-I, TYPE-II) ETHER Interface Specifications: 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX USB Interface Specifications: USB1.1 GPIB Connector: 24-pin square connector Specifications: Conforms to ANSI/IEEE Std Remote Control Connector: 24-pin square connector 57LE (Amphenol) Remote Mode: Recalling preset memory (INC/DEC) Input Level: TTL Display LCD : 5.7 QVGA (320 x 240) TFT color Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature: 0 to 40 C Operating Humidity: 85 % RH (without condensation) Spec-Guaranteed Temperature: 10 to 35 C Spec-Guaranteed Humidity: 85 % RH (without condensation) Operating Environment: Indoor use Operating Altitude: Up to 2000 m Overvoltage Category: II Pollution Degree: 2 Power Requirements: 90 to 250 VAC universal, 50/60 Hz Wmax. Dimensions, Weight: 426 (W) X 150 (H) X 450 (D) mm (excluding projections), 14 kg Accessories: Power cord... 1 Instruction manual

90 SIGNAL GENERATOR Ideal For The Production, Test and Alignment Of ATSC Compliant Tuners And Receivers/STBs. Shown with option 71 Shown with Option 71 LG 3803(S1 version) 8VSB/QAM SIGNAL GENERATOR GENERAL Designed to address the challenges of DTV tuner testing, the LG 3803 provides all of the signal control necessary for testing the performance of ATSC compliant tuners and receivers. The RF output can be set to emulate 8VSB, 64 and 256QAM modulation formats and the modulation frequency can be set from 50 MHz to 900 MHz covering the entire VHF and UHF spectrum. Output level ranges from -100 to +13 dbm (50 Ohm) and it is settable with 0.1dB resolution; ideal for doing input sensitivity tests. A pseudo-random (PN) generator and a BER counter are built into the instrument and facilitate easy BER measurements in a single unit. The instrument can be modulated internally (3 built in test patterns; color bars and monoscope) or can be externally modulated (DVB-ASI or SPI input). The QVGA display provides easy instrument control. The instrument can be Ethernet controlled. Remote control allows preset recall and increment; up to 100 presets can be set up and recalled aiding in the automatic testing process. LG 3803 Rear Panel FEATURES Ideal For The Production, Test and Alignment Of ATSC Compliant Tuners And Receivers/STBs. Includes 8VSB and 64QAM/256QAM Modulation Standards; Covers Both VHF And UHF Bands. Coding Modulator, C/N Generator and Upconverter Are Integrated In A Single Instrument. Built-in Pseudo-Random (PN) Signal Source And BER Counter Facilitate BER Measurements Using One Instrument. Real Time Coding And Modulation Provides Realistic Test Signals. Real Picture Playback Function Is Available As An Option Out-Of-Band Option Allows For CATV Return Path BER Evaluation Intuitive, Clear Display, 100 Presets And Ergonomic Design Make The LG 3803 The Perfect Choice For Manufacturing And Service Applications. Out-Of-Band (OOB) Testing and BER Measurements Can Be Performed By Connecting The Optional LG Out-Of-Band Generator (sold separately). OPTION Various factory options The following factory options are available: OP 71: USB STORAGE Option (factory option) The TS can be played back from the HDD drive connected via the USB, or internal HDD drive. OP 72: Fading Option (factory option) The Fading noise can be added to a mobile and portable receivers to check a ghost and multipass. Shown with Option 71 90

91 SIGNAL GENERATOR SPECIFICATIONS LG 3803 (S1 version) Channel Coding Section Broadcasting System: Modulation System: RF Signal Generator Frequency Range: Channel: Accuracy: Output Range: Resolution: Impedance: Level Accuracy: Connector: Harmonics: Spurious: Input/Output Signal Sources Internal Signal Pseudo Random Signal: Still Picture Pattern Pattern: Screen Size: Sound (Tone): DVB-ASI Input Input Connector: Input Impedance: Input Level: Baud Rate: DVB-SPI Input Input Connector: Input Impedance: Input Level: Input Format: ASI, SPI Input Specifications Input Packet Format: Applicable Stream: FREQ STD Input Input Connector: Input Impedance: Input Level: Input Frequency: FREQ STD Output Output Connector: Output Impedance: Output Frequency: 4-Wire Serial BER Input Input Connector: Input Level: Input Signal TS Clock Output Output Connector: Output Impedance: Output Level: Output Frequency: BER Counter Section Input Section Packet Length: Input Connector: GO/NO-GO Function Threshold Settings: GO/NO-GO Indication: C/N Generator Section C/N Variable Range: Setting Resolution: On/Off: External Interface Memory Card Interface Memory Card: ETHER Interface Specifications: USB Interface Specifications: GPIB Connector: Specifications: Remote Control Connector: Controllable Mode: Input Level: Display Panel LCD: Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature: Operating Humidity: Spec-Guaranteed Temperature: Spec-Guaranteed Humidity: Operating Environment: Operating Altitude: Overvoltage Category: Pollution Degree: Power Requirements Voltage: Power Consumption: Dimensions, Weight: Accessories: 91

92 SIGNAL GENERATOR LG Out-of-Band Generator LG Out Of Band GENERATOR GENERAL The LG is a companion/accessory instrument for the LG 3803(S1 version) 8VSB/QAM Signal Generator. When the 2 instruments are connected, the LG 3803(S1 version)/ pair becomes capable of providing QPSK signals compliant to USA CATV Out Of Band Standard (ANSI/SCTE 55-1, 55-2). The testing features of the LG 3803(S1 version) are extended to CATV Out of Band testing; modulator, C/N generator and up-converter are all provided in one package. As a result, BER measurements can be easily and effectively performed and digital CATV capable tuners can be fully tested (in-band and out-of-band testing). FEATURES Out-Of-Band system BER measurements cab be performed by connecting the LG to the LG 3803(S1 version) 8VSB/QAM Signal Generator via LAN. Measurement functions are controlled and displayed on the LG 3803(S1 version). LG is combined with LG 3803(S1 version) 92

93 SIGNAL GENERATOR SPECIFICATIONS LG Modulator Section Modulation System QPSK conforming to Out Of Band (ANSI/SCTE 55-1, 55-2) standards Symbol Rate: RF Signal Generator Frequency Range: Resolution: Output Range: Resolution: Impedance: Input/Output Signal Sources Internal Signal Pseudo Random Signal: FREQ STD Input Input Connector: Input Impedance: Input Level: Input Frequency: FREQ STD Output Output Connector: Output Impedance: Output Frequency: BER Serial Input Input Connector: Input Level: BER Counter Section Input Section Input Connector: GO/NO-GO Function Threshold Settings: GO/NO-GO Indication: C/N Generator Section C/N Variable Range: Setting Resolution: On/Off: External Interface Memory Card Interface Memory Card: ETHER Interface Specifications: Serial Interface Connector: Specifications: Display Panel Items Displayed: Display Element: Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature: Operating Humidity: Spec-Guaranteed Temperature: Spec-Guaranteed Humidity: Operating Environment: Operating Altitude: Overvoltage Category: Pollution Degree: Power Requirements Voltage: Power Consumption: Dimensions, Weight: Accessories: LG Rear Panel 93

94 SIGNAL GENERATOR Ideal For The Production, Test and Alignment Of DVB-T Compliant Tuners And Receivers/STBs DVB-T DVB-H DVB-C Shown with option 71 Shown with Option 71 LG 3804 DVB-T SIGNAL GENERATOR GENERAL Designed to address the challenges of DTV tuner testing, the LG 3804 provides all of the signal control necessary for testing the performance of DVB-T compliant tuners and receivers. Consequently, the modulated signal covering VHF and UHF channels can be output. Since a pseudo random signal source (PN) and BER counter are provided, the BER measurement of a TV set and tuner can be performed with this model only. In addition to the internal TS signal, the MPEG-2 TS can be externally applied. Therefore, the receiver can be checked visually and acoustically by using the existing TS. With such versatile capabilities, overall functions of the reception system can be tested. This basic model can expand applicable capabilities to DVB-C and DVB-H with various Options. FEATURES All-in-one This instrument features the signal generator capability and BER measurement capability in a single package. The BER function is used to measure the front-end section, the MPEG-2 TS function is used to visually check entire system. Also, such features are ideal for the production line of STB and tuners. Arbitrary transmission parameter settings The transmission parameter can be arbitrary set via the front panel controls. The QVGA LCD graphically displays the setting conditions. MPEG-2 TS encoding/modulation in realtime The MPEG-2 TS applied from the DVB-ASI or DVB-SPI connector can be encoded/modulated in realtime. 100 preset conditions Up to 100 preset conditions can be stored in the memory. Since the stored contents can be categorized into 10 groups, the preset mode is convenient for inspection applications. LG 3804 Rear Panel Shown with Option 71 OPTION Various factory options The following factory options are available: OP 71: USB STORAGE Option (factory option) The TS can be played back from the HDD drive connected via the USB, or internal HDD drive. OP 72: Fading Option (factory option) The fading noise can be added to a mobile and portable receivers to check a ghost and multipass. OP 73: DVB-H ADD-IN SOFTWARE This add-in software adds the DVB-H capability to the Model OP 74: DVB-C ADD-IN SOFTWARE This add-in software adds the DVB-C capability to the Model

95 SIGNAL GENERATOR SPECIFICATIONS LG 3804 Channel Coding Section Broadcasting system: Digital Terrestrial (DVB-T) Band Width: 6 MHz/7 MHz/8 MHz Carrier Modulation: COFDM QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM Convolution Coding Rate: 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 FFT Mode: 2K, 8K Guard Interval: 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32 RF Signal Generator Section Frequency Range: 30 to 960 MHz Output Range: -100 to +13 dbm (into 50 Ω), ON/OFF Selectable Resolution: 0.1 db Impedance: 50 Ω Output Connector: N type Input/Output Signal Sources Internal Signal Pseudo Random Signal: PN15/PN23 Still Picture Pattern: Color bar, ramp, monoscope seamless Play (*1) Screen Size: 16:9 (HD), 4:3(SD) (*1) Sound (Tone): 1 khz(lr), 400 Hz(LR), 1 khz(l)+400 Hz(R) (*1) *1: Specifications are subject to change without notice. DVB-ASI Signal Input Input: Input Connector: Input Impedance: Input Level: Baud Rate: DVB-SPI Signal Input Input Connector: Input Impedance: Input Level: Input Format: HP, LP BNC 75 Ω 0.8 Vp-p 270 Mbps 25-pin D-sub 100 Ω differential input LVDS MPEG-2 TS or BER count input, selectable ASI, SPI Input Specifications Input Packet Format: 188, 204 bytes Applicable Stream: MPEG-2 TS (ISO/IEC ) FREQ STD Input Input Connector: BNC Input Impedance: 50 Ω Input Level: 0.8 Vp-p Input Frequency: 10 MHz FREQ STD Output Output Connector: BNC Output Impedance: 50 Ω Output Frequency: 10 MHz TS Out Output: BNC Output Impedance: 75 Ω Output Format: MPEG-2 TS IF Signal Output Output Connector: BNC Output Impedance: 50 Ω Output Frequency: 140 MHz 4-Wire Serial BER Input Input Connector: BNC Input Level: LVTTL 3.3 V Input Signal: CLOCK, DATA, VALID, SYNC BER Counter Section Input Section Packet Length: 188, 204 bytes Input Connector: DVB-SPI INPUT connector and serial input connector are used. GO/NO-GO Function Limit Settings: Upper and lower limits of BER can be set. GO/NO-GO Indication: Displays GO/NO-GO on the screen. C/N Generator Section C/N Variable Range: 0 to 40 db Setting Resolution: 0.1 db Additional Controller: ON/OFF, selectable External Interface Memory Card Interface Memory Card: Compact flash card (CFA TYPE-I, TYPE-II) ETHER Interface Specifications: 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX USB Interface Specifications: USB1.1 GPIB Connector: 24-pin square connector Specifications: Conforms to ANSI/IEEE Std Display LCD : 5.7 QVGA (320 x 240) TFT color Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature: 0 to 40 ºC Operating Humidity: 85 % RH (without condensation) Spec-Guaranteed Temperature: 10 to 35 ºC Spec-Guaranteed Humidity: 85 % RH (without condensation) Operating Environment: Indoor use Operating Altitude: Up to 2000 m Overvoltage Category: II Pollution Degree: 2 Power Requirements: Power Consumption: 90 to 250 VAC universal, 50/60 Hz 150 W max. Dimensions, Weight: 426 (W) X 150 (H) X 450 (D) mm (excluding projections), 14 kg Accessories: Power cord... 1 Instruction manual... 1 OPTION OP71: USB STORAGE Option (factory option) HDD Capacity: 80 GB USB Specification: Function: Play Back Loop Playback: Memory Playback: Playback Range: OP72: Fading Option (factory option) OP73: DVB-H ADD-IN SOFTWARE OP74: DVB-C ADD-IN SOFTWARE USB2.0 To connect an external HDD applicable to USB2.0, or internal HDD drive Possible (not applicable to seamless) Possible (ON/OFF Selectable) Possible (settable in time) * License This add-in software can only be used for a single LG 3804 main frame; not for multiple main frames. 95

96 SIGNAL GENERATOR Cost-effective, high stable, 170 MHz wide band 100 khz to 170 MHz LG 3236 (S1 Version) AM/FM STEREO SIGNAL GENERATOR Equipped with a simultaneous AM/FM modulation function. Two systems of low-distortion, fixed oscillators are provided as AF oscillators, and the AM/FM and the L and R of FM stereo can be set to different frequencies. The variable DDS oscillator is provided allowing arbitrary AF frequencies to be specified in 1-Hz resolution. The FM modulation supports up to 200 khz and AM modulation up to 100 %. In addition, a wide bandwidth of external modulation up to 100 khz is supported for both FM and AM. FM stereo modulator is equipped. Since the GPIB interface is provided as standard, this instrument can be incorporated into a GPIB measurement system. The numeric keys are used for setting the frequency, output level, and modulation factor. Up to 100 preset conditions consisting of frequency, output level, and modulation can be stored to internal memory. All front panel switches (except power switch) can be remotely controlled via the 24-pin connector on the rear panel. An SCA input connector and a PILOT output connector are provided for connecting instruments such as an external FM multiple signal generator. (S1 Version) GENERAL The LG 3236 Synthesized Standard Signal Generator covers a wide frequency range of 100 khz to 170 MHz and provides FM/AM modulation capability. The highaccuracy crystal-controlled reference oscillator ensures highly stable RF frequency of ±5 x 10-6 (5 ppm). The solid-state step attenuator is used for the RF output system to extend service life (because there is no mechanical contact), and is suited to frequent changes in output level such as in automatic production and inspection applications. For modulation functions, the LG 3236 is equipped with a high-quality stereo FM modulator. The AM modulator supports up to 100 %. In addition, the LG 3236 is equipped with a simultaneous AM/FM modulation function (2 Audio Frequency systems) and a DDS AF oscillator that covers a frequency range of 20 Hz to 20 khz. FM stereo modulator and simultaneous FM/AM modulation capability is equipped. FEATURES Oscillation frequency is locked to a high-accuracy reference oscillator to ensure accuracy of ±5 x 10-6 (5 ppm). The solid-state step attenuator is used for the RF output system to extend service life (because there is no mechanical contact), and is suited to frequent changes in output level such as in automatic production and inspection applications. The RF frequency covers a wide range of 100 khz to 170 MHz. The output level can be set in the range of -20 dbµ to 126 dbµ (0 dbµ = 1 µv, 50 Ω into open circuit) in 0.1 db steps. 96

97 SIGNAL GENERATOR SPECIFICATIONS LG 3236 (S1 Version) Frequency Range: 100 khz to 170 MHz Resolution: 100 Hz (100 khz to MHz) 1 khz (40 MHz to 170 MHz) Setting: Ten-key pad, digit-select key and rotary knob Accuracy: ±5 X 10-6 ( 500 khz) ±(5 X digit) (< 500 khz) Display: 6 digits Output Level Range: -20 dbµ to 126 dbµ (0 dbµ = 1 µv, 50 Ω into open circuit) Resolution: 0.1 db Setting: Ten-key pad, digit-select key and rotary knob Output Level Accuracy: ± 1 db (output 0 dbµ) ± 1.5 db (output < 0 dbµ) Impedance: 50 Ω VSWR 1.4 Spurious Output: -25 dbc Display: 4 digits Modulation Frequency Modulation(FM) Deviation: 0 to 200 khz ( 2 MHz) 0 to 1/10 of carrier frequency (<2 MHz) Display: 3 digits Resolution: 0.1 khz (< 100 khz), 1 khz ( 100 khz) Modulation Accuracy: ± (preset value X ) khz Distortion: 0.05 % (10.7 ± 1 MHz, 76 to 108 MHz) 0.1 % (other frequencies) ( 1 khz modulation frequency, 75 khz deviation, 50 Hz to 15 khz demodulation bandwidth, 50 µs de-emphasis/am OFF) Residual FM: 78 db S/N at 75 khz deviation (10.7 MHz, 76 to 108 MHz) (50 Hz to 15 khz demodulation bandwidth. 50 µs de-emphasis/am OFF) Pre-emphasis: The deviation at AF =1 khz is reduced by approximately 20 db when pre-emphasis is turned ON. The deviation increases according to the pre-emphasis characteristics as the AF frequency increases FM Stereo Separation: 55 db (AF 1 khz, 75 khz deviation, 76 to 108 MHz) Mode: MAIN, SUB, L, R Pilot Signal Frequency : 19 khz ±1 Hz Deviation: 0 to 10 khz Display: 3 digits Resolution: 0.1 khz Accuracy: ± (preset value X ) khz Pilot Output Signal Output Level : 1 Vrms (into open circuit) Output Impedance: 600 Ω SCA Signal Input Input Reference Level : 1 Vrms Input Impedance: 10 kω Amplitude Modulation(AM) Depth: 0 to 100 % ( 123 dbµ) 0 to 60 % (>123 dbµ) Display: 3 digits Resolution: 0.1 % Accuracy: ± (preset value X ) %( 99 %) Distortion: 0.3 % (30 %AM, 123 dbµ 200 khz to 2 MHz) 0.5 %(30 %AM, 126 dbµ 200 khz to 2 MHz) 1.0 % ( 90 %AM, 123 dbµ) (AF 1 khz, 50 Hz to 15 khz demodulation bandwidth, excluding the range MHz±10 khz.fm OFF) Residual AM: 55 db (S/N at 30 % depth, 200 khz to 2 MHz) (50 Hz to 15 khz demodulation bandwidth, FM OFF) Internal Modulation Frequency (1) Fixed Oscillators(2 System) Frequency: Accuracy: ± 5 % (2) DDS Oscillators Frequency: 20 Hz to 20 khz Resolution: 1 Hz Frequency Accuracy: ±0.01 % ±1 digit External Modulation Input Impedance: 10 kω Reference Input Voltage: 1.0 Vrms Frequency Range: 400 Hz, 1 khz (An oscillator generates both frequencies, selectable.) FM : 20 Hz to 100 khz(mono) AM : 20 Hz to 12 khz(<2.5 MHz) 20 Hz to 20 khz(<10 MHz) 20 Hz to 100 khz( 10 MHz) Flatness: Simultaneous Modulation Function (1) Combination with the Monaural FM Modulator INT FM + INT AM INT FM + EXT AM EXT FM+ INT AM EXT FM+ EXT AM (2) Combination with the Stereo FM Modulation INT FM STEREO EXT FM STEREO INT FM[L] / INT FM[R] INT FM[L] / EXT FM[R] EXT FM[L] / INT FM[R] EXT FM[L] / EXT FM[R] Within ± 1 db (1 khz reference) INT AM + or EXT AM Preset: Up to 100 preset conditions consisting of frequency, output level, and modulation can be stored to internal memory. RF Leakage: Low enough not to cause measurement interference under 0 dbµ (1 µv) conditions. Remote Control: All front panel switches (except power switch) can be remotely controlled. GPIB: IEEE Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature: 0 to 40 C Operating Humidity: 85 % RH (without condensation) Spec-Guaranteed Temperature: 10 to 35 C Spec-Guaranteed Humidity: 85 % RH (without condensation) Operating Environment: Indoor use Operating Altitude: Up to 2,000 m Overvoltage Category: Pollution Degree: 2 Power Requirements: AC 100, 120, 220, 240 V ±10 %, 250 Vmax. 50/60 Hz Dimensions and Weight: 426 (W) x 99 (H) x 300 (D) mm, 8 kg Accessories: Power cord... 1 Instruction manual

98 SIGNAL GENERATOR RDS(EON), TRI, FM Stereo, AM SSG 100 khz to 140 MHz 3217 RDS STANDARD SIGNAL GENERATOR All front-panel switches except the power switch can be remotely controlled. The GPIB interface (conforming to IEEE 488.2) is provided as standard, enabling direct use of the 3217 in GPIB-based automated measurement systems. GENERAL The 3217 is a synthesized RDS Standard Signal Generator covering 100 khz to 140 MHz with CW, FM, and AM modulated outputs. It boasts an internal FM stereo generator, as well as FM multiplex RDS (Radio Data System) and TRI (Traffic Radio Information) signal generators. The model 3217 can be used for the receiving test of U.S. RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data Standard) receiver. RDS Data Editing Software (Option) is provided. FS 3015 Version 2 (Application software for Windows 2000/XP) The creation and changing of RDS message is easy with most Windows application software. RDS automatic messaging generation provides easy introduction of the test systems to the manufacturing / testing facility. The adoption of the USB GPIB converter (indispensable option with additional payment) is available for immediate use on Windows2000/XP operating system (PC with the USB terminal is necessary.) regardless of the make of the desktop or notebook. (No GPIB driver Installation required.) Remote setting to 3217 from FS 3015 is available. FEATURES The standard signal generator includes an RDS signal generator and a stereo signal generator, making it ideal for use in RDS receiver production line applications. RDS patterns accommodate the EON (Enhanced Other Network) function. TRI signal generation provided as standard. Signals conforming to two USA/EBU systems can be generated. Up to 512 groups of RDS signal data can be stored internally, and up to 16 patterns of a maximum data length of 255 groups for each pattern can also be stored internally. Output level can be set in the range 20 to 126 dbµ(0 dbµ=1 µv, 50 Ω, open circuit) in 0.1 db steps. The frequency, output level, and modulation factor can be input using numeric keys, or rotary encoder and digit select keys. Up to 100 sets of frequency, output level, and modulation factor can be stored as presets in internal memory. 98

99 SIGNAL GENERATOR SPECIFICATIONS 3217 Frequency Range: Accuracy: Output Range: Impedance: FM Frequency Deviation: Display: Resolution: Modulation Accuracy: Distortion: Residual FM: Pre-emphasis: a. Stereo Signal Separation: Mode: Composite Output Level: Impedance: b. Pilot Signal Frequency: Frequency Deviation: Display: Resolution: Modulation Accuracy: Output Level: Impedance: AM Modulation Factor: Distortion Internal Modulation frequency Frequency: Accuracy: External Modulation Input Impedance: Reference Input Voltage: Frequency Range: Frequency Response: Pre-emphasis: FM Multiplex A. RDS (Radio Data System) a. Subcarrier Frequency: Phase: Frequency Deviation: Resolution: Modulation Accuracy: Display: b. RDS Message: c. Internal Reference Data Number of Patterns: Maximum Number of Groups: Maximum Pattern Length: Data Input: 100 khz to 140 MHz ± ( 500 khz) ±( digit) (<500 khz) 20 to 126 dbµ (0 dbµ=1 µv, into open circuit) 50 Ω 0 to 99.9 khz ( 1 MHz) 0 to 1/10 of carrier frequency (<1 MHz) 3-digit 0.1 khz ± (preset value 0.1+1) khz 0.05 % (10.7 MHz ±1 MHz, 76 to 108 MHz) 0.1 % (other frequencies) (1 khz, 75 khz deviation,demodulated band: 50 Hz to 15 khz, 50 µs de-emphasis) 73 db or greater S/N for 75 khz deviation ( 110 MHz), (demodulated band: 50 Hz to 15 khz, 50 µs de-emphasis) OFF, 25, 50, 75 µs 55 db (1 khz, 75 khz deviation, 76 to 108 MHz) MAIN, SUB, L, R 1 Vrms max., into open circuit 75 Ω 19 khz ±1 Hz 0 to 10.0 khz 3-digit 0.1 khz ± (preset value ) khz 1 Vrms, into open circuit 600 Ω 0 to 80.0 % (500 to 1799 khz) 0 to 60.0 % (other frequencies) 0.5 % max. (150 khz to 2 MHz) 1.5 % max. (other frequencies) (1 khz, 30 % modulation, demodulated bandwidth: 50 Hz to 15 khz) Select one of following seven frequencies: 30 Hz, 100 Hz, 400 Hz, 1 khz, 6.3 khz, 10 khz, 15 khz ±3 % 10 kω 1.0 V rms FM: 20 Hz to 100 khz AM: 20 Hz to 10 khz Within ±1 db (1 khz reference) OFF, 25, 50, 75 µs (FM only) 57 khz ±3 Hz 0 or 90 (with respect to the 3rd harmonic of pilot signal) 0 to 7.5 khz 0.1 khz ± (preset value ) khz 2-digit EON, PI, PIN, PS, PTY, RT, TA, TP, AF, CT, DI, MS, etc. 16 (0 to F) groups TTL level (on rear panel) Clock Output: d. User-defined Internal Data Number of Patterns: Maximum Number of Groups: Maximum Pattern Length: B. TRI (Traffic Radio Information) a. EBU System SK (Transmitter Identification Code) Frequency: Phase: Frequency Deviation: Resolution: Modulation Accuracy: Display: 2-digit DK (Announcement Identification Code) Modulation Signal: Modulation Factor: Resolution: Modulation Accuracy: Display: BK (Area Identification Code) Modulation Signal: Modulation Factor: Resolution: Modulation Accuracy: Display: b. USA System 57kHz Pilot Frequency: Phase: Frequency Deviation: Resolution: Modulation Accuracy: Display: ME (Message Signal) Modulation Signal: Modulation Factor: Resolution: Modulation Accuracy: Display: ZO (Zone Signal) Modulation Signal: Modulation Factor: Resolution: Modulation Accuracy: Display: Remote Control: GPIB: Environmental Conditions Operating: Spec-Guaranteed: Operating Environment: Operating Altitude: Overvoltage Category: Pollution degree: Power Requirements: Dimensions and Weight: Accessories: (1/ k) bit/s TTL level (on rear panel) 16 (U0 to UF) groups 57 khz ±3 Hz 0 (with respect to the 3rd harmonic of the pilot signal) 0 to 7.5 khz 0.1 khz ± (preset value ) khz DK (125 Hz) 0 to 40 % 1 % ± (preset value )% 2-digit A to F (23.75 to Hz) 0 to 80 % 1 % ± (preset value )% 2-digit 57 khz±3 Hz 0 (with respect to the 3rd harmonic of the pilot signal) 0 to 7.5 khz 0.1 khz ± (preset value ) khz 2-digit ME1 (142.5 Hz), ME2 (154.9 Hz) 0 to 80 % 1 % ± (preset value )% 2-digit 1 to 10 (23.75 to Hz) 0 to 80 % 1 % ± (preset value )% 2-digit All controls on the front panel can be remote-controlled except the power switch and local key. Provided as standard (conforming to ANSI/IEEE Std ). Temperature: 0 to 40 C Humidity: 85 % RH(without condensation) Temperature: 10 to 35 C Humidity: 85 % RH(without condensation) Indoor use up to 2,000m 2 100, 120, 220, 240 VAC ±10 % (250 V max.), 50/60 Hz, 55 VA 426 (W) 99 (H) 400 (D) mm, 11 kg BNC-BNC cable (3D-2V, 1 m)... 1 Power cord... 1 Instruction manual

100 SWEEP GENERATOR Realizes substantial labor saving on production lines at low cost! LW 360 DIGITAL TUNER MEASURING SYSTEM GENERAL The LW 360 is a comprehensive measuring system that integrates the necessary functions for adjusting and testing electronic TV tuners. It inherits the design concepts of the conventional LW 347/348 and is fully compatible. Various functions have been enhanced such as expanded power supply terminals for tuners, increased current capacity, and expanded tuner control signals to support the next generation tuners. In addition, improved printout and interface functions achieve high efficiency in production lines and enable the LW 360 to be used in a wide range of applications such as evaluation of tuners in the design and quality assurance departments. FEATURES [Multi-Functionality and High Performance] Support for VHF, UHF, CATV, and Digital TV Tuners Sweep from 25 MHz to 1 GHz to cover FM, VHF, UHF, and CATV channels. IF input frequency from 1 MHz to 120 MHz provide support even for terrestrial digital broadcasting tuners and FM tuners. Easy Editing and Data Evaluation with the Multi Screen Display The XGA display enables clear 4 screen display. When editing the settings, all items can be modified while monitoring the measured waveforms. The 4 screen waveform display shows up to 12 channels of measured waveforms simultaneously, which is convenient for tuner evaluation and data acquisition. The waveform colors are selectable. Integration of Power Supplies for Tuners and Control Signals The LW 360 is equipped with all the functions necessary for tuner operation such as power supplies to drive the tuners (Vt, +B, AGC, AFT, etc.), voltage/current measurement of control outputs, and PLL tuner control (supports I 2 C, 3Wire, and CCB). I 2 C control signals are supported up to 256 bytes. Wide Variety of Measured Parameters Covers all the measured parameters of the conventional LW 347/348 plus additional convenient functions. [Suitable for Product Evaluation in Development and Quality Assurance Departments] Powerful Data Acquisition Capability Various data such as waveform data and measured results can be printed and saved to memory cards. These features are convenient for the product evaluation and report generation in the development and quality assurance departments. The support for Ethernet and RS232C enables data and screen images to be transmitted to an external PC. [Careful Consideration to Product Lines] Support for Small Scale Production of Various Products Settings can be stored to the LW 360 or memory cards enabling quick switching of lines. Integrated functions necessary for measurements also facilitate line switching. Network Support Supports 10/100BASE-T. The interface can be used to acquire test data, transmit tuner models, etc. RS232C interface is also provided. Compatibility with Conventional Models Tuner model data used on the conventional LW 347/348 can be loaded directly allowing effective use of past resources. LW 360 Rear Panel 100

101 SWEEP GENERATOR SPECIFICATIONS LW 360 Measurement Standard Measurement Items (FIXED ITEM): 16 (Factory installed) ± ± ± ± ± ± ± User Defined Measurement Items: Setting Items: Operational Measurement Function Selections: RF Signal Output Section Synthesized Sweep Signal Generator Section Frequency Range: Sweep Mode: Output Section Output Level: Attenuator: VSWR Measurement Bridge Frequency Range: Built-in Amplifier: Directivity: Receiving Section IF Signal Input Section Frequency Range: ± Input Level Range: Auto-Tracking Function: IF Signal Detector Frequency Range: Detection Signal Input Section Input System: Max. Input: ARC Function: ± Tuner Interface Section Power Supply for Tuner (Output and Short-Circuit Sensor: ON/ OFF Program Control) Vt Auto Function Operation: PLL Tuner Frequency Control Output Tuner: Control Signal: Tuner Control Terminal Measurement Section [Vt IN] Input Voltage Range: [AGC, AFT] Input: Input Voltage Range: [LOCK IN] Operation: [TU SET SENSOR] Operation: Total Judgement Output Output: Monitor Display Display Output: Displayed Contents: Measurement Waveform Number of Waveforms: Display Scale: Marker Display Marker Type: IF Marker: RF Marker: Marker Points: GO/NO GO Judgment Judgment Result Display: Total Judgement Result Display: Measurement Condition Setting Method Input Method: Number of Settable Models: Number of Settable Steps: Setting Items: Panel Control: Remote Control Control: Function: Memory Card Interface Memory Card (sold separately): Function: Printer Interface Measurement Waveform Output: Connector: RS232C Interface Function: LAN Interface (Ethernet) Function: Type: USB Interface Type: Function: Environment Conditions Operating Temperature: Operating Humidity: Spec-Guaranteed Temperature: Spec-Guaranteed Humidity: Operating Environment: Operating Altitude: Overvoltage Category: Pollution Degree: Power Requirements: Power Consumption: Dimensions and Weight: Accessories: Ω 101

102 AUDIO Applicable to Blu-ray Disc Ideal for Analyzing Jitter of x1, x2-speed Disc and Optical Pickup LE 1876 DIGITAL PROCESSING JITTER ANALYZER GENERAL The LE 1876 Jitter Analyzer is designed to measure the jitter conforming to Blu-ray Disc (Part 1, version 1.0, June 2002) standards. Since the Limit Equalizer (applicable to x2 speed of Bluray Disc standards), PLL clock regenerator, and jitter measurement section are provided as standard, x2 speed of HF signal can be measured. A large LCD panel displays jitter in histogram format, this instrument can be used for analyzing jitter. Jitter measurement units for a DVD/CD or HFM are optionally available. Thus, jitter of DVD and CD, and HF and HFM of Blu-ray Disc can be measured using a single unit. Optional GPIB and LAN are convenience to construct an automatic measurement system and ensure quality control. FEATURES Features on Blu-ray Disc measurement Equipped with the Equalizer conforming to Blu-ray Disc standards The Conventional Equalizer and Limit Equalizer conforming to x1 speed described in Blu-ray Disc standards are provided as standard. The Conventional Equalizer mode and Limit Equalizer mode are selectable. The boost level of pre-equalizer can be varied. Applicable to three types of media Jitter of Blu-ray Disc with disc capacity of 23.3 GB, 25.0 GB, and 27.0 GB can be measured. Measures the jitter of all-t components conforming to Blu-ray Disc standards (Also applicable to x2 speed) Measures all components of 2T to 8T and 9T of the HF (DATA) signal with respect to the CLOCK signal, then displays it as jitter in sigma format. Various jitter measurement modes (e.g., sum of all-t components, each T in pulse width mode) are also provided. Confirming to x2 speed prescribed in Blu-ray Disc standards The equalizer applicable to the x2 speed confirming to Blu-ray Disc standards is provided to measure jitter of x2 speed HF (DATA) signal. Three polarity modes Rising edge, falling edge, and both edges of HF (DATA) signal can be selected. Applicable dual-layer disc The 2T component can be eliminated in DATA to CLOCK measurement mode used when inspecting a dual-layer disc. 102 High sensitivity The HF (DATA) with a signal level between 0.1 Vp-p and 2.0 Vp-p can be measured. Various monitor outputs Input signal and equalized signal can be monitored. DC voltage in proportion to the meter indication is output. Frequency check mode Clock signal frequency regenerated by the PLL can be measured. Auto slicer Auto slicer conforming to Blu-ray Disc standards is provide. Displaying jitter in unit of ns or % The absolute jitter value can be displayed in units of nanoseconds (ns). Jitter can also be displayed in units of percentage (%) measured with respect to the clock signal. No period setting is required since the clock is automatically regenerated from the HF (DATA) signal. Jitter measurement in time domain format Jitter of all-t components in the HF (DATA) signal is displayed in histogram format. Simultaneous display of jitter in histogram format and sigma value Jitter can be simultaneously displayed on the large color LCD panel in histogram format, sigma value, and average value. The clock frequency can also be displayed simultaneously. Jitter variation measurement mode Since jitter in sigma value and average value can be displayed in time domain format, long-term measurement and management are possible. ARMING/INHIBIT capabilities Two useful modes are provided: INHIBIT function to inhibit jitter measurement of faulty block (e.g., track jumping) on a disc, ARMING function to set the block to be measured. The delay time, measurement time, and number of gating operations with respect to the ARMING/INHIBIT signal applied can be set. The gating status can be monitored on the oscilloscope through the monitor output. One-shot measurement mode Repetition and one-shot measurement modes are provided. Features on Production Line GO/NO GO judgment mode convenient for production line HF (DATA) signal jitter measurement results are compared with the preset judgment limits, then results are displayed on the LED. The result can also be output. Simple operation Speed, judgment reference, number of sampling, response time, and slice level can easily be set with a jog dial. Universal voltage Since this instrument operates on 90 to 250 V, it can be used throughout the world.

103 SPECIFICATIONS LE 1876 Input Section HF INPUT (1 7 modulation signal input) Input Coupling: Measurement Voltage Range: Input Range: Input Impedance: Auto Slicer: Maximum Input Voltage: Measurement Control (ARMING IN/INHIBIT IN) Input Impedance: 10 kω Input Signal Level: 0 /+5 V Maximum Input Voltage: -0.7 V/+5.7 V Equalizer Section (1) x1 Speed Conforms to Blu-ray Disc (Part 1, version 1.0) standards. Applicable Format: Channel Bit Rate: Equalizer Mode: Conventional Equalizer Gain Variable Range: Gain Accuracy: Group Delay Deviation: (2) x2 Speed (Undecided) Applicable Format: Channel Bit Rate: Equalizer Mode: Conventional Equalizer Gain Variable Range: Gain Accuracy: Group Delay Deviation: Jitter Measurement Section Applicable Speed: HF: Measurement Mode: Measurement Resolution: Display Resolution: max. min: σ, AVERAGE: σ/t: Measurement Accuracy Sigma Value: Polarity Selection DATA: CLOCK: Measurement Item: Unit Displayed: Measurement Results Display: Number of Samples: 1,000,000 max. Measurement Control Section (ARMING/INHIBIT function) Measurement Control: ARMING mode/inhibit mode Electrical Characteristics Input Impedance: 10 kω Input Signal Level: 0 /+5 V Maximum Input Voltage: -0.7 V/+5.7 V INHIBIT ENABLE: HIGH/LOW COUNT: 1 to 50, in 1 steps ARMING SLOPE: RISE/FALL COUNT: 1 to 50, in 1 steps START DLY: 0 to µs (in 1 µ steps min.) LENGTH MODE: SAMPLE/TIME LENGTH: Clock Regenerator (DATA to CLOCK mode only) Regenerates reference clock signal from DATA signal input. HF: x1 speed: 66 MHz ±8 %, x2 speed: 132 MHz ±8 % Clock Frequency Measurement Section (DATA to CLOCK mode only) Measurement Range HF: Measurement Accuracy Judgment Section Outputs GO/NO GO results of jitter and frequency measured with respect to the preset value. LCD Panel: Output Section MONITOR OUT To monitor the HF signal input. Output Impedance: Output Amplitude: Output Connector: EQUALIZER OUT To monitor equalized HF signal input. Output Impedance: 50 Ω Output Amplitude: 0.8 Vp-p ±30 % (into 50 Ω) Output Connector: BNC DIGITAL OUT (DATA, CLOCK) Outputs binarized DATA signal and clock signal regenerated by PLL. Output Signal: Output Amplitude: Output Offset Voltage: Output Connector: DC OUT Output Accuracy: Output Item: Maximum Input Voltage: GATE MONITOR To monitor arming/inhibit control signals. Output Amplitude: TTL level Output Impedance: 1 kω Remote Control Section Dedicated Remote Control Connector Communicates judgment results and front panel settings. Front Panel Setting Pins Input Level: Maximum Input Voltage: Judgment Results Output Pins GO: NO GO: Maximum Current Output: AC 0.1 to 2.0 Vp-p 3 ranges 0.3 V range: 0.1 to 0.3 Vp-p 0.9 V range: 0.3 to 0.9 Vp-p 2.0 V range: 0.9 to 2.0 Vp-p 50 Ω AUTO (Response time constant x1 speed: 10 khz x2 speed: 20 khz) ±2.5 V 1-7 PP modulation 66 MHz Conventional Equalizer Mode or Limit Equalizer Mode, selectable 0 to 8 db (36 steps) ±0.5 db 2.0 nsp-p (5.8 db: 3 MHz to 16.5 MHz) 1-7 PP modulation 132 MHz Conventional Equalizer Mode or Limit Equalizer Mode, selectable 0 to 8 db (36 steps) ±0.5 db 2.0 nsp-p (5.8 db: 6 MHz to 33 MHz) Applicable Speed Clock frequency x1 speed: 66 MHz ±4 % x2 speed: 132 MHz ±4 % DATA to CLOCK, PERIOD mode, sum of all-t data in PE- RIOD mode, PULSE WIDTH mode, sum of all-t data in PULSE WIDTH mode, D to C2E 12.5 ps min ps min. 10 ps min. 0.01% min. ±5 %,, BOTH (fixed) AVERAGE, max, min, σ, σ max, σ min, σ/t, σ/t max, σ/t min ns, % Numeric value, bar graph, histogram, TIME DEVIATION, BOTH for separate display 0.01 to µs (in 1 µ steps min.)(time only) x1 speed: MHz to MHz x2 speed: MHz to MHz ±0.1 % Judgment results for selected measurement item Selected item: σ, σ max, σ min,σ/t, σ/t max, σ/t min, max, min, AVE, DEV, DEV max, DEV min, FREQUENCY 50 Ω Up to 2.0 Vp-p ±30 % (into 50 Ω, in proportion to input signal) BNC DATA signal, CLOCK signal 0.15 Vp-p (into 50 Ω) 0.34 V (into 50 Ω) BNC ±2 % Jitter (full scale voltage variable) 2 V 0 /5 V(pulled-up with 47-kΩ resistor) -0.7/+5.7 V +5 V (open drain output, pulled-up with 47-kΩ resistor) 0 V 10 ma 103 RS232C Interface Communication: Baud Rate: Others Display Mode: Store/Recall Media: Items Stored: Printing Screen Data Print Media: Memory Card Applicable Card: Card Manufacturers Recommended: Display: Environmental Conditions Operating: Spec-Guaranteed: Storage: Operating Environment: Operating Altitude: Overvoltage Category: Pollution Degree: Power Requirements: Dimensions and Weight: Accessories: OPTION OP71 DVD/CD Measurement Input Section DATA INPUT (EFM/8-16 modulation signal input) Input Coupling: Measurement Voltage Range: Input Impedance Slice Level VARIABLE: AUTO (ASYMMETRY ON): Maximum Input Voltage Jitter Measurement Section Applicable Speed DVD: CD: Measurement Mode DVD: CD: Unit Displayed: Measurement Resolution: Display Resolution: Measurement Accuracy Sigma Value: Average Value: Polarity Selection DATA: CLOCK: Measurement Item: Measurement Results Display: Number of Samples: 1,000,000 max. Clock Frequency Measurement Section (DVD, DATA to CLOCK mode only) Measurement Range: 24.3 MHz to 59.4 MHz Measurement Accuracy: ±0.1% Clock Regenerator (DVD, DATA to CLOCK mode only) Regenerates reference clock signal from DATA signal input. HF: x1 speed: 27 MHz ±8 %, x2 speed :54 MHz ±8 % OP72 HFM Measurement Input Section Input Coupling: AC Measurement Voltage Range: 50 mv to 5 Vp-p Input Impedance: 1 MΩ/50 Ω, selectable Frequency Range: x1 speed: 8 MHz, x2 speed: 16 MHz Slice Level: ±2.5 V (VARIABLE) Maximum Input Voltage: ±5 V Jitter Measurement Section Measurement Range: Clock Frequency Measurement Mode: Measurement Resolution: Display Resolution max. min: σ, AVERAGE: σ/t: Measurement Accuracy Sigma Value: Polarity Selection DATA: CLOCK: Measurement Item: Unit Displayed: Measurement Results Display: OP71 and OP72 can not be installed together. OP73 and OP74 can not be installed together. Controls function, outputs data bps max. HIST: Histogram BAR: Bar graph DATA: Statistical value TIME: Time deviation JUDGE: GO/NO GO judgment Internal memory, memory card Measurement data (waveform), internal settings Memory card Interface: Conforms to PC CARD ATA standards SanDisk 5.7 STN LCD, color, 1/4 VGA Temperature: 0 to 40 C Humidity: 85 % RH (without condensation) Temperature: 10 to 30 C Humidity: 85 % RH (without condensation) Temperature: 0 to 50 C Indoor use Up to 2,000 m II 2 90 to 250 VAC, 50/ 60 Hz, 35 Wmax. 213 (W) x 132 (H) x 300 (D) mm, 4.7 kg power cord... 1 Instruction manual... 1 AC (2 Hz/1 khz, selectable) 50 mv to 5 Vp-p 1 MΩ/50 Ω, selectable ±2.5 V 20 Hz/1 khz/5 khz/10 khz, selectable ±5 V Clock Frequency PW, PD: 24.3 MHz to 59.4 MHz DT to CK: x1 speed: 27 MHz ±10 % x2 speed: 54 MHz ±10 % x1, x2, x4, x6, x8, x10, x12 speed PERIOD mode, sum of all-t data in PERIOD mode, PULSE WIDTH mode, sum of all-t data in PULSE WIDTH mode, DATA to CLOCK PULSE WIDTH mode, sum of all-t data in PULSE WIDTH mode ns, % 50 ps 0.01 ns ±4 % ±0.15 ns ±1 ns,, BOTH +, - AVERAGE, max, min, σ, σ max, σ min, σ/t, σ/t max, σ/t min Numeric value, bar graph, histogram, TIME DEVIATION, BOTH for separate display PW: 3.37 MHz to 7.92 MHz DT to CK: x1 speed: MHz ±8 % x2 speed: MHz ±8 % DATA to CLOCK, PERIOD mode, sum of all-t data in PE- RIOD mode, PULSE WIDTH mode, sum of all-t data in PULSE WIDTH mode 50 ps 50 ps 10 ps 0.01 % ±5 % AUDIO,, BOTH (fixed) AVERAGE, max, min, σ, σ max, σ min, σ/t, σ/t max, σ/t min ns, % Numeric value, bar graph, histogram, TIME DEVIATION, BOTH for separate display Number of Samples: 1,000,000 max. Clock Regenerator (DATA to CLOCK mode only) Regenerates reference clock signal from DATA signal input. HFM: x1 speed: MHz ±8 %, x2 speed: MHz ±10 % Clock Frequency Measurement Section (DATA to CLOCK mode only) Measurement Range: x1 speed: MHz to MHz x2 speed: MHz to MHz Measurement Accuracy: ±0.1 % OP73 GPIB (IEEE 488.1) Function: Transfers data, controls front panel settings. OP74 LAN Function: Transfers data, controls front panel settings.

104 AUDIO Applicable to Blu-ray Disc Ideal for Adjusting and Inspecting Optical Pickup on the Production Line (Dedicated for x1 Speed) LE 1871 DIGITAL PROCESSING JITTER METER GENERAL The LE 1871 Jitter Analyzer is designed to measure the jitter conforming to Blu-ray Disc (Part 1, version 1.0, June 2002) standards. Since the Conventional Equalizer, PLL clock regenerator, and jitter measurement section are provided as standard, HF signal output from a pickup can be directly applied to this instrument for measuring jitter. Using digital processing method as well as a TIA is used for the jitter measurement, quick and accurate measurement can be performed. A large meter and LED panel allow this instrument ideal for production and inspection applications, as well as R&D. The Limit Equalizer for Blu-ray Disc and various jitter measurement units for a DVD/CD or HFM are optionally available. Thus, jitter of DVD and CD, and HF and HFM of Blu-ray Disc can be measured using a single unit. Optional GPIB and LAN are convenience to construct an automatic measurement system and ensure quality control. FEATURES Features on Blu-ray Disc measurement Applicable to three types of disc capacity (x1 speed) Jitter of Blu-ray Disc with disc capacity of 23.3 GB, 25.0 GB, and 27.0 GB can be measured. Equipped with Equalizer conforming to Blu-ray Disc standards The Conventional Equalizer conforming to Blu-ray Disc standards is provided. The boost level of Conventional Equalizer can be varied. Digital processing method for quick and accurate measurement Root-mean-square value calculation using digital processing method enables quick and accurate measurement. Measures the jitter of all-t components conforming to Blu-ray Disc standards Measures all components of 2T to 8T and 9T of the HF (DATA) signal with respect to the CLOCK signal, then displays it as jitter in sigma format. Displaying jitter in unit of % Jitter component with respect to the clock signal is displayed in unit of percentage (%). No clock period setting is required since the clock is automatically regenerated from the HF (DATA) signal. Measurement will be made correctly even when the HF (DATA) signal deviation is 8%. 104 Three polarity modes Rising edge, falling edge, and both edges of DATA signal can be selected. Applicable dual-layer disc The 2T component can be eliminated in DATA to CLOCK measurement mode used when inspecting a dual-layer disc. Features on Measurement High sensitivity The HF (DATA) signal with a signal level between 0.1 Vp-p and 2.0 Vp-p can be measured. Selectable response time The jitter indication response time can be set from 0.1 to 5 seconds. Response time of the DC output can be separately set. Analog and digital displays The large analog meter is convenient for adjusting the device under test. Jitter measurement values are also displayed on the large LED panel for parallax-free reading. ARMING/INHIBIT functions to specify measurement block on a disc This instrument can correctly measure jitter even when faulty operation (e.g., track jumping) occurs based on the following functions: ARMING function can specify the block on a disc to measure jitter. INHIBIT function specify the block on a disc to inhibit measurement. The delay time, measurement time, and number of repetition measurements can be set. Monitor output connector for an oscilloscope is provided to check measurement block for correct. Various monitor outputs Input signal and equalized signal can be monitored. DC voltage in proportion to the meter indication is output. Auto slicer Auto slicer conforming to Blu-ray Disc standards is provide. Features on Production Line GO/NO GO judgment mode convenient for production line Jitter measurement values are compared with the preset judgment limits, then displays the results on the LED. The result can also be output Remote control function Front panel controls such as jitter measurement range can be remotely controlled. RS232C interface This instrument can transfer front panel settings and jitter measurement value to a personal computer via the RS232C interface. The computer-control system can be used to construct an automatic measurement system and ensure quality control. Simple operation Equalizer boost level, judgment reference, and response time can easily be set with a jog dial. Universal voltage Since this instrument operates on 90 to 250 V, it can be used throughout the world.

105 SPECIFICATIONS LE 1871 Input Section HF INPUT (1-7 modulation signal input) Input Coupling: AC Measurement Voltage Range: 0.1 to 2.0 Vp-p Input Range: 3 ranges 0.3 V range: 0.1 to 0.3 Vp-p 0.9 V range: 0.3 to 0.9 Vp-p 2.0 V range: 0.9 to 2.0 Vp-p Input Impedance: 50 Ω Auto Slicer: Response time constant: 10 khz Maximum Input Voltage: ±2.5 V Measurement Control (ARMING IN/INHIBIT IN) Input Impedance: 10 kω Input Signal Level: 0 /+5 V Maximum Input Voltage: -0.7 V/+5.7 V Equalizer Section Conforms to Blu-ray Disc (Part 1, version 1.0) standards. Applicable Format: 1-7 PP modulation Channel Bit Rate: 66 MHz Equalizer Mode: Conventional Equalizer Mode Gain Variable Range: 0 to 8 db (36 steps) Gain Accuracy: ±0.5 db Group Delay Deviation: 2.0 nsp-p (5.8 db: 3 MHz to 16.5 MHz) Jitter Measurement Section Applicable Speed: Clock frequency: 66 MHz ±4 % Measurement Mode: DATA to CLOCK DATA to CLOCK 2T eliminate mode Measurement Resolution: 25 ps Unit Displayed: %(Sigma value with respect to clock period) Measurement Accuracy Meter Indication: ±5 % of full scale ± residual jitter Digital Display: ±5 % ± residual jitter Polarity Selection DATA:,, BOTH CLOCK: (fixed) Measurement Time Constant: 0.04 s to 5 s Measurement Control Section (ARMING/INHIBIT function) Measurement Control Mode: ARMING mode/inhibit mode Electrical Characteristics: Input Impedance: 10 kω Input Signal Level: 0 /+5 V Maximum Input Voltage: -0.7 V/+5.7 V INHIBIT ENABLE: HIGH/LOW COUNT: 1 to 50, in 1 steps ARMING SLOPE: RISE/FALL COUNT: 1 to 50, in 1 steps START DLY: 0 to µs (in 1 µs steps min.) LENGTH MODE: SAMPLE/TIME LENGTH: 0.01 to µs (in 1 µs steps min.)(time only) Clock Regenerator (DATA to CLOCK mode only) Regenerates reference clock signal from DATA signal input. HF: 66 MHz ±8 % Clock Frequency Measurement Section (DATA to CLOCK mode only) Measurement Range: MHz to MHz Measurement Accuracy: ±0.1 % Judgment Section Outputs GO/NO GO results of jitter and frequency measured with respect to the preset value. GO/NO GO LED: Indicate results corresponding to meter indications. Dedicated Remote Control Connector: Outputs judgment results for jitter measurement. Output Section MONITOR OUT To monitor the HF signal input. Output Impedance: 50 Ω Output Amplitude: Up to 2.0 Vp-p ±30 % (into 50 Ω, in proportion to input signal) Output Connector: BNC EQUALIZER OUT To monitor equalized HF signal input. Output Impedance: 50 Ω Output Amplitude: 0.8 Vp-p ±30 % (into 50 Ω) Output Connector: BNC DIGITAL OUT (DATA, CLOCK) Outputs binarized DATA signal and clock signal regenerated by PLL. Output Signal: DATA signal, CLOCK signal Output Amplitude: 0.15 Vp-p (into 50 Ω) Output Offset Voltage: 0.34 V (into 50 Ω) Output Connector: BNC DC OUT Output Voltage: 0.05 V/% Output Accuracy: ±2 % GATE MONITOR To monitor arming/inhibit control signals. Output Amplitude: TTL level Output Impedance: 1 kω Remote Control Section Dedicated Remote Control Connector Communicates judgment results and front panel settings. Pins for Front Panel Setting Input Level: 0 /5 V (pulled-up with 47-kΩ resistor) Maximum Input Voltage: -0.7/+5.7 V Judgment Results Output Pins GO: 5 V (open drain output, pulled-up with 47-kΩ resistor) NO GO: 0 V Maximum Current Output: 10 ma 105 RS232C Interface Communication: Controls function, outputs data. Baud Rate: bps max. Environmental Conditions Operating: Temperature: 0 to 40 C Humidity: 85 % RH (without condensation) Spec-Guaranteed: Temperature: 10 to 30 C Humidity: 85 % RH (without condensation) Storage: Temperature: 0 to 50 C Operating Environment: Indoor use Operating Altitude: Up to 2,000 m Overvoltage Category: II Pollution Degree: 2 Power Requirements: 90 to 250 VAC, 50/ 60 Hz, 35 Wmax. Dimensions and Weight: 213 (W) x 132 (H) x 300 (D) mm, 4.7 kg Accessories: power cord... 1 Instruction manual... 1 OPTION OP70 Limit Equalizer (For Blu-ray HF) Conforms to Blu-ray Disc (Part 1, version 1.0) standards. Applicable Format: 1-7 PP modulation Channel Bit Rate: 66 MHz Equalizer Mode: Conventional Equalizer Mode or Limit Equalizer Mode, selectable Gain Variable Range: 0 to 8 db (36 steps) Gain Accuracy: ±0.5 db Group Delay Deviation: 2.0 nsp-p (5.8 db: 3 MHz to 16.5 MHz) OP71 DVD/CD Measurement Input Section DATA INPUT (EFM/8-16 modulation signal input) Input Coupling: AC (2 Hz/1 khz, selectable) Measurement Voltage Range: 50 mv to 5 Vp-p Input Impedance: 1 MΩ/50 Ω, selectable Slice Level VARIABLE: ±2.5 V AUTO (ASYMMETRY ON): 20 Hz/1 khz/5 khz/10 khz, selectable Maximum Input Voltage: ±5 V Jitter Measurement Section Applicable Speed DVD: Clock Frequency x1 speed: 27 MHz ±10 %, x2 speed: 54 MHz ±10 % CD: Measurement Mode DVD: CD: x1, x2, x4, x8, x10, x12 speed Unit Displayed: ns, % Measurement Resolution: 50 ps Display Resolution: 0.01 ns Measurement Accuracy Sigma Value: ±4 % ±0.15 ns Average Value: ±1 ns Polarity Selection DATA:,, BOTH CLOCK: (fixed) PERIOD mode, sum of all-t data in PERIOD mode, PULSE WIDTH mode, sum of all-t data in PULSE WIDTH mode, DATA to CLOCK PULSE WIDTH mode, sum of all-t data in PULSE WIDTH mode Measurement Item: σ, σ/t Clock Frequency Measurement Section (DVD, DATA to CLOCK mode only) Measurement Range: 24.3 MHz to 59.4 MHz Measurement Accuracy: ±0.1 % Clock Regenerator (DVD, DATA to CLOCK mode only) Regenerates reference clock signal from DATA signal input. HF: x1 speed: 27 MHz ±8 %, x2 speed: 54 MHz ±8 % OP72 HFM Measurement Input Section Input Coupling: AC Measurement Voltage Range: 50 mv to 5 Vp-p Input Impedance: 1 MΩ/50 Ω, selectable Frequency Range: x1 speed: 8 MHz, x2 speed: 16 MHz Slice Level: ±2.5 V (VARIABLE) Maximum Input Voltage: ±5 V Jitter Measurement Section Measurement Range: Clock frequency: 3.37 MHz to 3.96 MHz Measurement Mode: DATA to CLOCK Measurement Resolution: 50 ps Measurement Accuracy Sigma Value: ±5 % Polarity Selection DATA:,, BOTH CLOCK: (fixed) Measurement Item: σ/t Unit Displayed: % Clock Regenerator Regenerates reference clock signal from DATA signal input. HFM: x1 speed: MHz ±8 % Clock Frequency Measurement Section Measurement Range: x1 speed: MHz to MHz Measurement Accuracy: ±0.1 % OP73 GPIB (IEEE 488.1) Function: Transfers data, controls front panel settings. OP74 LAN Function: Transfers data, controls front panel settings. OP71 and OP72 can not be installed together. OP73 and OP74 can not be installed together. AUDIO

106 Selection Guide DIGITAL PROCESSING JITTER METER Applicable to Blu-ray Disc and DVD/CD (LE 1871/LE 1876) JITTER METER JITTER ANALYZER Applicable Speed Measurement Mode Equalizer Interface Blu-ray Disc DVD DVD-RAM CD CD-R Blu-ray Disc DVDRAM Blu-ray Disc DVD-RAM x1 speed x2 speed x1 speed x2 speed 2.6 G, 4.7 G x1 speed x2, x4, x6, x8, x10, x12 speed x1, x2, --- x32 speed HF DATA to CLOCK HFM DATA to CLOCK DATA to CLOCK DATA to CLOCK (2 inputs) DVDROM PULSE WIDTH mode (3-11, 14T) DVD-R/RW Sum of all-t data in PULSE WIDTH mode PERIOD mode (6-25T) Sum of all-t data in PERIOD mode DATA to CLOCK (2 inputs) PULSE WIDTH mode (3-11, 14T) Sum of all-t data in PULSE WIDTH mode PERIOD mode (6-25T) Sum of all-t data in PERIOD mode Conventional Equalizer Limit Equalizer DVDROM Fixed boost level (3.2 db) DVD-R/RW Variable boost level (3.2 to 6.0 db) 2.6 G (for x1 speed) 4.7 G (for x2 speed) Option Option Option Option Option Option Option Option Special order Option Option Special order Option Option Option Option Option Option Option Option Special order Special order Option Option Option Option Option Option Special order Option Option Special order Option Option Option Option Special order Option Option Option Option Option Special order Special order Option Option DVD-RAM equalizer is required. For the LE 1870/LE 1871, 3T can only be measured in PULSE WIDTH mode; it cannot be selected via the front panel. Digital system is used. For the LE 1875, x1 and x2 speeds can be measured in PULSE WIDTH mode. 106

107 DVD/CD Equalizer, Blu-ray Disc Limit Equalizer DVD Fixed Equalizer Option 3.2-dB boost level equalizer conforming to DVD book Usable for inspecting pickups Channel Bit Rate Boost Level Boost Level Accuracy Group Delay Drift 27 MHz 3.2 db ±3 % (at 5.16 MHz) 2.5 ns max. DVD Variable Equalizer Option Variable boost level equalizer for jitter measurements Using an equalizer with a fixed boost level of 3.2 db is recommended by DVD Book, however, applying a suitable boost level to an optical pickup ensures accurate jitter measurement and better productivity. Channel Bit Rate Valuable Boost Level Boost Level Accuracy Group Delay Drift 27 MHz 3.2 to 6.0 db, in 0.2 db steps ±3 % (in each step, at 5.16 MHz) 4 ns max. Effectiveness of Blu-ray Disc Limit Equalizer RF waveform without limit equalizer RF waveform with limit equalizer 107

108 AUDIO Inhibit and arming functions suitable for RAM disk jitter measurement PAT.PEND *Memory card is not attached. LE 1875 (S1version) DIGITAL PROCESSING JITTER ANALYZER GENERAL Leader s most advanced jitter analyzer combines digital time sampling and processing combined with a full color LCD display to provide fast, complete and accurate tracking of DVD, DVD-RAM, CD and CD-R/RW R&D, production and QC. Optional equalizers facilitate testing via direct pickup connections. Features of S1 version: Suitable functions for RAM disk jitter measurement capability Pulse width measurement in one-signal input mode for DVD jitter measurement Selectable bandpass for input amplifier corresponds to timing or alignment jitter components to be measured. FEATURES Time Interval Analyzer (TIA) Handles DVD, DVD- RAM, CD and CD-R/RW Histogram Color LCD Display Shows Jitter History, RF Data Amplitude, Average Sigma Reading and Clock Measures Jitter at 3T Through 11T + 14T Jitter Readings in % Clock Frequency and Sigma Measurements at Rise, Fall and Both Data Edges Response up to Double Speed Long Time Measurements Shows Variation of Sigma and Average Readings Versus Time High Sensitivity Accurate Readings at 50 mv or More 50 Ω and 1 MΩ Inputs Allow the Use of 10:1 Probe to Minimize Circuit Loading GO/NO-GO Judgements Against Preset Entries Easy Settings and Memory Storage Auto Slicer Conforms to DVD Documentation Inhibit Input Suspends Tests Due to Malfunctions RS232C Standard AVAILABLE OPTIONS OP71 CD-R/RW Bi-Phase Jitter at 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30 and 32X Speeds OP72 GPIB (IEEE 488.1) OP74 Fixed Equalizer (3.2 db at 5.16 MHz) OP75 Variable Equalizer (3.2 to 6 db at 5.16 MHz) OP76 Variable Equalizer (3 to 4.4 db at 5.16 MHz) 108

109 AUDIO SPECIFICATIONS Input Section DATA INPUT (EFM/8-16 Modulation signal Input) Input Coupling: AC (2 Hz/1 khz, selectable) Measurable Voltage Range: 50 mv to 5 Vp-p Input Impedance: 1 MΩ/50 Ω, selectable Slice Level VARIABLE: ±2.5 V AUTO (ASYMMETRY ON): 20 Hz/1 khz/5 khz/10 khz, selectable Maximum Input Voltage: ±5 V Clock Signal Input Coupling: AC Measurable Voltage Range: 0.1 V to 2.5 Vp-p Input Impedance: 1 MΩ/50 Ω, selectable Slice Level: 0 V (fixed) Clock Delay: 10 ns for each polarity Maximum Input Voltage: ±5 V Measurement Control (GATE IN) Input Impedance: 10 kω Input Signal Level: TTL Maximum Input Voltage: -0.7 V/+5.7 V Jitter Measurement Section Applicable Speed DVD: Clock Frequency: 24.3 MHz to 59.4 MHz(Frequency is fixed to 27/54 MHz in one-signal input mode, DATA TO CLOCK mode.) CD: x1, x2, x4, x6, x8, x10, x12 speed Measurement Mode DVD: Measurements for, PERIOD, sum of all-t data in PERIOD mode, PULSE WIDTH, sum of all-t data in PULSE WIDTH mode, DATA TO CLOCK CD: Measurements for, PULSE WIDTH and sum of all-t PERIOD data Units Displayed: ns or % Measurement Resolution: 0.15 ns Display Resolution: 0.01 ns Measurement Accuracy Sigma Value: ±4 % ±0.15 ns Average Value: ±1 ns Polarity Selection DATA: +, -, BOTH CLOCK: +, - Measurement Item: Measurement Display: AVERAGE, Max, Min, σ, σ max, σ min, σ/t, σ/t max, σ/t min Number of Samples: 10 to 1,000,000 Control Function (ON/OFF, selectable) Inhibit value, bar graph, histogram, TIME DEVIATION, BOTH for separate display Logic State Selection: ENABLE: HIGH/LOW Number of Gating Operations: GATE COUNT: 0 to 50 Arming Polarity Selection: SLOPE: RISE/FALL (Polarity settable) Start Delay: START DLY: 0 to 9999 µs in 1 µs steps Measurement Time Settings: LEN MODE: SAMPLE/TIME (0.01 ms to 99.9 ms in 0.01 ms steps) Number of Gating Operations: GATE COUNT: 0 to 50 LE 1875(S1 version) Level Measurement Section Measurement Method: Peak-to-peak value of DATA (RF) signal Measurable Voltage Range: 50 mv to 5 Vp-p (0.5 to Vp-p in 10:1 probe conversion mode) Display Digit: 4 (3 digits after decimal point) Measurement Resolution: 1 mv min. Measurement Accuracy: ±5 % Display: Item name in level measurement mode 1:1 mode --- LVL 10:1 mode --- *LVL Clock Frequency Measurement Section (DVD, DATA to CLOCK mode only) Measurable Range: 24.3 MHz to 59.4 MHz Measurement Accuracy: ±0.5 % Clock Regenerator (DVD, DATA to CLOCK mode only) Regenerates reference clock signal from DATA (RF) signal input Applicable Speed: DVD, x1 speed (27 MHz ±10 %) DVD, x2 speed (54 MHz ±10 %) Output Section MONITOR OUT (PROBE CAL) DATA (Used for DATA signal monitoring and probe calibration) Bandwidth: 50 MHz, -3 db Output Impedance: 50 Ω CLOCK (Used for CLOCK signal monitoring and probe calibration) Bandwidth: 60 MHz, -3 db Output Impedance: 50 Ω EQUALIZER OUT Used for equalized RF signal monitoring Output Impedance: 50 Ω DC OUT Output Accuracy: ±2 % Output Item: Level, jitter (Full scale voltage variable) Maximum Output Voltage: 2 V GATE MONITOR Used for arming and inhibit control signal monitoring Output Level: TTL level Output Impedance: 1 kω Remote Control Section Dedicated Remote Control Connector: Outputs judgment results RS232C: Controls function and outputs data Memory Card: Interface: Conforms to PC CARD ATA standards Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 40 C Operating Humidity Range: 85 % RH (without condensation) Spec-Guaranteed Temperature Range: 10 to 30 C Spec-Guaranteed Humidity Range: 85 % RH (without condensation) Storage Temperature Range: 0 to 50 C Storage Humidity Range: 90 % RH (without condensation) Operating Environment: Indoor use Operating Altitude: Up to 2,000 m Overvoltage Category: II Pollution Degree: 2 Power Requirements: Dimensions and Weight: 90 to 250 VAC universal, 50/60 Hz 35 Wmax. 213 (W) x 132 (H) x 300 (D) mm, 5.0 kg Accessories: Power cord... 1 Instruction manual... 1 OPTION OP71 CD-R/RW Measurement (BIPHASE jitter measurement) Corresponding Speed: x1, x2, x4, x6, x30, x32 times speed (BIPHASE CLOCK: 6.3 khz to khz) Input Signal: BIPHASE Digitized signal and Digitized Clock signal Input Couple: DC Measurement Voltage Range: 0.2 V to 5 Vp-p Input Impedance: 1 MΩ Bandwidth: DC to 1 MHz, -3 db Maximum input Voltage: ±5 V Measurement Mode: PULSE WIDTH, all-t, DATA to CLOCK Scale: µs, % (Automatic conversion, Data to CLOCK mode only) Measurement Resolution: 20 ns Display Resolution: 0.1 µs Measurement Accuracy: ±3 % Polarity DATA: +,, BOTH CLOCK: +, Measurement Item: AVERAGE, Max, Min, σ, σ max, σ min, σ/t, σ/t max, σ/t min Measurement Display: value, bar graph, histogram, TIME DEVIATION, BOTH for separate display Number of samples: Max 100,000 OP72 GPIB (IEEE 488.1) Function: Data transfer and panel control OP74 Fixed Equalizer Channel Bits Rate: 27 MHz Boost Quantity: 3.2 db within ±3 % (at 5.16 MHz) Group Delay Fluctuation: Max 2.5 ns OP75 Variable Equalizer Channel Bits Rate: 27 MHz Boost Quantity: 3.2 to 6.0 db within ±3 % (at 5.16 MHz) Group Delay Fluctuation: Max 4 ns OP76 Variable Equalizer Channel Bits Rate: 27 MHz Boost Quantity: 3.0 to 4.4 db within ±3 % (at 5.16 MHz) Group Delay Fluctuation: Max 3 ns 109

110 AUDIO TIA High Speed & Accuracy Jitter Measurement PAT.PEND LE 1870 DIGITAL PROCESSING JITTER METER GENERAL The LE 1870 Jitter Meter is designed to quickly and accurately measure the jitter of RF (DATA) signals conforming to the DVD Book (DVD Specifications for Read-Only Disc) with respect to the clock signal using digital processing method (i.e., same method as used by TIA). A large meter and LED panel allow this instrument ideal for production and inspection applications, as well as R&D. Since CD-R measurement unit to measure jitter of biphase signal is optionally available, DVD, CD, and CD-R/RW can be measured using this instrument alone. FEATURES DVD Measurements High speed and accuracy measurement by the digital operation system By adopting the same digital operation system of TIA to the rms operation, the LE 1870 deliver the high speed and accuracy measurement. The LE 1870 measures 3T through 11T and 14T in the DATA signal with respect to the clock signal and displays jitter in sigma format, and also offers the measurement of narrow pulse 3T jitter. Jitter in unit of % or sigma value, selectable Jitter in unit of % or sigma value, selectable Jitter value can be displayed in unit of percentage with respect to the clock signal. The absolute value can also be displayed in sigma format. The Jitter of the DATA signal can accurately be measured even in the percentage display mode. Jitter measurement in three polarities Jitter at the rise, fall, and both edges of the DATA signal can be measured in signal-signal and two-signal measurement modes. Response up to double speed Measure the jitter between RF (DATA) signal and regenerated clock signal in inside and display in sigma value. For general function High measurement level sensitivity DATA signal can be measured for signal whose amplitude is equal to or more than 50 mvp-p. Input impedance can be selected either 50 Ω or 1 MΩ Both 50 Ω input which is internally terminated, and 1 MΩ input which is used with 10:1 oscilloscope probe lessen the disturbance to the system under test. 110 Simultaneous measurement, jitter and RF signal level Display the peak level(p-p) of the DATA signal in digital. Analog display for easy adjustment and digital display for parallax free The LE 1870 is equipped with both large meter and large digital indicators. The result of jitter measurements can be displayed either on meter or on digital indicator. Measurement inhibit The INHIBIT IN connector is provided. This function inhibits jitter measurement when a disc replay malfunction like kickback occurs. Various monitor output DATA signal monitor is available and the DC output proportional to the jitter and level indication are provided. Build-in Auto slicer Auto slicer which has response features conforming to DVD book is built-in. On the Production Line Convenient GO/NO GO judgement for the production line The GO/NO GO result judgement is based on the comparison between the set standard and measured value of level, and is indicated on the LEDs and outputted. REMOTE CONTROL function Jitter measurement range and other panel functions can be remotely controlled. RS232C is equipped as standard RS232C provides you panel operation and lets you transfer the measured level and jitter level to a personal computer. Easy setting Jog dial system offers you easy setting for judgement standard, response time, slice level. All the setting are stored as last memories on each mode/speed of DVD, CD, CD-R. Versatile Options Available to measure a jitter of CD-R/RW up to x32 speed. With an option for CD-R/RW, 1T jitter of Bi-phase signal can be measured. Accurate measurement by equalizer conforms to DVD book Optional RF equalizer allows direct input measurement of the pickup signal at the production line of pickup.

111 AUDIO SPECIFICATIONS LE 1870 Input Section EFM SIGNAL Input couple: AC Measurement Voltage Range:50 mv to 5 Vp-p Input Impedance: 1 MΩ/ 50 Ω Bandwidth: 50 MHz, 3 db Slice Level: VARIABLE (±2.5 V) AUTO (ASYMMETRY ON) Maximum Input Voltage: ±5 V INHIBIT IN Input Impedance: 100 kω Input Signal: 0/ 5 V (Measurement inhibit at 5 V) Maximum Input Voltage: 0.7 V/ +5.7 V Jitter Measurement Section Corresponding Speed: DVD standard speed (27 MHz ±10 %), Double speed (54 MHz ±10 %) CD standard, 2, 4, 6, 8,10, 12 times speed (EFM CLOCK: MHz to MHz) Measurement Mode DVD All T: DATA to CLOCK DVD 3 T: PULSE WIDTH CD 3T: PULSE WIDTH Scale DATA to CK Measurement: ns, % (Automatic conversion) 3T PULSE WIDTH: ns Accuracy Meter Display: (±4 % of full scale) ± 0.15 ns Digital Display: (±4 %) ± 0.15 ns Polarity DATA: +,, BOTH CLOCK: Indication SIGMA Measurement Time Constant Variable: 0.04 s to 5 s Level Measurement Section Measurement Method: Peak to peak level of RF (DATA) signal Range Input Impedance 50 Ω: 50 mv to 5 Vp-p Input Impedance 1 MΩ: 0.5 V to Vp-p (conversion value for 10:1 probe) Display Method: Digital Accuracy: ±5 % Dedicated Remote Terminal: Output Section Monitor Output Output Signal: Output Impedance: Digitized Output Output Signal: Output Impedance: DC Output: Clock Frequency Measurement Section Measurement Range: 27 MHz ±10 %, 54 MHz ±10 % Measurement Accuracy: ±0.5 % Clock Reproducing Section Reproduce the standard clock from the input EFM plus signal Corresponding Speed: DVD standard speed(27 MHz ±10 %) DVD 2 times speed(54 MHz ±10 %) Judgement Section Compares the set standard and measurement value of level and jitter to determine GO/NO GO and output the results. GO/NO GO LED : Meter (Jitter measurement) judgement. RF LEVEL/JITTER LED: Digital display (Jitter and level measurement) judgement. Jitter measurement, Level measurement judgement Input signal or the signal through the equalizer 50 Ω DATA signal, CLOCK signal 50 Ω Jitter DATA to CLOCK DVD: 0.05 V/% or V/ns 3T PULSE WIDTH DVD: 0.1 V/ns CDx1: V/ns x2: 0.05 V/ns x4, x6: 0.1 V/ns x8 to 12: 0.25 V/ns Level: 0.4 V/Vp-p Remote Control Section Designated Remote Terminal: Judgement output and Panel setting RS232C: Control, Data output Environmental Conditions Operating: Temperature: 0 to 40 C Humidity: 85 % RH (without condensation) Spec-Guaranteed: Temperature: 10 to 30 C Humidity: 85 % RH (without condensation) Storage: Temperature: 0 to 50 C Operating Environment: Indoor use Operating Altitude: Up to 2,000 m Overvoltage Category: Pollution Degree: 2 Power Requirements: 90 to 250 VAC, 50/ 60 Hz Dimensions and Weight: 55 Wmax. 213 (W) 132 (H) 300 (D) mm, 4.0 kg Accessories: Power cord... 1 Instruction manual... 1 Option OP71 CD-R/RW Measurement (Bi-phase Jitter Measurement) Corresponding Speed: x1, x2, x4, x6, x30, x32 times speed (Bi-phase CLOCK: 6.3 khz to khz) Input Signal: Bi-phase Digitized signal and Digitized Clock signal Input Couple: DC Measurement Voltage Range: 0.2 V to 5 Vp-p Input Impedance: 1 MΩ Bandwidth: DC to 1 MHz, 3 db Maximum Input Voltage: ±5 V Measurement Mode: 1 T ( PULSE WIDTH), All T (DATA to CLOCK) Scale: µs, % OP72 GP-IB (IEEE 488.1) Function: Data transfer and panel control OP74 Fixed Equalizer Corresponding Clock Frequency 27 MHz Boost Quantity 3.2 db ±3 % (at 5.16 MHz) Group Delay Fluctuation Max. 2.5 ns OP75 Variable Equalizer Corresponding Clock Frequency 27 MHz Boost Quantity 3.2 to 6.0 db ±3 % (at 5.16 MHz) Group Delay Fluctuation Max. 4 ns OP76 Variable Equalizer Corresponding Clock Frequency 27 MHz Boost Quantity 3.0 to 4.4 db ±3 % (at 5.16 MHz) Group Delay Fluctuation Max. 3 ns 111

112 AUDIO DVD Jitter Measurement Method as New Standard Jitter Measurement using TIA Method The models LE 1875 (S1 version) and LE 1870 use a digital processing method (i.e., same method as used by TIA) to obtain jitter values. Since jitter basically occurs in random phenomena from optical discs, pickup, and driver characteristics, it is obtained by using the statistical method from measurement data by calculating data accumulated for standard deviation display in sigma format. The histogram refers to a graph consisting of a horizontal axis for jitter in time (period) and a vertical axis for frequency distribution. Measuring Jitter of DVD There are two methods as follows: All-T jitter measurement method conforming to DVD Book 3T jitter measurement method to measure DATA signal pulse width (previously used for CDs) All-T Jitter Measurement This method is also called the DATA to CLOCK measurement method. A pulse string (i.e., 3T to 11T, 14T) called 8-16 modulation is recorded on the DVD. This method measures all rising and falling edges of the pulse string with respect to the clock signal regenerated by PLL. Frequency distribution (n) +Tw DATA signal -Tw Jitter in time (ns) Histogram, time width data Since jitter is considered standard deviation (i.e., dispersion of data in time), it is obtained from the following formulas: Dn: Time dataxn: Frequency distribution CLOCK signal regenerated by PLL Pulse Width Measurement This method is mainly used for measuring the jitter of CDs. A pulse string (i.e., 3T to 11T) called 8-14 modulation (EFM) is recorded on the CD. This method measures the jitter of each pulse width. This instrument can also measure DVDs. Average value Sigma value +Tw (3T) DATA Signal -Tw (4T) Measurement Method Conforming to DVD Book The figure below shows the signal flow (from a pickup) conforming to DVD Specifications for Read-Only Disc Version 1.0. Applying the HF signal directly from the pickup satisfied the standards since the LE 1875 and LE 1870 are designed based on DVD Book. This circuit is only used for DVD players and pickup inspection systems. Pickup Preamplifier HF HPF EQ LPF Slicer Phase detector Filter VCO PLL Detects time difference between two signals. Calculates time difference to obtain jitter values. The w Book prescribes measurement conditions as follows: Block Measurement Conditions High-Pass Filter Transmission characteristics Equalizer Transmission characteristics to 10 MHz Allowance of group delay Low-Pass Filter Transmission characteristics Slicer Closed-loop transmission characteristics PLL Open-loop transmission characteristics Measurement Method Jitter at all edges 112

113 AUDIO Highly-Accurate Measurements for Voltages LMV-186A 2 CHANNEL AC MILLIVOLTMETER GENERAL The LMV-186A have concentric dual channel meter movement with separate needles on the analog display and a channel reverse switch. For stereo audio, the LMV-186A is very apt for measuring record and playback levels, channel separation, balance and tracking tests of volume, loudness and tone controls versus frequency, etc. FEATURES LMV-186A consists of two high sensitivity voltmeters housed in one cabinet. A single meter with two independent pointer movements is used in the measurements. Voltages can be measured at the same time at tow different points in the test circuit or for two separated loads. Switching is provided for measurement or comparison where voltages are within 10 db, such as in stereo circuits. Indentical voltage ranging and amplifiers systems are used in each channel which operate without crosstalk. Decibel scales are provided over the full voltage range, at 0 db=1 Vrms and Vrms, which are useful in data plotting and comparison of levels. The meter scale calibration is in terms of the effective value of a sine wave. Both voltmeters may also be used as a high gain AC amplifier. SPECIFICATIONS Voltmeter Measuring Voltage range: Measuring range: Input Impedance: 100 µv to 300 V Voltage range:12 ranges 1, 3, 10,30, 100, 300 mv 1, 3, 10, 30, 100, 300 V Decibel range: 12 ranges -60, -50, -40, -30, -20, -10 db 0, +10, +20, +30, +40, +50 db (0 dbv=1 V, 0 dbm=0.775 V) Measuring accuracy: ±2 % of full scale (ar 1 khz or 400 Hz) Frequency characteristics: 5 Hz to 500 khz ±10 % 10 Hz to 200 khz ±5 % 20 Hz to 100 khz ±3 % (1 khz ref.) Input resistance: 10 MΩ Input capacitance: 45 pf or less(1 mv to 300 mv range) 25 pf or less(1 V to 300 V range) Maximum input voltage: AC peak+dc=60 V(1 mv to 300 mv range) Circuit ground: Amplifier Output Voltage: Frequency characteristics: Output impedance: Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature: Operating Humidity: Operating Environment: Operating Altitude: Overvoltage Category: Pollution Degree: Power Requirements: Dimensions: Weight: Accessories: AC peak+dc=600 V(1 V to 300 V range) FLOAT/Ground through the resistor, selectable 1 Vrms into open circuit 10 Hz to 200 khz -3 db(1 khz ref.) 600 Ω ±20 % 0 to 40 C 85 % RH (without condensation) Indoor use Up to 2,000 m V ±10 %, 50/60 Hz, 5 VA (can be changed to 117 V, 220 V, 240 V by VOLTAGE SELECT plug.) 150 (W) 200 (H) 250 (D) mm (exclusive of knobs, rubber feet and handle) 3.5 kg Connection cord (pair-plug to clip cable)... 2 Power cord... 1 Instruction manual

114 OSCILLOSCOPE High Sensitivity, Low Drift, 50 MHz Oscilloscope LS MHz OSCILLOSCOPE GENERAL A lab-grade instrument with dual-channel operation, the LS 8050 meets the needs of advanced scope uses with bright, sharp traces, superior long-term stability and reliability. Operating features include high sensitivity with band limiting to 15 MHz on the most sensitive ranges, delayed sweep to closely examine small parts of the main time base, a trigger lock function to establish the trigger point within the p-p signal swing and ensure rocksolid triggering despite wide variations in signal excursions and dedicated H and V sync separators for fuss-free video waveforms. Other refinements include variable holdoff to view long, complicated wavetrains, X-Y operation, an internal illuminated scale (a must for waveform photography), and CH1 output to put the scope s CH1 amplifiers to work as a high-gain calibrated preamp. A pair of X1/X10 probes is provided. FEATURES 50 MHz Bandwidth CH1 & CH2 High Sensitivity: 1 mv/div 15 MHz Bandwidth at 1 & 2 mv/div Delayed Sweep Capability Video, TV-V and TV-H Trigger Trigger Level Lock Function Variable Holdoff for Complex Wavetrains X-Y Operation CH1 Output Puts the CH1 Amplifiers to Work as a Calibrated Preamp Scale Illuminator Facilitates Waveform Photography Meets International Standards for EMI, EMS and Safety 114

115 OSCILLOSCOPE SPECIFICATIONS LS 8050 CRT Type: Phosphor: Acceleration voltage: Effective screen size: Graticule: Vertical Axis Sensitivity: Sensitivity accuracy 5 mv to 5 V/div: 1 mv to 2 mv/div: Frequency bandwidth 5 mv to 5 V/div: 1 mv to 2 mv/div: Rise time 5 mv to 5 V/div: 1 mv to 2 mv/div: Input impedance: Vertical mode CH1: CH2: DUAL: CH1 signal output: Polarity inversion: Triggering Triggering source: Coupling: Polarity: Sensitivity DC to 10 MHz: 10 to 50 MHz: TV (video signal): AC coupling: HF-REJ: than 50 khz. LEVEL LOCK and ALT triggering: Triggering mode AUTO: 150 mm rectangular type, internal graticule. P 31 Approx. 12 kv 8 10 div (1 div = 10 mm) Internal; continuous adjustable illumination 1 mv to 5 V/div, 12 steps in sequence 3 % (10 to 35 C) 5 % (10 to 35 C) DC (AC:10Hz) to 50 MHz, 3 db DC (AC:10Hz) to 15 MHz, 3 db Approx. 7 ns Approx. 23 ns 1 M Ω ±2 %//Approx. 25 pf CH1 single channel. CH2 single channel. CHOP/ALT are auto-set by TIME/DIV switch. (CHOP:0.5 s to 5 ms/div, ALT: 2 ms to 0.1 µs/div) When CHOP switch is pushed in, the two traces are displayed in the CHOP mode at all range. ADD: CH1 + CH2 algebraic addition. Chopping repetition frequency: Approx. 250 khz Input coupling: AC, DC, GND Maximum input voltage: 400 V (DC + AC peak), AC: frequency 1 khz or lower. Approx. 100 mv/div without termination, 50 mv/div with 50 Ω termination. CH2 only CH1, CH2, LINE, EXT, ALT AC, HF-REJ, TV, DC (TV-V/TV-H can be auto-set by TIME/DIV range. TV-V: 0.5 s to 0.1 ms/div; TV-H: 50 µs to 0.1 µs/div) / 0.5 div (EXT: 0.1 V) 1.5 div (EXT: 0.2 V) 2.0 div (EXT: 0.2 V) Attenuate signal components of lower than 10 Hz. Attenuate signal components of higher Satisfies the value of the above trigger sensitivity plus 0.5 div (EXT: 0.05 V) for signal of duty cycle 20 : 80. Repetition frequency: 50 Hz to 40 MHz Sweeps run in the free mode when no triggering input signal is applied. (Applicable for repetitive signals of frequency 50 Hz or over.) NORM: When no triggering signal is applied, the trace is in the READY state and not displayed. SINGLE: One-shot sweep with triggering signal. Can be reset to the READY state by means of the RESET switch. The READY lamp (LED) turns on when in the READY state or in the sweep operation. EXT triggering signal input: EXT HOR input terminal is used in common. Input impedance: 1 MΩ ±2 %//approx. 40 pf Maximum input voltage: 100 V (DC + AC peak), 1-AC: frequency 1 khz or lower B triggering signal: The A triggering signal of main sweep is used as the B triggering signal. Horizontal axis Horizontal axis display: A, A INT, B, B TRIG'D A sweep (main sweep) time: 0.1 µs to 0.5 s/div, 21 steps in sequence Sweep time accuracy: ±3 %, (10 to 35 C) Vernier sweep time control: 1/2.5 of panel-indicated value Holdoff time: B sweep delay system: Continuous delay and triggered delay B sweep (delay sweep) time: 0.1 µs to 0.5 ms/div, 12 steps Sweep time accuracy: ±3 %, (10 to 35 C) Delay time: 1 µs to 5 ms Delay jitter: 1/10000 Sweep magnification: 10 times (maximum sweep time 10 ns/div) 0.1 µs to 50 ms/div ±5 %, 510 MAG sweep time accuracy: 10 ns to 50 ns/div ±8 % (10 to 35 C) X-Y Mode Sensitivity: Sensitivity accuracy: Frequency bandwidth: X-Y phase difference: EXT HOR Mode Sensitivity: Frequency bandwidth: DC to 2 MHz (3 db) Phase difference between vertical axis: 3 % at DC to 100 khz Z Axis Sensitivity: Frequency bandwidth: Input resistance: Maximum input voltage: Calibration Voltage Waveform: Frequency: Duty ratio: Output voltage: Output impedance: Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature: Operating Humidity: Spec-Guaranteed Temperature: Storage Temperature: Storage Humidity: Operating Environment: Operating Altitude: Overvoltage Category: Pollution degree: Power Requirements: Dimensions: Weight: Accessories: Continuous variable> = twice sweep length (time) at 0.1 µs to 1 ms/div ranges. Same as vertical axis. (X-axis: CH1 input signal; Y-axis: CH2 input signal) NORM:±4 %, 10 MAG: ±6 % (10 to 35 C) DC to 2 MHz (3 db) 3 % at DC to 100 khz Approx. 0.1 V/div (Trace swept by an external horizontal signal applied to the EXT TRIG IN terminal. Vertical axis modes are CH1, CH2, DUAL and ADD modes in the CHOP mode.) 3 VP-P (Trace becomes brighter with negative input.) DC to 5 MHz Approx. 5 kω 50 V (DC + AC peak, AC frequency 1 khz) Positive-going square wave 1 khz ±5 % Within 48 : 52 2 VP-P ±2 % Approx. 2 kω 0 to 40 C 85 % RH (without condensation) 5 to 35 C 10 to 70 C 70 % RH (without condensation) Indoor use Up to 2000 m V, 120 V, 220 V, 230 VAC ±10 % (250 Vmax.), 50 Hz/60 Hz, 70 VA, 60 W (max.) 310 (W) 150 (H) 455 (D) mm 8.2 kg (18 lbs) Power cord... 1 Probes (LP-051C)... 2 Instruction manual

116 OSCILLOSCOPE High Sensitivity, Low Drift, 20 MHz Oscilloscope LS MHz OSCILLOSCOPE GENERAL Bright, sharp and rock-steady waveform display make the LS 8022 an ideal choice for production, educational and maintenance operations. Advanced features such as X-Y operation, variable holdoff, Z-axis (brightness) modulation and an advanced triggering system that tracks signal amplitude to eliminate fussy trigger adjustments makes this scope stand out in its price range. A pair of X1/X10 probes is provided. FEATURES High Sensitivity DC to 20 MHz Bandwidth Withstands up to 400 V dc + ac Peak Inputs Trigger Level Lock Function Ensures Stable Waveforms Dedicated TV-V and H Sync Separators CH1, CH2, Dual and ADD Modes CH2 Polarity Inversion Switchable Variable Holdoff to View Complex Wavetrains High Gain, Calibrated Use of V Amplifier via CH1 Output Sweep Time 0.1 µs to 0.5 s/div in 21 Steps X10 MAG Sweep Yields 10 ns/div Max Sweep Speed X-Y Operation Meets International Standards for EMI, EMS and Safety 116

117 OSCILLOSCOPE SPECIFICATIONS LS 8022 CRT Type: Phosphor: Acceleration voltage: Effective screen size: Vertical Axis Sensitivity: Sensitivity accuracy 5 mv to 5 V/div: 1 mv to 2 mv/div: Frequency bandwidth 5 mv to 5 V/div: 1 mv to 2 mv/div: Rise time 5 mv to 5 V/div: 1 mv to 2 mv/div: Input impedance: Vertical mode CH1: CH2: DUAL: CH1 signal output: Polarity inversion: Triggering Triggering source: Coupling: Polarity: Sensitivity DC to 5 MHz: 5 to 20 MHz: TV (video signal): AC coupling: HF-REJ: than 50 khz. LEVEL LOCK and ALT triggering: Triggering mode AUTO: 150 mm rectangular type, internal graticule. P 31 Approx. 2 kv 8 10 div (1 div = 10 mm) 1 mv to 5 V/div, 12 steps in sequence 3 % (10 to 35 C) 5 % (10 to 35 C) DC (AC:10Hz) to 20 MHz, 3 db DC (AC:10Hz) to 10 MHz, 3 db Approx ns Approx. 35 ns 1 M Ω ±2 %//Approx. 25 pf CH1 single channel. CH2 single channel. CHOP/ALT are auto-set by TIME/DIV switch. (CHOP:0.5 s to 5 ms/div, ALT: 2 ms to 0.1 µs/div) When CHOP switch is pushed in, the two traces are displayed in the CHOP mode at all range. ADD: CH1 + CH2 algebraic addition. Chopping repetition frequency: Approx. 250 khz Input coupling: AC, DC, GND Maximum input voltage: 400 V (DC + AC peak), AC: frequency 1 khz or lower. Approx. 100 mv/div without termination, 50 mv/div with 50 Ω termination. CH2 only CH1, CH2, LINE, EXT, ALT AC, HF-REJ, TV, DC (TV-V/TV-H can be auto-set by TIME/DIV range. TV-V: 0.5 s to 0.1 ms/div; TV-H: 50 µs to 0.1 µs/div) / 0.5 div (EXT: 0.1 V) 1.5 div (EXT: 0.2 V) 2.0 div (EXT: 0.2 V) Attenuate signal components of lower than 10 Hz. Attenuate signal components of higher Satisfies the value of the above trigger sensitivity plus 0.5 div (EXT: 0.05 V) for signal of duty cycle 20 : 80. Repetition frequency: 50 Hz to 20 MHz Sweeps run in the free mode when no triggering input signal is applied. (Applicable for repetitive signals of frequency 50 Hz or over.) NORM: When no triggering signal is applied, the trace is in the READY state and not displayed. EXT triggering signal input: EXT HOR input terminal is used in common. Input impedance: 1 MΩ ±2 %//approx. 40 pf Maximum input voltage: 100 V (DC + AC peak), 1-AC: frequency 1 khz or lower Horizontal axis sweep time: 0.1 µs to 0.5 s/div, 21 steps in sequence Sweep time accuracy: ±3 %, (10 to 35 C) Vernier sweep time control: 1/2.5 of panel-indicated value Holdoff time: Continuous variable> = twice sweep length (time) at 0.1 µs to 1 ms/div ranges. Sweep magnification: 10 times (maximum sweep time 10 ns/div) 510 MAG sweep time accuracy: 0.1 µs to 50 ms/div ±5 %, X-Y Mode Sensitivity: Sensitivity accuracy: Frequency bandwidth: X-Y phase difference: EXT HOR Mode Sensitivity: Frequency bandwidth: DC to 1 MHz (3 db) Phase difference between vertical axis: 3 % at DC to 50 khz Z Axis Sensitivity: Frequency bandwidth: Input resistance: Maximum input voltage: Calibration Voltage Waveform: Frequency: Duty ratio: Output voltage: Output impedance: Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature: Operating Humidity: Spec-Guaranteed Temperature: Storage Temperature: Storage Humidity: Operating Environment: Operating Altitude: Overvoltage Category: Pollution degree: Power Requirements: Dimensions: Weight: Accessories: 10 ns to 50 ns/div ±8 % (10 to 35 C) Same as vertical axis. (X-axis: CH1 input signal; Y-axis: CH2 input signal) NORM:±4 %, 10 MAG: ±6 % (10 to 35 C) DC to 1 MHz (3 db) 3 % at DC to 50 khz Approx. 0.1 V/div (Trace swept by an external horizontal signal applied to the EXT TRIG IN terminal. Vertical axis modes are CH1, CH2, DUAL and ADD modes in the CHOP mode.) 3 VP-P (Trace becomes brighter with negative input.) DC to 5 MHz Approx. 5 kω 50 V (DC + AC peak), AC: frequency 1 khz or lower Positive-going square wave 1 khz ±5 % Within 48 : 52 2 VP-P ±2 % Approx. 2 kω 0 to 40 C 85 % RH (without condensation) 5 to 35 C 10 to 70 C 70 % RH (without condensation) Indoor use Up to 2000 m V, 120 V, 220 V, 230 VAC ±10 % (250 Vmax.) 50 Hz/60 Hz, 70 VA, 60 W (max.) 310 (W) 150 (H) 455 (D) mm 8.2 kg Power cord... 1 Probes (LP-051C)... 2 Instruction manual

118 OTHERS Upon request SPECIFICATIONS Measuring Frequency Range: Max. Input Voltage: Residual Noise: Input Impedance: Input Terminal: Gain: Output Impedance: Output Terminal: Power Requirements: Dimensions: Weight: Accessories: LBA Hz to 20 khz ±0.1 db 3 Hz to 100 khz ±0.5 db 10 Vrms (4 Ω 25 W), 10 Hz to 100 khz Less than 40 µv 150 kω, Input capacitance less than 20 pf Binding post 0 db ±0.1 db at 1 khz 600 Ω Binding post 100, 120, 200, 220, 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 4 VA 150 (W) 45 (H) 270(D) mm 1.3 kg Pair plug-pair plug... 2 Instruction manual... 1 LBA-1810 BTL ADAPTOR SPECIFICATIONS LE 713 LE 713 THERMAL PRINTER GENERAL The LE 713 is a small thermal printer that output data from the LF 983 Signal Level Meter Since the printer contains a Lithium-ion batter, graph and data print can be obtained from the Signal Level Meter at any time any place. FEATURES The printer structure is compact and lightweight. The printer provides high-speed printing with low noise. Rechargeable Lithium-ion battery lets you operate the printer wherever necessary. The printer has a dual power supply system and also works on power from the dedicated AC adapter, which doubles as a charger. Printer specifications Printing method: Thermal line dot printing Total number of dots: 384 dots Dot density: 8 dots/mm Printing width: 48 mm Fastest printing speed: 400 dot lines/sec. (50.0 mm/sec.) Character configuration/dimensions/ Maximum number of printing digits Lateral dot pitch: Paper feed pitch: Service life Pulse resistance: anti-abrasion: Data input control: Japanese character fonts: Kanji ROM used: Power supply (1)Internal power supply: (2)External power supply : Current consumption: Note): Dimensions: weight: 16-dot system Half-size character: 48 digits, 16 x 8 dots, 2.0 x 1.0 mm Full-size character: 24 digits, 16 x 16 dots, 2.0 x 2.0 mm 24-dot system Half-size character: 32 digits, 24 x 12 dots, 3.0 x 1.5 mm Full-size character: 16 digits, 24 x 24 dots, 3.0 x 3.0 mm P=0.125 mm P=0.125 mm (in the case of 25 C and rated energy) 100 million pulses or more (printing ratio: 12.5 %) 50 km or greater Serial input (RS232C)/IrDA input Conforms tojis X Gothic JIS class I non-kanji JIS class I kanji JIS class II kanji 520 characters 2,965 characters 3,388 characters 7.2 V DC, llithiumion battery (UR-100) 8.7 V DC(AC adapter used/blm-100w) While waiting: 100 ma or less While printing: 3.0 A at average (3.5 A at maximum) 140 (W) 45.6 (H) 101.5(D) in mm About 350 g (main of the printer only) note: The above value are those when the number of simultaneously energized dots is 64 dots. 118

119 For Video Test Instruments ACCESSORIES Rackmount Adapter Rackmount Adapter LR-2750-I LR-2700A-I EIA standard, inch size LC 2125A Blank Panel For LV 5750 LC 2125A Blank Panel Cabinet Cabinet LR-2404A LR-2427B without handle with handle Illumination lamp LI-2306 (A set of 5 pcs.) Illumination lamp LI-2307 (A set of 2 pcs.) Illumination lamp LI-2308 (LED) Metal Cabinet LC 2126 Viewing Hood LH 2139 Tripod Mounting Plate LC 2127 For LV 5750 For LV 5750 A must for outdoor use For LV 5750 LP-1960 AC Adapter For LT 4400, LV 5750, LV 7700, LV

120 ACCESSORIES For Video Test Instruments Dedicated Rack Mount Adapter (Sold Separately) LR-2477 Rackmount Adapter LR-2480 Rackmount Adapter Model LR-2700A-I LR-2750-I LR-2404A LR-2427B LR-2477 LR-2480 LI-2306 LI-2307 Product Name Rackmount adaptor Rackmount adaptor Cabinet (without handle) Cabinet (with handle) Rackmount adaptor Rackmount adaptor Illumination lamp Illumination lamp LV 5800, LV 5100D, LV 5100DE, LV 5152, LV 5152DA, 5210, 5212, 5220, 5222, LV 5700A, LV 5750, 5835, LV 5836C, 5850V, 5851V, 5860V, 5861V, 5870, 5872A, 5873 LV 5750 only LV 5800, LV 5100D, LV 5100DE, LV 5152, LV 5152DA, 5210, 5212, 5220, 5222, LV 5700A 2 units of LV 7700 / LT 4400 fit in LR-2477 One unit of LV 7700 or LT 4400 fit in LR-2480 (Not for 2 units) Replacing with a lamp for 5200 series, LV 5152DA, LV5100D/DE, 5870, 5872A, 5873, 5850V, 5860V, etc. Replacing with a lamp for 5835 Applicalle Model LI-2308 LC 2128 Illumination lamp (LED) Front cover White CRT is standard. POWER REQUIREMENTS: VA in the Power Consumption indicates the apparent power. Description and specifications in this catalog are subject to change without previous notice. Replacing with a lamp for 5870, 5872A, 5873, 5850V, 5851V, 5860V, LV 5100D, LV 5100DE, Except LV 5152DA LV 5700A, LV

121 Optional Accessories ACCESSORIES Adapter for Type F Connector (F-A-PJ) CONNECTOR F 077 Protection for input connector Applicable Model LF 941D LC-1581 BNC-JPJ Dummy Antenna Dummy Antenna For LG 3236 For LG 3236 LSS-5012 For car radio Input Impedance: 50 Ω Output Impedance: FM: 75 Ω AM: 80 Ω LSS-5013 For car radio Input Impedance: 50 Ω Output Impedance: FM: 75 Ω AM: 80 Ω TERMINATION RESISTORS Termination Resistors Feed Through Type Termination Resistor Model Imped- Frequency Con- Spec. common to ance Range nector each model LT Ω DC to 300 MHz BNC-P VSWR...less than 1.05 LT Ω DC to 300 MHz N-P Power...1/4 W LT Ω DC to 1 GHz N-P Model Imped- Frequency VSWR Power Connector ance Range LT Ω DC to 300 MHz less than 1.3 1/2 W BNC 121

122 DATA VHF Broadcasting Channel TV Frequency Table fv : Video Carrier Frequency, fs : Sound Carrier Frequency Japan ch. U.S.A. ch. C.C.I.R. ch. Italy ch. CH. No. fv MHz fs MHz CH. No. fv MHz fs MHz CH. No. fv MHz fs MHz CH. No. fv MHz fs MHz IF IF IF IF A B C D E F G H H H fs fv = 4.5 MHz fs fv = 4.5 MHz fs fv = 5.5 MHz fs fv =5.5 MHz Australia ch. Angola ch. New France ch. OIRT ch. CH. No. fv MHz fs MHz CH. No. fv MHz fs MHz CH. No. fv MHz fs MHz CH. No. fv MHz fs MHz IF IF IF IF A B C C A fs fv = 5.5 MHz fs fv = 6 MHz fs fv = ± 6.5 MHz fs fv = 6.5 MHz China ch. Ivory Coast ch. New Zealand ch. Indonesia ch. CH. No. fv MHz fs MHz CH. No. fv MHz fs MHz CH. No. fv MHz fs MHz CH. No. fv MHz fs MHz IF IF IF IF A fs fv = 6.5 MHz fs fv = 6 MHz fs fv = 5.5 MHz fs fv = 5.5 MHz French Overseas Morocco ch. Ireland ch. South Africa ch. Territories ch. CH. No. fv MHz fs MHz CH. No. fv MHz fs MHz CH. No. fv MHz fs MHz CH. No. fv MHz fs MHz IF IF IF IF A B C D E F G H J fs fv = 5.5 MHz fs fv = 6 MHz fs fv = 6 MHz fs fv = 6.5 MHz 122

123 UHF Broadcasting Channel DATA TV Frequency Table Japan/U.S.A. ch. Europe/South Africa ch. China ch. Australia ch. Japan U.S.A. CH. No. CH. No. fv MHz fs MHz CH. No. fv MHz fs MHz CH. No. fv MHz fs MHz CH. No. fv MHz fs MHz fs fv = 5.5 MHz CH width = 7.0 MHz fs =fv MHz fv MHz fv MHz The table shows only fv MHz CH width = 8.0 MHz fs fv = 6.5 MHz CH width =8.0MHz

124 DATA TV Frequency Table CATV Channel Japan ch. U.S.A. ch. Europe ch. CH. No. fv MHz fs MHz CH. No. fv MHz fs MHz CH. No. fv MHz fs MHz C S C S C A S C A S C A S C A S C A S C A S C A S C B S C S D S E S F G H I C C C S C S C S C J S C K S C L S C M S C N S C O S C P S C Q S C R S C S S C T S C U S C V S C W S C AA S C BB S C CC S C DD S C EE S C FF S C GG S C HH S C II S C JJ S C KK S C LL S C MM S C NN S C OO fs fv = 5.5 MHz C PP CH width = 7.0 MHz C QQ C RR C SS C TT C UU C VV fs fv = 4.5 MHz WW CH width = 6.0 MHz XX YY ZZ AAA BBB CCC fs fv = 4.5 MHz CH width = 6.0 MHz 124

125 DATA 3P Round Pin Attachment plug (3 wire cord) U.K. and European Type SW Round Pin Attachment plug (3 wire cord) U.K. and European Type Bangladesh, India, Pakistan, Sri-Lanka Suisse S Flat Blade Attachment Plug (2 wire cord) CP Round Pin Attachment plug (2 wire cord) China, Countries / Areas Hong Kong, Korea, Philippines, Singapore Sri-Lanka, Countries/Area Formosa, Cyprus, Israel, Saudi Arabia Italy EU Round Pin Attachment Plug (3 wire cord) U.K. and European Type UA Flat Blade Attachment Plug (3 wire cord) U.S. Type Indonesia, Thailand, Australia, Belgium, Denmark, France, Finland Germany, Greece, Ireland, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Spain, Sweden Bahrain, Iran, Iraq, Kuwait, Lebanon, Oman, Syria, New Caledonia, Africa, Cambodia, Myanmar, Hungary, Czecho, Romania, Viet-Nam BF Square Pin Attachment Plug(3 wire cord) U.K. and European Type U.S.A., Canada 3B Flat Blade Attachment Plug (3 wire cord) Australia Type Australia, New Zealand, Papua New Guinea 125

126 Note : CE Certification are standard for following models ; LT 428, LT 1606, LS 8022, LS 8050 CE Certification are available upon request for following models ; LMV-186A, LT 292, LW 360, 408NPS, LT 416, LT 436NP, LT 443D, LT 444, LT 448, LF 970, LT 1610A, LT 1611, LT B, LBA-1810, LE 1870, LE 1871, LE 1875, 3217, LG 3236(S1), LG 3802(S1), LG , LG 3804, LV 5100D, LV 5100DE, LV 5152DA, 5210, 5212, 5220, 5222, LV 5700A, LV 5750, LV 5800, 5851V, 5861V, LV 7700, LV 7720, LT 9213A Other models : Please contact your Leader agents. 126

127